Home

ACS800 Programming Manual

1. 22 Ho SUI FOG Se CHM Oo d dnd ur ts c ae ad oe sot Ga di dedi ar ne Ge a 22 Control panel Chapter oVervIeW eO bb Wa wage iet wa Ra ee Xd BE EA 25 OVERVIEW or he 33 33 bee UU EON D d 25 Panel operation mode keys and displays 26 S omar Sen mide Et atas eget 26 Drive control witn tne panel xg x he oa qae Yo YD CELA CC 27 How to start stop and change direction 27 How to sebspeed reference 54 b aed edi dda ep d eed ane dde oap et dete ua E 28 Actual signal display mode 29 How to select actual signals to the display 29 How to display the full name of the actual signals 30 How to view and reset the fault history 30 How to display and reset an active fault 31 ADOUFE uod eoe sc d dd DO Ed E 31 Parameter Tode d oe d SCR ERR OE ERE d Bop We po du S ies 32 How to select a parameter and change the value 32 How to adjust a source selection pointe
2. 51 a aa a LAS LE qu 51 Programmable relay outputs 52 Update cycles in the Standard Control Program 52 SUNS was as _ gt 52 Breed eed Ba eee 52 Actual sanie hok utr are 53 SCUINGS 53 PC 53 MOLOFIGENUTIGALON uu ee AC Pie 53 wisi M RS CC in we ee ws ae ec ta ee PIS Stk Ole es 53 Power IOSSTIOGe Inib oll gli eate ri tid eot domu don d gts AE a aes eee eri te o4 Automate Sta bai E Vd idu erede 54 Table of contents vicisse ees Pees ees 54 OC NGONG SIN Sues apd ees coke eee on 55 a ects tee oh eek tae 55 p gt ee ee es ee a ee 55 SS CUI eae ee a et ech meee ee ts heh ere eee 55 PRUX Braking TP TTE 55 SOLUM dS coe tc duit ne _____ _ _ __ _ _ ___ dass 56 2 ODULIil
3. eL eens 110 113 RELAY OUTPUTS cu gt 116 ISANALOGUE OUTPUTS icut Ol 122 1659 YOr GC TERE INPUTS atu dE die dut _ _ SS 124 Z0 TII AT aus de dtu gatas 127 VW RR TOR EID 129 22 ACUEHDEGEB fg A 132 2 GS Oa Ol od EE ee 135 24 NOROQUE CURL ce ddr 137 d 137 ZO MOTOR CONTROL aces ts ae ee 138 ZI BRAKE CHOPE ER Se CS iem ird dt eae 140 Table of contents 10 SOFAS TRUNG TIONS s s aed edes s 141 SL AULOMANICRESET etd URGENT oe 147 SZ SUPERVISION ease eds wae ere en Coa ve Eus Rae Se See 148 SSIINFORMATION s iud oes eo oe ees oe 149 PROCESS VARIABLE gcc big E MEER 150 SOMO ilte TT E 152 CONTROL uuu euis Ss
4. Actual signals and parameters 151 5 eod T 3 2 p as 3 N o D gt 2 34 08 SELECT P VAR Selects the drive variable scaled into a desired process variable See parameter 34 01 34 04 MOTOR SP FILT TIM Defines a filter time constant for actual signal 01 02 SPEED The time constant has an effect on all functions in which signal SPEED is used 3 gt 7 11 12 14 2 2 TI alal alal ees 20 21 The actual speed value is used e g in speed supervision parameter group 32 SUPERVISION as an analogue output value group 15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS or as an actual signal shown on the control panel display or PC screen Actual signals and parameters 152 0 20000 ms Filter time constant Signal 1 1 et 100 P filter input step filter output Filtered Signal T filter time constant 34 05 ACT FILT TIM Defines a filter time for the actual signal torque actual signal 01 05 Affects also on the torque supervision parameters 32 07 and 32 09 and the torque read through an analogue output 0 20000 ms Filter time constant Signal 1 1 100 filter input step A M filter output Filtered Signal ae T filter time constant T 34 00 RESET RUNTIME Resets the motor r
5. 90 6 ees zov INO L 58 3389 0 enBojeuy 114 ININOO 02 0 ON LINVA ININOO 8108 JojoeuueJed Jed AA dnoJD Jed xx 9434 1075 ees LOY indino visa 24884 145 VLvd cO OL AAXX ewo 510129195 4 00 0 PL LO P ees sjndino 371971 3 13 V Vd 1X3 cV VO LX3 begypeeds PRLS 136 viva NIVIN Jejydepy 1 1 SG NIVIN 6170 gt snapietj MO NIVIN LINVA WINOO 9L0 Loco 9 pesn si Xxxy odA 3ndui 5 Fieldbus control 203 s Jesn eui pesn si uoneoiunuiuioo 60710 40 210 GAAdS 2010 xx JojeujeJed ued AA dnoJD sed xx 9 qei 195 ejep ul AA XX 18UJJ0J SPJOM 10
6. BE TN 2609FSMETHOD or Jr pF rr Bo W CHOPPER 27 02 OVERLOADFUNC NO NO NO NO _ 2703 BRRESISTANCE BB ZL04BRTHERMTCONST s ps bs pbs BE9 2705 CONTBRPOWER okw Pkw KW pw pw 27 06 CTRL MODE COMMON DC COMMON DC COMMON DC DC COMMON DC 531 80 FAULTFUNCTIONS ___ 30 01 lt FUNCTION FAULT FAULT faur FAUT B0 02 PANELLOSS 7 FAULT EU NUMEN EM CHEM EIE 5004 THERMPROT NO NO 30 05 THERM P MODE DTC USER DTC USER DTC USER DTC USER DTC USER 05 lt 3006 MOTOR THERM TIME calculated calculated calculated calculated 30 07 MOTOR LOAD CURVE 000 ____ 100 0 ____ 100 0 ____ 100 0 00 607 SO 08ZERO SPEED LOAD 740 ____ 740 409 4 0 68 B0 09 BREAKPOINT 50Hz 30 10 FUNCTION FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT eoj 301 0 QooHz bn 3012 TIME 0005 2000s 0005 ____20 006 20005 BO 7 UNDERLOAD FUN No RO 30 14 UNDERLOAD TIME 0005 6000s 005 6000s 60005 30 15 UNDERLOAD CURVE 25 30 16 10885 No M bej SO I7 EARTHFAULT ___ FAULT
7. E 16 06 LOCAL LOCK Disables entering local control mode LOC REM key of the panel WARNING Before activating ensure that the control panel is not N needed for stopping the drive OFF Local control allowed Local control disabled 65535 16 07 PARAMETER SAVE Saves the valid parameter values to the permanent memory Note A new parameter value of a standard macro is saved automatically when changed from the panel but not when altered through a fieldbus connection DONE Saving completed SAVE Saving in progress 1 16 08 RUN ENA PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 16 08 of parameter 16 01 255 255 31 Parameter index a constant value See parameter 10 04 for information on 255 255 31 C the difference 32768 32767 16 09 CTRL BOARD Defines the source of the control board power supply SUPPLY Note If an external supply is used but this parameter has value INTERNAL the drive trips on a fault at power switch off 1610 ASSISTSEL EmbesmeSatupAssam 1611 FAULT RESET PTR Defines source or constant for selection PARAM 16 11 of parameter 1604 0 _ 255 255 31 Parameter index or a constant value See parameter 10 04 for information on 255 255 31 C the difference 32768 C 32767 71612 RESET COUNTER Resets the cooing fan running tme counter or KWh counter Ne Actual signals and parameters
8. 228 Warning messages generated by the control panel 235 Fault messages generated by the drive 236 Analogue Extension Module PUE D ac aea a D re eat iua ae a UR die GR rae 245 Speed control through the analogue extension module 245 Basile COCKS va du Su ee co e ERU OM qud Sed aU de dope os ti 245 Settings of the analogue extension module and the drive 245 Parameter settings bipolar input in basic speed control 246 Parameter settings bipolar input in joystick mode 247 Table of contents 12 Additional data actual signals and parameters Chapter oVerVIOW e AU au GS ie Co He 249 Terms abbreviations 249 FICIGDUS ACCIESSCS POS SR RULES s dios Se dose de oc 249 Rxxx adapter modules such as RPBA 01 RDNA 01 etc 249 Nxxx adapter modules such as NPBA 12 NDNA 02 etc 249 NPBA 12 Prollbus Adapte 20 ar xac ab eed we d 249 NIBA 01 IriterBlls 9 250 01 ModbusPlus Adapter and 01 Modbus Adapter 250 Acua gn
9. Note If 98 12 is activated the analogue extension is also used for motor 1 temperature measurement the standard I O terminals not in use Note If an optional analogue I O extension module RAIO is used for the temperature measurement and 35 01 MOT 1 TEMP AI1 SEL and or 35 04 MOT 2 TEMP AI2 SEL are set to 1xPT100 analogue extension module input signal range must be set to 0 2 V instead of 0 10 V with DIP switches 3505 MOT 2 TEMP ALM L Defines the alarm limit for the motor 2 temperature measurement function The alarm indication is given when the limit is exceeded 10 5000 ohm C See 35 02 10 5000 PTC Pt100 Actual signals and parameters 154 35 06 MOT2TEMPFLTL Defines the fault trip limit for the motor 2 temperature measurement function The fault indication is given when the limit is exceeded 10 5000 ohm C See 35 03 10 5000 1 PTC Pt100 35 07 MOT MOD Selects whether measured motor 1 temperature is used in the motor model COMPENSAT compensation YES The temperature is used in the motor model compensation 2 Note Selection is effective only when Pt 100 sensor s are used Motor temperature is brought from the automation system to the drive 3 35 08 MOT MOD COMP The source for the motor temperature feedback when parameter 35 07 has PTR been set to value YES PAR35 08 255 255 31 Parameter index a constant value 255 255 31 Exampl
10. 5 0 0 Jojdepy snapietr4 pesn si XXXN e uauM 5 3ndui 5 J9 O1JUOD Fieldbus control 205 pesn si ejyoud uoneoiunujuoo 2ueuec USYM AON3nO3M4J 6010 40 JO OW 210 GAAdS Z0 L0 xx y pue OL 14 QHOM SNLVLS 20 20 5 9 8 Sd 1 01 U0 0 5 9 spiom 50 Sd 145 VLVG CLOW 145 VLvd IVN9IIS TWNLOV Zo xx SNLVLS 145 VLvd IVN9IIS TWNLOV NIVIN LOL J18V L l IVWN9SIS 1 pesn si XXXN 104 enjoy Fieldbus control 206 Communication profiles The ACS800 supports three communication profiles ABB Drives communication profile Generic Drive communication profile CSA 2 8 3 0 communication profile The ABB Drives communication profile should be selected with type Nxxx fieldbus adapter modules and when the manufacturer specific mode is selected via t
11. Rated Motor Power 1 2 2 kW 2 15 kW F Hz 8 37 kW 4 75 kW 250kw TEPE pec 80 Flux Brakin i f Hz 5 10 20 30 40 50 The drive monitors the motor status continuously also during the Flux Braking Therefore Flux Braking can be used both for stopping the motor and for changing the speed The other benefits of Flux Braking are The braking starts immediately after a stop command is given The function does not need to wait for the flux reduction before it can start the braking cooling of the motor is efficient The stator current of the motor increases during the Flux Braking not the rotor current The stator cools much more efficiently than the rotor Settings Parameter 26 02 Flux Optimisation Flux Optimisation reduces the total energy consumption and motor noise level when the drive operates below the nominal load The total efficiency motor and the drive can be improved by 196 to 1096 depending on the load torque and speed Settings Parameter 26 01 Program features 57 Acceleration and deceleration ramps Two user selectable acceleration and deceleration ramps are available It is possible to adjust the acceleration deceleration times and the ramp shape Switching between the two ramps can be controlled via a digital input speed The available ramp shape alternatives are Linear MOUSE and S curve Linear Suitable for drives requirin
12. 255 255 31 Parameter index or a constant value See parameter 10 04 for information 255 255 31 C the difference 32768 32767 Actual signals and parameters 122 15 ANALOGUE Selection of the actual signals to be indicated through the analogue outputs OUTPUTS Output signal processing See section Programmable analogue outputs on page 50 15 01 ANALOGUE Connects a drive signal to analogue output 1 OUTPUT 1 P SPEED Value of a user defined process quantity derived from the motor speed See parameter group 34 PROCESS VARIABLE for scaling and unit selection 90 m s rom The updating interval is 100 ms SPEED Motor speed signal 01 02 SPEED 20 mA motor nominal speed The updating interval is 24 ms The value is filtered with the filter time constant defined by parameter 34 04 MOTOR SP FILT TIM FREQUENCY Output frequency 20 mA motor nominal frequency The updating interval is 24 ms CURRENT Output current 20 mA motor nominal current The updating interval is 24 ms TORQUE Motor torque 20 mA 100 of motor nominal rating The updating interval is 24 ms POWER Motor power 20 mA 100 of motor nominal rating The updating interval is 100 ms DC BUS VOLT DC bus voltage 20 mA 100 of the reference value The reference value is 540 VDC 1 35 400 V for 380 415 VAC supply voltage rating and 675 VDC 1 35 500 V for 380 500 VAC supply The updati
13. 1315 ANO 190 Pma mA mA 91 Additional data actual signals and parameters 255 Index Name Selection FACTORY HAND AUTO PID TRL FCTRL SEQCTRL PB W 777 20 7 20 0 oma Poma 92 13 18 hoon 100 hon 1004 193 13 9 pios 0406 0408 0106 paj 13 201 1 21MINIMUMAIG Oma pma bm 13 22 ______ ____ 0 Poma 13 23 6 6 100 100 100 1004 13 24 6 0408 0106 25 NVERTAE __ 4 RELAYOUTPUTS 404RO1TONDELAY bos Jos 006 o4 W bo b b b bD 264 gi W oo o D b pew 0 D Pow bP b b0 AQ Pow 21RoPme 0 gai W azRoPR _ bP b bD D D D Q p b D 0 paw No Oma Pma pma Dm paj _______0406 0406 Dios pios pos 15 05 ________100 1005 i009 ______ 100 1009 15 07 2 p9
14. 1 Motor current IN Nominal motor current Drive output frequency 50 0 150 0 Allowed continuous motor load in percent of the nominal motor current 50 30 08 ZERO SPEED LOAD Defines the load curve together with parameters 30 07 30 09 25 25 0 150 0 Allowed continuous motor load at zero speed in percent of the nominal motor current 30 09 BREAK POINT Defines the load curve together with parameters 30 07 and 30 08 1 0 300 0 Hz Drive output frequency at 100 load 30000 150 150 O Actual signals and parameters 145 30 40 STALL FUNCTION Selects how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition The protection wakes up if the drive is at stall limit defined by parameters 20 03 20 13 and 20 14 the output frequency is below the level set by parameter 30 11 and the conditions above have been valid longer than the time set by parameter 30 12 Note Stall limit is restricted by internal current limit 03 04 TORQ_INV_CUR_LIM See section Stall Protection on page 63 FAULT The drive trips on a fault by parameter 30 12 3011 STALLFREGHI Defines the frequency imitfor the stall function See parameter 9010 30 13 UNDERLOAD FUNC Selects how the drive reacts to underload The protection wakes if the motor torque falls below the curve selected by parameter 30 15 output frequency is higher than 10 of the nominal motor frequency and the above c
15. 6312 3 6210 C3 180 kg gt IEC 34 1 lt gt motor nominal voltage Allowed range 1 2 UN 2 UN of ACS800 refers to the highest voltage in each of the nominal voltage ranges 415 VAC for 400 VAC units 500 VAC for 500 VAC units and 690 VAC for 600 VAC units motor nominal current Allowed range approx 1 6 long 99 04 SCALAR 2 Of ACS800 0 2 long if parameter motor nominal frequency Range 8 300 Hz motor nominal speed Range 1 18000 rpm motor nominal power Range 0 9000 kW Start up and control through the 1 gt 0 0 rpm O 99 START UP DATA 02 APPLICATION MACRO 1 gt 0 0 rpm 99 START UP DATA 04 MOTOR CTRL MODE DTC Note Set the motor data to exactly the same value as on the motor nameplate For example if the motor nominal speed is 1440 rpm on the nameplate setting the value of parameter 99 08 MOTOR NOM SPEED to 1500 rpm results in the wrong operation of the drive 1 gt 0 0 rpm O 99 START UP DATA 05 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE 1 gt 0 0 rpm O 99 START UP DATA 06 MOTOR NOM CURRENT b i 1 gt 0 0 rpm O 99 START UP DATA 07 MOTOR NOM FREQ 1 gt 0 0 rpm O 99 START UP DATA 08 MOTOR NOM SPEED 1 gt 0 0 rpm O 99 START UP DATA 09 MOTOR NOM POWER When the motor data has been entered two displays warning and information start to alternate Move to next step without pressing any ke
16. 12 Mul ial 40 16 40 15 x 40 01 Actual Values 40 05 40 07 40 13 Al2 Sf PIDmax PIDmin Al5 Al6 40 19 us 4019 ref The drive reference before trimming ref The drive reference after trimming max speed Par 20 02 or 20 01 if the absolute value is greater max freq Par 20 08 or 20 07 if the absolute value is greater max torg Par 20 14 or 20 13 if the absolute value is greater Settings Parameter Additional information 40 14 40 18 Trimming function settings 40 01 40 13 40 19 PID control block settings Group 20 LIMITS Drive operation limits Program features 48 Program features The drive runs a conveyor line It is speed controlled but the line tension also needs to be taken into account If the measured tension exceeds the tension setpoint the speed will be slightly decreased and vice versa To accomplish the desired speed correction the user e activates the trimming function and connects the tension setpoint and the measured tension to it e tunes the trimming to a suitable level Speed controlled conveyor line Simplified block diagram Speed reference Tension measurement Tension setpoint Add Tension measurement Drive rollers pull Trimmed speed reference 49 Programmable analogue inputs The drive has three programmable analogue inputs one voltage input 0 2 to 10 V or 10
17. 154 42 BRAKE CONTROL 3 2 Pete ater eRe eh EN ae 159 ENERGY OPT cuvette tb ke eas 161 SU ENCODER MODULE elites oboe 162 51 COMM MODULE DAT denn cogs ces 163 92 STANDARD MODBUS 8 8 371 eae ere Cates 163 OU MASTER FOLBONVER sa odere To E E Ub dua poc ate 163 0 DDCS CONUROL 3335 165 I2 USER LOAD CURVE Te FREES EHR eT 166 SS ADAPT PROG CURL arrear re E bea a e d etie ern 168 S4 ADAP MVE PROOISAIL x 1 3 2 Oe x Ro eye oe PRO ee EA RAE ELE eed 169 Oo USER CONSTANLDS iretur a eo dia aede eoe be a E Re ws 170 SUD SET RECGADDR 32 qae qi ok eoa e D d oe eaten 171 920 SETIRADDR c rere ise RETE taies cde ud idi Ee 172 BARDWAIRE SPECIF we xar gesto su ate qr Ut uA OCA P OUR AAT tet Sra pr 172 OO E LEES S ccs bande dud x ad ate hd Aa econ trit mi 175 JO OP RNONMODULE od 177 99 5 TAI TSUE IDA A se sett Neder be Cee doa M Uo Kane b idee ad dnd 183 Fieldbus control Chapter O
18. Defines the maximum torque limit 1 for the drive Value of limit in percent of motor nominal torque 0 60000 Activates deactivates the overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the limit the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque Note If a brake chopper and resistor are connected to the drive the controller must be off selection NO to allow chopper operation Overvoltage control activated 65535 Activates or deactivates the undervoltage control of the intermediate DC link If the DC voltage drops due to input power cut off the undervoltage controller will automatically decrease the motor speed in order to keep the voltage above the lower limit By decreasing the motor speed the inertia of the load will cause regeneration back into the drive keeping the DC link charged and preventing an undervoltage trip until the motor coasts to stop This will act as a power loss ride through functionality in systems with a high inertia such as a centrifuge or a fan Undervoltage control activated 65535 Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency The limit can be set only parameter 99 04 SCALAR 30000 5000 Minimum frequency limit Note If the value is positive the motor cannot be run in the reverse direction Actual signals a
19. E E Lr E da 2 Al AN BIPOLAR 11 03 parameter 11 03 11 03 11 07 EXT REF2 MINIMUM Defines the minimum value for external reference REF2 absolute value a Setting range in percent Correspondence to the source signal limits Source is an analogue input See example for parameter 11 04 Source is a serial link See chapter Fie dbus control 11 08 EXT REF2 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum value for external reference REF2 absolute value Corresponds to the maximum setting of the source signal used Setting range Correspondence to the source signal limits Source is an analogue input See parameter 11 04 Source is a serial link See chapter Fie dbus control 11 09 EXT 1 2 SEL PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 11 09 of parameter 11 02 255 255 31 Parameter index a constant value See parameter 10 04 for information on 255 255 31 C the difference 32768 32767 11 40 EXT 1 REF Defines the source or constant for value PAR 11 10 of parameter 11 03 255 255 31 Parameter index a constant value See parameter 10 04 for information 255 255 31 C the difference 32768 32767 1111 2 REF PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 11 11 of parameter 11 06 255 255 31 Parameter index a constant value See parameter 10 04 for information on 255 255 31 C the d
20. See parameter 14 01 Source selected by parameter 14 17 See parameter 14 01 NOT USED READY RUNNING FAULT See parameter 14 01 FAULT 1 See parameter 14 01 FAULT RST See parameter 14 01 STALL WARN See parameter 14 01 7 MOTTEMPWRN REF2SEL 17 CONST SPEED See parameter 14 01 18 See parameter 14 01 See parameter 14 01 See parameter 14 01 Actual signals and parameters 119 MAGN READY The motor is magnetised and ready to give nominal torque nominal magnetising of the motor has been reached COMM REF3 15 See parameter 14 01 PARAM 14 18 Source selected by parameter 14 18 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 30 31 32 01 33 34 s 01 36 BC SHORT CIR See parameter 14 01 14 04 RO1 TON DELAY Defines the operation delay for the relay 1 0 0 3600 05 Setting range The figure below illustrates the operation on and release off delays for relay output RO1 Drive status 0 36000 RO1 status Actual signals and parameters 120 Selects the drive status indicated through relay output RO1 of digital I O extension module 1 optional see parameter 98 03 Selects the drive status indicated through relay output RO2 of digital I O extension module 1 optional see parameter 98 03 AT SPEED See parameter 14 01 PARAM 14 20 Source selected by parame
21. ___ ___ 3 DI3 Speed torquecontrolselect 4 04 Constantspeed4 Par 12057 5 DI5 Acceleration 8 deceleration select 6 2 Enable 7 24 24 VDC max 100 mA 8 9 DGND Digitalgrund 0 0 X23 Auxiliary voltage output and input 2 GND isolated 24 V DC 250 mA 9 X25 1 ROM Relay output 1 2 RO12 2 9 RO13 26 4 21 Relay output 2 2 RO22 i 2 SET Running X27 x NN Relay output 3 Faut 2 RO32 Inverted fault 3 033 93 Sequential Control macro This macro offers seven preset constant speeds which can be activated by digital inputs 014 to 016 Two acceleration deceleration ramps are preset The acceleration and deceleration ramps are applied according to the state of digital input DI3 The Start Stop and Direction commands are given through digital inputs DI1 and DI2 External speed reference can be given through analogue input Al1 The reference is active only when all of the digital inputs DI4 to DI6 are 0 VDC Giving operational commands and setting reference is possible also from the control panel Two analogue and three relay output signals are available on terminal blocks Default stop mode is ramp The default signals on the display of the control panel are FREQUENCY CURRENT and POWER Operation diagram The figure below shows an example of the use of the macro Speed 3 St
22. bG ANOS ui 510129195 DINeds y pue OL 14 QHOM SNLVLS NIYIN 20 20 01 pexiJ x CHOM SNLVLS PJOM 1 1015 4 vax U 77 SPJOM CLOW 145 TIWNOIS TWNLOV 66 86 26 xx HLOV SNLVLS LOL J18V L Sd l IVWN9SIS 1 CN SF 10 CO F 3171971 145 VLVG pesn s 5 od gt Fieldbus control 204 c0 OL LO OL J18vL 1 9 cV LO baad LO Q LO ER 20 9075 ees indino enbojeuy 1075 ees LOY LNO L SG 438 2 OV OM 114 NNOO 0206 ONNA 11073 WINOO 81 06 0 vL ees sjndino 24884 e WINOO LIV LIV e MO WWOO e LIQ J3H WINOO 145 VLvd JON3H3d3 145 NIVIN LNO L SO 338 NIYIN 6L 0 ON WINOO 8L0 Z L 1016 VIN 5
23. gt 200 kohm modules installed on the board m Speed reference Auto control 0 4 6 2 1 20 Rj 100 ohm By default not in use 0 4 20 mA 8 AI3 100 ohm oF 9 AO1 Motor speed 0 4 20 mA 0 motor nom speed lt 700 ohm Output current 0 4 20 mA 0 motor nom current lt 700 ohm X22 4 04 4 1205 6 Auto control 4 24 VDC max 100 mA 8 9 DGND1 Digital ground __ X23 1 Auxiliary voltage output and input non 2 isolated 24 V DC 250 3 Relay output 1 Ready Relay output 2 Running Relay output 3 Inverted fault Application macros 89 PID Control macro The PID Control macro is used for controlling a process variable such as pressure or flow by controlling the speed of the driven motor Process reference signal is connected to analogue input Al1 and process feedback signal to analogue input 2 Alternatively a direct speed reference can be given to the drive through analogue input AI1 Then the PID controller is bypassed and the drive no longer controls the process variable Selection between the direct speed control and the process variable control is done with digital input DI3 Two analogue and three relay output signals are available on terminal blocks The default signals on the display of the control panel are SPEED ACTUAL VAL
24. Gtk aw Rete eee we ee eet 61 whe eet ek he ee 61 Panel LOSS 8 GP OR arat 61 SCUINGS PH P 61 Extemal Fab Cd gt AS ed aede deed rao 61 SENOS 4 Pv 61 Thermal Ot Ss ur aeu acp eo wal Glee eR bat oe xd Ea SO ec ed ar 62 Motor temperature thermal model 62 Use orthe dnotor de Emo ERE __ acie LEE RU nt 62 velud go P 62 Stalk Proteco Sarto eae a i Be debe TOO Ser wie 63 DOMINOS KETTE 63 Underload IOIe HOD og d ao a 63 eS Gece SM EIUS FUE 63 Motor Phase LOSS kae a Re ___ 63 SOLITOS 63 Earth Fault PIOIGOHOD i id aeu oe dte Dac Rut e eos fn d e e o e e e a a o P ene 64 DOMINOS MDC 64 Communication 4 5 a cuca d svn tana nas 64 SEUNS Saks Sho elk T 64 Supervision of optional lO 64 SCUINGS 4 25 cence 64 Preprodrammed a 64 Table of contents OVETEUFFeDE icio bo eet eed SOR 6 ud 64 I
25. gt 026900 5 43534 28 23 qayna 20 0 4 2 NI 98 LOL _ 0 QOH oor 5 Z 1no rg 9 0 01 0 dAWY e0 Lz IN3S OO1 13NVd 4015 ONN 4015 1415 2440 28 ll m 2440 18 Se 1315 12001 6 L 44O NO 0 01 Q T ONILVINGOW 4015 LON ANI IMLS TANVd 5 TES d33ds 0432 L 2 4015 LY SOLON YIC d LS NI 1447 15 AMLS 7 00 Control block diagrams 271 Handling of Reset and On Off The diagram below is a detail to the previous diagram Handling of Start Stop Run Enable and Start Interlock RESET FROM PANEL MAIN CW B7 RESET zii RESET FROM FIELDBUS IN LOCAL MODE 16 04 EXT RESET AUTORESET AND MAIN CW B0 ON OFF AND NOT READY TO SWITCH SWITCH ON INHIBITED FIELDBUS CW BO Control block diagrams 272 Control block diagrams Index A ABB drives communication profile 206 Absolute maximum frequency 97 249 Absolute maximum speed 97 249 ACCEL TIME 1 133 ACCEL DECEL 132 Acceleration compensation 136 motor 100 ramps 57 settings 57 speed reference ramps 46 times 20 times setting 42 Actual signals 53 251 defined 97 diagnostics 44 52 53 display mode 29 displaying the full names
26. N 20 07MINIMUMFREQ _____ 5 2 50Hz 50Hz 5 50Hz S57 20 08 MAXIMUM FREQ ohz ohz omz BOHz B5B 20 11 6 LIM 300 300 80095 300 300 360 20 12 P GENERATING LIM 300 7 300 300 0 0 360 20 13 MIN TORQ SEL NEG MAX NEG MAX NEG MAX NEG MAX NEG MAX 363 TORQ TORQ TORQ TORQ TORQ 20 74 MAXUM MAXUM MAXOM 364 20 15 TORQMINLIMT 0 0 00 ____ 00 00 00 bej 20 16 TORQMINLIMZ 0 0 00 7 po 00 00 20 17 TORQMAXLIMZ 3000 1300 0 ____ 800 0 80009 300 2018 700 000 2019 b po D 20 20 MINAISCALE _____ QU 7074 70 20 21 MAXAISCALE _ 3000 7 500 7 300 7 3004 7 5000 Banj 21 5 5 21 03 FUNCTION COAST COAST COAST COAST __578 ____ ______ No No 21 07 RUN ENABLE FUNC STOP COAST STOP COAST STOP COAST STOP COAST STOP 382 21 08 START NO Mm M m m g8B 21 09 START INTRL FUNC 2 STOP OFFZSTOP OFF2STOP OFF2STOP OFF2STOP 384 2110 ZEROSPEEDDELAY 056 055 056 7055 5s 98 7 22 ACCEL DECEL Z202ACCELTME i fos 0 06 pos pos Z203DECELTME 1 pos pos pos pos w Z204
27. i200rpm 155 H206 CONSTSPEED5 ____ rpm Jm orm _____ 56 HZ07 CONSTSPEEDG6 rpm rpm orgm 2400 i57 H208 CONSTSPEED7 rpm rpm rpm rpm 9000 158 HZ09 CONSTSPEED8 rpm Drm Dmm 59 H2 10 CONSTSPEED9 rpm rpm Jm Jom Jmm 60 H2 CONSTSPEED 0 rpm Jmm i61 HZ 2 CONSTSPEED rpm orm Drm Pm rmm 162 H2 13 CONSTSPEED i2 rpm rpm rm pm Jmm H2 4 CONSTSPEED i3 ____ rpm Drm rpm Jmm 664 12 15 0 rpm Drm pm Dmm 6 H2 16 CONSTSPEED 15 Drm rpm Pm Jmm 66 __ ___ SOT MINIMUM ____ 0 ov e 13 02 pov hov Wm 13 03 6 pon ______ 100 ______100 ______ 100 _____100 10s ____ 0 6 0405 10s Wo HSOS NVERTA 180 13 06 Pma ____ ____ Pma paj 13 07 ______ ____ Poma Ke2 13 08 5 hoos hoon 00 hoon hes 2 pios 0105 10s 0405 10s i84 overran No No nono ras mA mA mA mA mA 86 13 12 Oma 20 omA Poma 87 13 13 5 AI 100 hoon 100 i88 77 0406 Dos 0406 Dos 040
28. 05 9204AUXDSACT3 Bo 5 o5 pra 92 05 808 3808 08 92 06 AUXDSACTS Bo 176 92 07 6 10 9 01409 8 01409 01409 801409 8 01409 17777 9208MSWBI3PIR b D b b 78 9209MSWBI4PIR bD QD 0 mo 95 HARDWARESPECIF 1 1 95 02 FUSE SWITCHCTRL Wwererlypedependent 9503 NrCONFIGUSER D qp p ey 9504EXSINREQUEST 9505ENAINCSWFREQ D 7 95 06 D 1 oso7LCUDCREF p bD 1 95 08LCUPARTSEL _ i06 106 he 95 09LCUPAR2SEL po po M0 95 10 TEMP INV AMBIENT koc UC UC AC 1847 96 EXIERNALAO um lal 9601EXTAO SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED 8430 BOZNVERTEXTKOL No po No _ 96 08 MINIMUMEXTAOi ____ ____ mA mA QmA 845 96 04 FILTEREXTAOT 0016 0046 pois Os 8 96 05 SCALE EXT AO Hoo 1009 100 poon 1009 87 96 06EXT A02 CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT 1848 9 amp 07 NVERTEXTAO2 ____ B9 96 08 MINIMUMEXTAO2 Oma mA mA mA ______ 1850 96 09FILTEREXTAO2 200s 00s 2006 00s 00s fe 96 10 SCALE EXT AO2 Hoo 1007 i009 00 10 1852 96 1 D p O62EXTAO2PIR bD bD bD Ob e OPTIONMOD
29. 210 Fieldbus reference scaling With the ABB Drives communication profile active fieldbus references REF1 and REF2 are scaled as shown in the table below Note Any correction of the reference is applied before scaling See section References on page 199 Application Macro used par 99 02 FACTORY HAND AUTO or SEQ CTRL T CTRL or M F optional PID CTRL Fieldbus control Reference type Speed or Frequency not with FAST COMM Speed or Frequency with FAST COMM Speed or Freq not with FAST COMM Speed or Freq with FAST COMM Torque not with FAST COMM Torque with FAST COMM PID Reference not with FAST COMM PID Reference with FAST COMM 20000 par 11 05 1 par 11 04 O par 11 04 20000 par 11 05 20000 par 11 05 0 0 20000 11 05 20000 par 11 08 1 par 11 07 O par 11 07 20000 par 11 08 20000 par 11 08 0 0 20000 par 11 08 10000 par 11 08 1 par 11 07 O par 11 07 10000 par 11 08 10000 par 11 08 0 0 10000 par 11 08 10000 par 11 08 1 par 11 07 O par 11 07 10000 par 11 08 10000 par 11 08 0 0 10000 par 11 08 Final reference limited by 20 01 20 02 speed or 20 07 20 08 frequency Final reference limited by 20 01 20 02 speed or 20 07 20 08 frequency Final reference limited by 20 01 20 02 speed or 20
30. 5800 Firmware Manual 5800 Standard Control Program 7 x ACS800 Standard Control Program 7 Firmware Manual 3AFE64527592 REV J EN EFFECTIVE 20 02 2009 2009 ABB All Rights Reserved Table of contents Table of contents Introduction to the manual Chapter Bere eee be 13 13 oe oto Unit de etes ______ 13 22 __ _ 13 CONES sierrand Sake hos _ _ 13 Froduct and INGUINIGS umor gw ch SS Se ped 14 oon bam eee te Bae ee 14 Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals 14 Start up and control through the I O Ec OE ERE 15 HOW to Start ub trie diVe 3 5p aL eee eae 15 How to perform the guided start up covers all essential settings 15 How to perform the limited start up covers only the basic settings 17 How to control the drive through the I O interface 21 How to perform the ID Run
31. See ee ea 95 01 FAN SPD CTRL MODE Selects the speed control of the optional inverter cooling fan CONST 50 Hz Fan is running at constant frequency of 50 Hz when powered Actual signals and parameters RUN STOP Drive stopped Fan is running at constant frequency of 10 Hz Drive running Fan is running at constant frequency of 50 Hz CONTROLLED The speed of the fan is determined from IGBT temperature vs fan speed curve 95 02 FUSE SWITCH CTRL Activates the inverter DC switch switch fuse monitoring function The monitoring must be active when the Switch Fuse Control Board ASFC is in use and connected to the inverter AINT board i e in all frame R8i inverters equipped with the DC switch The function must be inactive in units that do not use the ASFC board with the DC switch i e for frame R2i R7i inverters and all single drive units where no DC switch exists The default setting ON or OFF for each unit is set accordingly at the factory as default ACS800 IGBT pulses are always blocked when the program detects that the DC switch is opened or inverter charging is ongoing at power switch on The application program generates alarm INV DISABLED if the DC switch is opened when the inverter is stopped The inverter trips to fault INV DISABLED if the DC switch is opened when the inverter is running Number of parallel connected inverter modules Activates the Reduced Run function See section Reduced Run function on pa
32. 1 HM D142PROCESSSPEEDRELP SPEED 1 1 6 H2 0143MOTORRUNTIME MOTORRUNTME 10h Ah H3 DTA4FANON IME FANTME nsi o Ah BM4 01 45 CIRLBT T6 D146 SAVEDKWH ______ _______ ____ 0 9999 DT47 SAVED GWH SAVOWH 1 1GWn OWn 1 8388607 H7 01 48 SAVED AMOUNT SAVAM 5100 oca EUR USD 0 999999 48 01 49 SAVED AMOUNT M SAVAMM 1 1 oca EUR USD 8388607 H9 0 50 5 2 7 2 _____ 0 9999 MELDE LL a ee SIGNALS 2 0 7770002 20000 gt SEED REF 3 REFS 3 100 of motor rom OZ0S TORQUEREF2 TREF2 0 095 10000 02 10 TORQUE REF3 TREF3 10096 of motor QA1S TORQUSED REF TUSEDR homage gt a FLUX REF FLUX REF 0 0 10000 64 ERE t 1B 02 17 5 5 SPEEDES 0 0 200 mm B 02 18 SPEED MEASURED SPEED ME 10096 of motor rpm 02 19 MOTOR MOTOR AC 1 1 rpm s Pm es Duns SIGNALS 03 01 CTRL WORD MAIN CW 0 65535 03 02 STATUS WORD SW 0 65535 obo _ 03 08 AUX STATUS WORD SW 0 65535 78 03 04 LIMIT WORD 1 LIMIT W1 0 65535 79 ____ ____________ fem _ 03 05
33. 62 Motor Thermal Protection The motor can be protected against overheating by activating the Motor Thermal Protection function and by selecting one of the motor thermal protection modes available The Motor Thermal Protection modes are based either on a motor temperature thermal model or on an overtemperature indication from a motor thermistor Motor temperature thermal model The drive calculates the temperature of the motor on the basis of the following assumptions 1 The motor is at the estimated temperature value of 01 87 MOTOR TEMP EST saved at power switch off when power 15 applied to the drive When power 15 applied for the first time the motor is at the ambient temperature 30 C 2 Motor temperature is calculated using either the user adjustable or automatically calculated motor thermal time and motor load curve see the figures below The load curve should be adjusted in case the ambient temperature exceeds 30 C Motor Motor Break point Load Current 150 100 Motor load curve 100 50 PN Zero speed load Rise Speed 100 63 Motor thermal time Use of the motor thermistor It is possible to detect motor overtemperature by connecting a motor thermistor PTC between the 24 VDC voltage supply offered by the drive and digital input DI6 In normal motor operation temperature the thermistor resistance should be less than 1 5 kohm current 5 mA The drive stops the motor and gives
34. 8 _ even Pwnpwiym csonbtowstphi 60 MASTER Master Follower application For more information see section Master FOLLOWER Follower use of several drives on page 78 and a separate Master Follower Application Guide 3AFE64590430 English gt 60 01 MASTER LINK Defines the role of the drive the Master Follower link Note Two Master stations are not allowed on line If a Follower drive is changed to be a Master drive or vice versa by this parameter the RMIO board must be powered up again for the M F link to work properly NOT IN USE The Master Follower link is not active FOLLOWER Follower drive STANDBY Follower drive which reads the control signals through a fieldbus interface not from the Master Follower link as usual 60 02 TORQUE SELECTOR Selects the reference used in motor torque control Typically the value needs to be changed only in the Follower station s The parameter is visible only when parameter 99 02 T CTRL External control location 2 EXT2 must be active to enable torque selector Actual signals and parameters 164 ZERO This selection forces the output of the torque selector to zero 1 SPEED The follower speed controller output is used as a reference for motor torque 2 control The drive is speed controlled SPEED can be used both in the Follower and in the Master if the motor shafts of the Master and Follower are connected flexibly A slight
35. 800 Value in percent of the nominal motor current 72 04 LOAD CURRENT Defines the third current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by par 72 12 LOAD FREQ 3 0 800 Value in percent of the nominal motor current 72 05 LOAD CURRENT 4 Defines the fourth current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by par 72 13 LOAD FREQ 4 0 800 Value in percent of the nominal motor current 72 06 LOAD CURRENT 5 Defines the fifth current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by par 72 14 LOAD FREQ 5 0 800 Value in percent of the nominal motor current 72 07 LOAD CURRENT 6 Defines the sixth current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by par 72 15 LOAD FREQ 6 0 800 Value in percent of the nominal motor current 1 2 3 4 Actual signals and parameters 72 08 LOAD CURRENT 7 Defines the seventh current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by par 72 16 LOAD FREQ 7 0 800 Value in percent of the nominal motor current 0 800 Value in percent of the nominal motor current 72 11 LOAD FREQ 2 par 72 10 par 72 12 72 12 LOAD FREQ par 72 11 par 72 13 7213 LOAD FREQ 4 par 72 12 par 72 14 72 14 LOAD FREQ 5 par 72 13 par 72 15 72 15 LOAD FREQ 6 par 72 14 par 72 16 72 16 LOAD FREQ 7 par 72 15 par 72 17 72 09 LOAD CURRENT 8 Defines the eighth current point of the load curve at the frequency defined
36. 1000 Minimum value in percent of the set analogue input range The equation below instructs how to calculate the value when analogue input Al1 is used as a variable ACT1 Al1min 13 01 13 02 13 01 Al1min The voltage value received from the measuring device when the measured process actual value is at the desired minimum ACT1 MINIMUM level 13 01 Al1 minimum parameter setting 13 02 Al1 maximum parameter setting 40 10 ACT1 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum value for the variable ACT1 if an analogue input is selected as a source for ACT1 See parameter 40 07 The minimum 40 09 and maximum settings of ACT1 define how the voltage current signal received from the measuring device is converted to a percentage value used by the process PID controller 1000 1000 Maximum value in percent of the set analogue input signal range The equation below instructs how to calculate the value when analogue input Al1 is 10000 used as a variable ACT 1 Al1max 13 01 13 02 13 01 ACT1 MAXIMUM Al1max The voltage value received from the measuring device when the measured process actual value is at the desired maximum level 13 01 Al1 minimum parameter setting 13 02 Al1 maximum parameter setting 40 14 ACT2 MINIMUM See parameter 40 09 1000 100096 See parameter 40 09 10000 10000 Actual signals and parameters 157 40 12 2 MAXIMUM See parameter 40 10 1000 1000 See parameter 40 10
37. 617 30 18 FUNC _ FAULT 618 30 19 DST OUT 8005 3006 05 3006 9005 30 20 FLT gt QZERO ZERO boj So21AUXDST OUT Bos bos Bos Bos 121 30 2210 CONFIG FUNC WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING 622 B0 23 LIMITWARNING p b b b b ba 51 JAuroMAICRESET ___ 5 D ___ b b b f 37 02 TIME Boos boos SrOSDELAYTIME pos bos baj 37 04 Mo 37 05 ____ B1 06 UNDERVOLTAGE ao STO7AISIGNALUMN 132 Additional data actual signals and parameters 258 Index Name Selection FACTORY HAND AUTO PID CTRL LCTRL SEQCTRL PB W NO m M m mw 3 82 sUPERVSON o o S201j5PEEDTFUNCTION No M No O 32 02 SPEEDI LMT rpm ____ ppm Dm 2 3203 SPEED2 FUNCTION No _____ ANO m 653 82 04 SPEED2 LMT rpm Opm s 32 05 FUNCTION No ANO es B2 06 CURRENTLIMIT b p p b 0 3207TORQUE FUNCTION NO Mo mooo S208ITORQUE TLIMT ____ a o e S209TORQUE2FUNCTION No ____ S210TORQUE2LIMIT oa ______ S
38. For the possible causes and remedies see chapter Fault e _ POWERFAIL 2 Reserved INV OVERTEMP For the possible causes and remedies see chapter Fault tracing 15 Reserved Fieldbus control 222 03 18 ALARM WORD 5 fat Besson 0 REPLACEFAN For the possible causes and remedies see chapter Fault s mmmam _ woarn ems w _ __ Reserved BATT FAILURE For the possible causes and remedies see chapter Fault tracing 03 19 INT INIT FAULT Fieldbus control Rane mem wewee NN 223 03 30 LIMIT WORD INV The LIMIT WORD INV Word includes faults and warnings which occur when the output current limit of the drive is exceeded The current limit protects the drive in various cases e g integrator overload high IGBT temperature etc mmm INTEGRAT 200 Current limit at 20096 integrator overload Temperature model is not active INTEGRAT 150 Current limit at 15096 integrator overload Temperature model is not active INT LOW FREQ Current limit at high IGBT temperature with low output frequency 10 Hz Temperature model is not active INTG PP TEMP Current limit at high IGBT temperature Temperature model is not active PP OVER TEMP Current limit at high IGBT temperature Temperature model is active PP OVERLOAD Current limit at high IGBT junction to case temperature Temp
39. If the assembly does not fulfil the requirement WARNING According to IEC 664 the connection of the motor temperature sensor The RAIO module terminals must be protected against contact and they may not be connected to other equipment Or e The temperature sensor must be isolated from the RAIO module terminals See also section Motor Thermal Protection on page 62 Program features 74 Settings Parameter Additional information 30 01 ca 25 02 Settings of motor 1 temperature measurement 98 12 Activation of optional analogue I O for motor temperature measurement Parameters 13 16 to 13 20 11 processing and 96 01 to 96 05 AO1 signal selection and processing are not effective At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor If this is not possible the shield is to be left unconnected Diagnostics Actual values Additional information 91 35 Temperature value MOTOR 1 TEMP 4312 Measured motor temperature has exceeded the set alarm limit T MEAS ALM FF91 Motor temperature measurement is out of acceptable range MOTOR 1 TEMP 4312 Measured motor temperature has exceeded the set fault limit Adaptive Programming using the function blocks Conventionally the user can control the operation of the drive by parameters Each parameter has a fixed set of choices or a setting range The parameters make the programming easy but the choices are limited The user cannot cus
40. tracing THERMISTOR For the possible causes and remedies see chapter Fault tracing MOTOR TEMP ACS800 TEMP ENCODER ERR MEAS ALM 11 Reserved COMM MODULE For the possible causes and remedies see chapter Fault tracing 13 Reserved EARTH FAULT For the possible causes and remedies see chapter Fault tracing Reserved Fieldbus control 219 03 09 ALARM WORD 2 Ce Reserved V UNDERLOAD For the possible causes and remedies see chapter Fault tracing Reserved o ENCODER For the possible causes and remedies see chapter Fault tracing Reserved POWFAIL FILE Error in restoring POWERFAIL DDF ALM OS 17 Error in restoring POWERDOWN DDF MOTOR STALL For the possible causes and remedies see chapter Fault tracing Al MIN FUNC 11 12 Reserved 13 PANEL LOSS For the possible causes and remedies see chapter Fault tracing 14 15 Reserved 03 13 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD 3 Dum open OPEN BRAKE The Open Brake command is ON See group 42 BRAKE CONTROL s__ STOPOVSTATUS Thesuocte utente NN __ READY Rester Rin rate salon re Meses 0 Reserved Fieldbus control 220 03 14 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD 4 CEC SPEED 1 LIM Output speed has exceeded or fallen below supervision limit 1 See group 32 SUPERVISION 1 SPEED 2 LIM Output speed has exceeded or fallen below supervision limit 2 See group 32 SUPERVISION 2
41. 00 A 00 5 Start up and control through the 22 How to perform the ID Run The drive performs the ID Magnetisation automatically at the first start In most applications there is no need to perform a separate ID Run The ID Run Standard or Reduced should be selected if e The operation point is near zero speed and or Operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque within a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback is required The Reduced ID Run is to be performed instead of the Standard if it is not possible to disengage the driven machine from the motor ID Run Procedure Note If parameter values Group 10 to 98 are changed before the ID Run check that the new settings meet the following conditions 20 01 MINIMUM SPEED lt 0 rpm e 20 02 MAXIMUM SPEED gt 80 of motor rated speed e 20 03 MAXIMUM CURRENT gt 100 hg e 20 04 MAXIMUM TORQUE gt 50 Ensure that the panel is in the local control mode L displayed on the status row Press the LOC REM key to switch between modes e Change the ID Run selection to STANDARD or REDUCED L 21242 0 rpm 99 START UP DATA 10 MOTOR ID RUN STANDARD Press ENTER to verify selection The following message will be displayed l L gt 1242 0 rpm ACS800 WARNING ID RUN SEL To start the ID Run press the D key The Run Enable signal must be active see parameter 16 01 RUN ENABLE Warning when the ID Run is
42. 05 30 01 Setting the reference limits 11 04 11 05 Setting the speed frequency limits 20 02 20 01 20 08 20 07 Setting acceleration and deceleration times 22 02 22 03 Setting up the brake chopper if activated by parameter 27 01 Group 27 20 05 14 01 If 99 02 is not SEQ CTRL Setting constant speeds Group 12 Speed Control Setting the source for the speed reference 11 06 EXT2 is used Setting analogue input AI1 limits scale 13 01 13 02 13 03 13 04 inversion 13 05 30 01 Setting the reference limits 11 08 11 07 Torque Control Selecting the source for the torque reference 11 06 If is used Setting analogue input limits scale 13 01 13 02 13 03 13 04 inversion 13 05 30 01 Setting the reference limits 11 08 11 07 Setting the torque ramp up and ramp down times 24 01 24 02 PID Control Selecting the source for the process reference 11 06 If is used Setting analogue input limits scale 13 01 13 02 13 03 13 04 inversion 13 05 30 01 Setting the reference limits 11 08 11 07 Setting the speed reference limits 20 02 20 01 20 08 20 07 Setting the source and limits for the process actual value 40 07 40 09 40 10 Start Stop Control Selecting the source for start and stop signals of the two external 10 01 10 02 control locations EXT1 and EXT2 Selecting between EXT1 and EXT2 11 02 Defining the direction control 10 03 Defining the start and stop
43. 06 CRIT SPEED 3 LOW See parameter 25 02 0 0 18000 0 18000 0 18000 See parameter 25 02 25 07 CRIT SPEED 3 HIGH See parameter 25 03 0 18000 rpm See parameter 25 03 0 18000 26 01 FLUX OPTIMIZATION Activates deactivates the flux optimisation function See section Optimisation on page 56 Note The function cannot be used if parameter 99 04 SCALAR 26 02 FLUX BRAKING Activates deactivates the flux braking function Note The function cannot be used if parameter 99 04 SCALAR See section Flux Braking on page 55 26 08 IR COMPENSATION Defines the relative output voltage boost at zero speed IR compensation The function is useful in applications with high break away torque but no DTC motor control cannot be applied The figure below illustrates the IR compensation See section R compensation for a scalar controlled drive on page 60 Note The function can be used only if parameter 99 04 is SCALAR U Un 0 Relative output voltage IR compensation set to 15 Relative output voltage No IR Field weakening point 0 30 Voltage boost at zero speed in percent of the motor nominal voltage 0 3000 Actual signals and parameters 139 26 04 IR STEP UP FREQ Defines the frequency at which the step up IR compensation reaches the 100 1 IR compensation used in scalar control 26 03 IR COMPENSATION A voltage boost is used in step up applications to ac
44. 10000 10000 40 13 PID INTEGRATION Activates the integration of the process PID controller 2 40 14 TRIM MODE Activates the trim function and selects between the direct and proportional trimming Using the trim it is possible to combine a corrective factor to the drive reference See section Reference trimming on page 47 Example A speed controlled conveyor line where the line tension also needs to be considered The speed reference is slightly adjusted trimmed depending on the value of the measured line tension Not visible when parameter 99 02 PID CTRL The trim function is deactivated PROPORTIONAL The trim function is active The trimming factor is relative to the external reference REF2 See parameter 11 06 DIRECT The trim function is active The trimming factor is relative to a fixed maximum limit used in the reference control loop maximum speed frequency or torque 40 15 REF SEL Selects the signal source for the trim reference Not visible when parameter 99 02 PID CTRL Example 5 as a trim reference EE 058004 minAl5 parameter 13 16 maxAl5 parameter 13 17 sclAI5 parameter 13 18 5 be used only with an optional extension module Trim reference sclAl5 maxAl5 minAl5 minAIl5 maxAl5 Analogue Input Signal PAR A076 Value of parameter 4016 is used as the wim reference Je _ 40 16 TRIM REFERENCE Defines the trim reference value when parameter 40 15 has
45. 18 to 30 21 Supervision of optional IO The function supervises the use of the optional analogue and digital inputs and outputs in the application program and warns if the communication to the input output is not operational Settings Parameter 30 22 Preprogrammed faults Overcurrent The overcurrent trip limit for the drive is 1 65 to 2 17 depending on the drive type DC overvoltage The DC overvoltage trip limit is 1 3 where is the maximum value of the mains voltage range For 400 V units is 415 V For 500 V units is 500 V For 690 V units is 690 V The actual voltage in the intermediate circuit corresponding to the mains voltage trip level is 728 VDC for 400 V units 877 VDC for 500 V units and 1210 VDC for 690 V units Program features 65 DC undervoltage The DC undervoltage trip limit is 0 6 where is the minimum value of the mains voltage range For 400 V and 500 V units is 380 V For 690 V units nin IS 525 V The actual voltage in the intermediate circuit corresponding to the mains voltage trip level is 307 VDC for 400 V and 500 V units and 425 VDC for 690 V units Drive temperature The drive supervises the inverter module temperature There are two supervision limits warning limit and fault trip limit Enhanced drive temperature monitoring for ACS800 U2 U4 and U7 frame sizes R7 and 8 Traditionally drive temperature
46. 2 PE 0 Stop according to parameter 21 03 STOP FUNCTION 4 Reserved EN MODE Select control mode 2 Select control mode 1 6 Reserved Reserved EN RESET FAULT Reset drive fault Reserved STATUS WORD for the CSA 2 8 3 0 communication profile Bit Name Value Description Fieldbus control ENABLE 2 Reserved RUNNING 4 Reserved m 6 Reserved ETPOINT FAULTED WARNING 5 Reserved Ready to start Initialising or initialising error Enabled Coast to stop Running with selected reference Stopped Drive in Remote mode 9 Drive in Local mode Drvenotatreference 00 0 A warning is active No active warnings Drive at a limit 21 Drive at limit The and actual scaling is equal to that of the ABB Drives profile 215 Diverse status fault alarm and limit words 03 03 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD Reserved Speed difference is out of the window in speed control C _________________ 1 START NOT Drive has not been started after changing the motor DONE parameters in group 99 7 IDENTIF RUN Motor ID Run successfully completed DONE START INHIBITION Prevention of unexpected start up active m LIMITING Control at a limit See actual signal 3 04 LIMIT WORD 1 below TORQ CONTROL Torque reference is follow
47. 2 External reference REF2 Depending on the use 100 is the motor 0 10000 maximum speed motor nominal torque or maximum process reference 100 1 01 43 CTRL LOCATION Active control location 1 2 LOCAL 3 EXT1 4 EXT2 See section See descr Local control vs external control on page 43 01 14 OP HOUR COUNTER Elapsed time counter Runs when the control board is powered 01 45 KILOWATT HOURS kWh counter Counts inverter output kWh during operation motor side 1 100 kWh generator side 01 46 APPL BLOCK OUTPUT Application block output signal E g the process PID controller output 0 0 10000 when the PID Control macro is active 100 01 17 DI6 1 STATUS Status of digital inputs The first digit reflects the Start Interlock input and is followed by digital inputs from DI6 to DI1 Example 0000001 Start Interlock off 016 to 012 off DI1 on 01 21 RO3 1 STATUS Status of relay outputs Example 001 RO1 is energised RO2 and RO3 are de energised 01 22 AO1 mA Value of analogue output 1 1 20 001 mA Actual signals and parameters 99 beston OOOO O _ 01 23 0123 2 0123 2 Value Value of analogue output AO2 Value of analogue output AO2 output AO2 1 0 001 mA 01 24 ACTUAL VALUE 1 Feedback signal for the process PID controller Updated only when 0 0 10000 parameter 99 02 PD CTRL 100 01 25 ACTUAL VALUE 2 Feedback signal for the process PID contro
48. 248 248 2048 50 02 MEAS MODE A B A B A B 002 50 03 FAULT WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING 1003 BO M4ENCODERDELAY ____ 1000 _____ 1000 1000 Hooo BO 05 ENCODER DDCS CH CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL1 CHANNEL 1 CHANNELT 1005 nu RM AT E BNENCORBECHECK No No po po _ SUANDARDMODEUS STATION NUMBER BAUDRATE 0600 eo peo eoo 9600 hos 52 03 PARITY ODD od joo o 60 MASTER FOLLOWER UT UTE UEBER 60 01 MASTER LINK MODE NOT IN USE NOTINUSE NOTINUSE NOTINUSE NOTINUSE 60 02 TORQUE SELECTOR _ notvisible not visible TORQUE otvisibie 60 03 WINDOW SELON Jnotvisible not visible _ notvisible notvisibie 60 04 WINDOW WIDTH POS fnot visible not visible _ notvisible 06 notvisbie 60 05 WINDOW WIDTH NEG not visible not visible _ notvisible notvisbie 60 06 b b b p ____ 60 07 MASTERSIGNAL2 p2 60 08MASTERSIGNAL3 42 pis 202 0 TO OT CHANNEL OADDR 1 VOOZCHANNELSADOR A o o o E 8 BAUDRATE 4 Mbits 4 Mbits 4Mbis 3 _ n CHO DDCS HW CONN RING TS RING i RING US EB 70 05 CH2 HW CONNECTION RING
49. 3 10 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE 415 V ENTER Ok RESET b To ask for information on the requested value INFO P99 05 Set as given on the motor nameplate a To accept a value and step forward ENTER Motor Setup 4 10 MOTOR NOM CURRENT 0 0 ENTER Ok RESET Back b To cancel the setting and take one step back RESET Motor Setup 3 10 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE 415 V ENTER Ok RESET back Control panel To scroll the information displays and return to the task 36 To cancel and exit 2x ACT 1 L gt 0 0 rpm O FREQ 0 00 Hz CURRENT 0 00 A POWER 0 00 6 Note 1 x ACT returns to the first display of the task How to upload data from a drive to the panel Note Upload before downloading Ensure the firmware of the destination drive is the same e g standard firmware Before removing the panel from a drive ensure the panel is in remote operating mode change with the LOC REM key e Stop the drive before downloading Before upload repeat the following steps in each drive Setup the motors e Activate the communication to the optional equipment See parameter group 98 OPTION MODULES Before upload do the following in the drive from which the copies are to be taken e Set the parameters in groups 10 to 97 as preferred Proceed to the upload sequence below Enter the Function Mode 1 L gt 1242 0 rpm Motor Setup Application Macro Speed Control EXT1 Enter the page that contai
50. 40 Poms 8 po Points out the faulted parameter in the Adaptive Program Selects the function block for Block Parameter Set 1 See the Adaptive Program Application Guide 3AFE64527274 English __ 2 BTWSE _ COMPRE 71 Actual signals and parameters 170 Index Name Selection Description FILTER MASK SET N 5 NO MULDIV AX IN O R N R No 08 8 5 84 06 INPUT1 Selects the source for input 11 of Block Parameter Set 1 255 255 31 Parameter index or a constant value NO NO I O1 NO Ol CO NI AJO 255 255 31 Parameter pointer Inversion group index and bit fields The bit number is 32768 C 32767 effective only for blocks handling boolean inputs Constant value Inversion and constant fields Inversion field must have value C to enable the constant setting Example The state of digital input DI2 is connected to Input 1 as follows Set the source selection parameter 84 06 to 01 17 01 The application program stores the state of digital input DI2 to bit 1 of actual signal 01 17 If you need an inverted value switch the sign of the pointer value 01 17 01 84 07 INPUT2 See parameter 84 06 255 255 31 See parameter 84 06 255 255 31 C 32768 C 32767 84 08 INPUTS See paramete
51. 5 1 L gt 1242 0 rpm I FREQ 45 00 Hz CURRENT 80 00 A POWER 75 00 1 L gt 1242 0 rpm I 1 ACTUAL SIGNALS 04 CURRENT 80 00 A 1 L gt 1242 0 rpm I 1 ACTUAL SIGNALS 05 TORQUE 70 00 1 L gt 1242 0 rpm I FREQ 45 00 Hz TORQUE 70 00 POWER 1 L gt 1242 0 rpm I FREQ 45 00 Hz CURRENT 80 00 A POWER 75 00 Control panel 30 How to display the full name of the actual signals To display the full name of the three actual signals Hold 1 L gt 1242 0 rpm I FREQUENCY CURRENT POWER To return to the Actual Signal Display Mode Release 1 L gt 1242 0 rpm I FREQ 45 00 Hz CURRENT 80 00 A POWER 75 00 How to view and reset the fault history Note The fault history cannot be reset if there are active faults or warnings To enter the Actual Signal Display Mode 1 L gt 1242 0 rpm I FREQ 45 00 Hz CURRENT 80 00 A POWER 75 00 3 To enter the Fault History Display 1 L gt 1242 0 rpm 1 LAST FAULT OVERCURRENT 6451 H 21 MIN 23 To select the previous UP or the next fault warning 1 L gt 1242 0 rpm DOWN 2 LAST FAULT OVERVOLTAGE 1121 H 1 MIN 23 To clear the Fault History 1L 1242 0 rpm I 2 LAST FAULT H S To return to the Actual Signal Display Mode 1 1242 0 rpm I FREQ 45 00 Hz CURRENT 80 00 A POWER 75 00 Control panel 31 How to display and reset an active fault WARNING If an external source for start command is selected and it is ON the drive will start immediatel
52. 5 D 635 7 D 0 p p 1632 M D p il 84 79 OUTPUT BB USER CONSTANTS BSOTICONSTANTI 85 02 0 5 2 D bD 1646 B503CONSTANIS o M BS04CONSTANMM 0 B5 05 CONSTANTS b 0 Q Q BSO7CONSTANIT bD B508CONSTANIS b bD 1 eJ B amp 09CONSTANIS D Q B510 CONSTANTIO b b o0 he 8511 6 MESSAGE 55 MESSAGE1 MESSAGE MESSAGET 1655 85 12 STRING2 MESSAGE2 55 2 MESSAGE2 MESSAGE2 MESSAGE2 1656 85 13 STRING3 MESSAGES 55 MESSAGE3 55 MESSAGES 1657 B5 14 STRING4 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE4 1658 85 15 STRING5 MESSAGES MESSAGES MESSAGES MESSAGES MESSAGES 1659 90 DSETRECADER 1 L 9o0TAUXDSREF3 0 b b D k So02AUXDSREFA b bp bD b o0 o po p O0 Additional data actual signals and parameters 261 Index Name Selection FACTORY HAND AUTO PID TRL FCTRL SEQCTRL PB W 9004MANDSSOURCE 733 9005AUXDSSOURCE Bb B b B 739 92 0 SET TRADDR pe 92 01 DS STATUS WORD 802 B02 9202MAINDSACTi gt 02 4772 9203MAINDSACI2
53. FAULT WORD 1 FAULT W1 0 65535 o Pn o o fem 03 06 FAULT WORD 2 FAULT W2 0 65535 81 e obo em _ 03 07 SYSTEM FAULT SYS FLT 0 65535 82 obo eem _ 03 08 ALARM WORD 1 ALARM W1 0 65535 83 03 09 WORD 2 ALARM W2 0 65535 84 o oo o fem _ 03 11 FOLLOWER MCW FOLL MCW 0 65535 _ 03 13 STATUS WORD AUX SW 0 65535 88 03 14 AUX STATUS WORD 4 SW 4 0 65535 ____________ _ 03 15 FAULT WORD 4 FAULT W4 0 65535 ee iceman 03 16 ALARM WORD 4 ALARM W4 0 65535 91 ui Additional data actual signals and parameters 253 Shortname _ Unt IndexiName ______ 03 17 FAULT WORD 5 FAULT W5 0 65535 1 M P 03 18 WORD 5 ALARM W5 0 65535 93 _ 03 19 INT INIT FAULT INT INIT 0 65535 94 03 20 FAULT LAST FLT 0 65535 95 03 21 2 5 FAULT 2 FAULT 0 65535 03 22 3 LATEST FAULT 3 FAULT 0 65535 97 03 23 4 5 FAULT 4 FAULT 0 65535 03 24 5 LATEST FAULT o FAULT 0 65535 03 25 5 WARNING LAST WRN 0 65535 00 opo em _ 03 26 2 LATEST WARNING 2 0 65535 _ __ 03 27 3 LATEST WARNING 0 65535 o o femi 03 28 4 LATEST WARNING 4 WARN 0 65535 o o o femi 03 29 5
54. Index 20 01 20 03 20 04 20 05 zn 20 06 20 07 20 08 Name Selection MINIMUM SPEED 18000 no of pole pairs par 20 02 rom MAXIMUM SPEED par 20 01 18000 no of pole pairs rom MAXIMUM CURRENT 0 0 TORQ MAX LIM 0 0 600 0 OVERVOLTAGE CTRL O UNDERVOLTAGE CTRL FF N MINIMUM FREQ 300 00 50 Hz MAXIMUM FREQ Overvoltage control deactivated Undervoltage control deactivated Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency The limit can be set only if parameter 99 04 SCALAR 50 300 00 Hz Maximum frequency limit 5000 30000 127 20 LIMITS Drive operation limits See also section Speed controller tuning on page 58 Defines the allowed minimum speed The limit cannot be set if parameter 99 04 SCALAR Note The limit is linked to the motor nominal speed setting i e N parameter 99 08 If 99 08 is changed the default speed limit will also change Minimum speed limit 1 1 rpm Note If the value is positive the motor cannot be run in the reverse direction Defines the allowed maximum speed The value cannot be set if parameter 99 04 SCALAR Note The limit is linked to the motor nominal speed setting i e N parameter 99 08 If 99 08 is changed the default speed limit will also change Maximum speed limit 1 1 rpm Defines the allowed maximum motor current Current limit 10
55. N if the start signal is on RAMP STOP The application program stops the drive along the deceleration ramp defined in 1 group 22 ACCEL DECEL COAST STOP The application program stops the drive by cutting off the motor power supply 2 the inverter IGBTs are blocked The motor rotates freely to zero speed WARNING If the brake control function is on the application program N uses ramp stop in spite of the selection COAST STOP see parameter group 42 BRAKE CONTROL OFF2 STOP The application program stops the drive by cutting off the motor power supply the inverter IGBTs are blocked The motor rotates freely to zero speed The 3 drive will restart only when the Run Enable signal is on and the start signal is switched on the program receives the rising edge of the start signal Actual signals and parameters 132 The application program stops the drive along the ramp defined by parameter 22 07 The drive will restart only when the Run Enable is on and the start signal OFF3 STOP 21 08 CALAR FLY START Activates the flying start feature in the scalar control mode See parameters 21 01 and 99 04 S S 21 09 TART INTRL FUNC Defines how the Start Interlock input on RMIO board affects the drive operation OFF2 STOP OFF3 STOP ZERO SPEED DELAY 21 10 is switched on the program receives the rising edge of the start signal 65535 Drive running 1 Normal operation 0 Stop by coasting 1 D
56. PUNOS cat aac Sete ae Ben LETTER dae a 69 DIODOS 615 69 Sleep Turicdondor the process PID CONTO wig ae DEN Rod bed deno 69 FINO ERI 70 SCHINOS te Fare eh ee ee De 70 DIAGMOSICS d erie ook A IR CN e ae wee 70 Motor temperature measurement through the standard I O 71 SENGE sins dat ned 72 DIAGMOSICS DP 72 Motor temperature measurement through an analogue I O extension 73 74 IJIGOOS CS dd See A 74 Adaptive Programming using the function blocks 74 ak aan 14 Control of a mechanical brake 15 EXIDO ces en sete ee eg ae 75 Operation tiMe SCHEME _ _____ 76 Ca _ 77 ok vate aD CE ea USE e e d OR Pole 78 DIagrnosllGS 43 Go ___________ __ a
57. Selection 13 20 INVERT AI5 N YES 13 21 MINIMUM AI6 Description See parameter 13 05 See parameter 13 05 See parameter 13 05 See parameter 13 01 Note If RAIO 01 is used with voltage input signal 20 mA corresponds to 10 V OmA 4mA TUNED VALUE TUNE 13 22 MAXIMUM 6 See parameter 13 01 See parameter 13 01 See parameter 13 01 See parameter 13 01 See parameter 13 02 Note If RAIO 01 is used with voltage input signal 20 mA corresponds to 10 V 20 mA TUNED VALUE TUNE 13 28 SCALE AI6 0 100096 13 24 FILTER 16 0 00 10 00s 13 25 INVERT AIG NO YES 14 RELAY OUTPUTS See parameter 13 02 See parameter 13 02 See parameter 13 02 See parameter 13 03 See parameter 13 03 See parameter 13 04 See parameter 13 04 See parameter 13 05 See parameter 13 05 See parameter 13 05 Status information indicated through the relay outputs and the relay operating delays See section Programmable relay outputs on page 52 14 01 RELAY RO1 OUTPUT Selects a drive status indicated through relay output RO1 The relay energises when the status meets the setting NOT USED READY RUNNING Running Start signal on Run Enable signal on no active fault FAULT Fault FAULT 1 Inverted fault Relay is de energised on a fault trip Not used Ready to function Run Enable signal on no fault FAULT RST Fault Automatic reset after the autoreset delay See parameter group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET STALL WARN Warni
58. a fault indication if the thermistor resistance exceeds 4 kohm The installation must meet the regulations for protecting against contact Settings Parameters 30 04 to 30 09 Note It is also possible to use the motor temperature measurement function See sections Motor temperature measurement through the standard I O on page 77 and Motor temperature measurement through an analogue extension on page 73 Program features 63 Stall Protection The drive protects the motor in a stall situation It is possible to adjust the supervision limits torque frequency time and choose how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition warning indication fault indication amp stop the drive no reaction The torque and current limits which define the stall limit must be set according to the maximum load of the used application Note Stall limit is restricted by internal current limit 03 04 TORQ_INV_CUR_LIM When the application reaches the stall limit and the output frequency of the drive is below the stall frequency Fault is activated after the stall time delay Settings Parameters 30 10 to 30 12 Parameters 20 03 20 13 and 20 14 Define the stall limit Underload Protection Loss of motor load may indicate a process malfunction The drive provides an underload function to protect the machinery and process in such a serious fault condition Supervision limits underload curve and underload time can be chosen as well as th
59. a specific frequency converter feature such as the brake control function but it has to be implemented as defined in the application specific regulations WARNING Make sure that the machinery into which the drive with brake control Brake control logic is integrated in Brake control RMIO board the drive application program The hardware X25 brake control hardware and wirings needs to be done by the user Brake on off control through relay m output RO1 EI Brake supervision through digital input DI5 optional Emergency Emergency brake switch in the _brake brake control circuit Motor Mechanicalbrake Program features 76 Operation time scheme The time scheme below illustrates the operation of the brake control function See also the state machine on the following page Start command poa a4 a4 dora apo External speed reference Inverter modulating Io Motor magnetised fma cd command Internal speed reference actual motor speed Torque reference Start torque at brake release Parameter 42 07 and 42 08 tng Motor magnetising delay tog Brake open delay Parameter 42 03 ne X Brake close speed Parameter 42 05 Brake close delay Parameter 42 04 Program features 77 State shifts From any state 1 17 rising e
60. accept the new value brackets disappear CDP312 PANEL Vx xx ACS800 ID NUMBER 1 l gt 0 0 rpm 0 00 CURRENT 0 00 A POWER 0 00 5 1 gt 90 rpm INFORMATION Press FUNC to start Language Selection 1 gt 0 0 rpm FREQ 0 00 Hz CURRENT 0 00 A POWER 0 00 6 1 gt 0 0 rpm O 99 START UP DATA 01 LANGUAGE ENGLISH 1 gt 0 0 rpm O 99 START UP DATA 01 LANGUAGE ENGLISH Start up and control through the 19 Select the Application Macro The general parameter setting procedure is given above The default value FACTORY is suitable in most cases Select the motor control mode The general parameter setting procedure is given above DTC is suitable in most cases The SCALAR control mode is recommended for multimotor drives when the number of the motors connected to the drive is variable when the nominal current of the motor is less than 1 6 of the nominal current of the inverter when the inverter is used for test purposes with no motor connected Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate gt ABB Motors C 3 motor M2AA 200 MLA 4 IEC 200 M L 55 sad FE OPS 690Y 50 30 1475 325 083 400D 50 1475 56 083 6607 50 30 1470 34 083 3800 50 30 1470 59 083 4150 50 30 1475 54 083 440D 60 35 1770 59 083 Cat 202 001 ADA
61. channels The module inputs are named 019 and 0110 REPL DI3 4 DI1 and 012 of the module replace the standard input channels 013 and DI4 The inputs are named DI3 and DI4 0110 11 12 011 012 013 of the module extend the number of input channels module inputs are named 0110 0111 0112 REPL DI4 5 6 011 012 and of the module replace the standard input channels 011 012 4 The inputs are named DIA 015 and 016 98 11 DI O EXT3 DI FUNC Defines the naming of the inputs of digital extension module in the drive 0111 12 DI1 012 of the module extend the number of input channels The module inputs are named DI11 and 0112 1 REPL 05 6 DI1 and 012 of the module replace the standard input channels 015 and 016 2 The inputs are named DI5 and DI6 98 12 MOTOR TEMP 181 1 2 3 application program See parameter 98 05 Activates the communication to the analogue I O extension module and reserves the module for the use of the motor temperature measurement function The parameter also defines the type and connection interface of the module For more information on the temperature measurement function see parameter group 35 MOT TEMP MEAS and section Motor temperature measurement through an analogue I O extension on page 73 The use of the analogue inputs Al and outputs AO of the module is shown in the table below Motor 1 temperature measurement AO Feeds a
62. communication profile 214 Critical speeds 57 D DC hold 55 Index 274 intermediate circuit protection 67 magnetising 55 overvoltage fault 64 undervoltage fault 65 DECEL TIME 1 133 Deceleration compensation 136 ramps 57 settings 57 Default tasks start up assistant 41 Diagnostics actual signals 44 52 53 analogue outputs 50 digital inputs 51 relay outputs 52 speed controller 58 supervision of user defined variables 67 Digital inputs diagnostics 51 optional Supervising 64 parameters 51 settings 51 Digital outputs optional Supervising 64 Display contrast setting 38 Displaying actual signal full names 30 fault history 30 Drive changing panel link ID number 39 data downloading to the control panel 37 data uploading to the control panel 36 IR compensation for scalar controlled 60 reference types and processing 46 start up 15 temperature fault 65 Drive control parameters 195 197 using I O interface 21 E Earth fault protection 63 Energy optimizing 99 161 EXT IO STATUS 224 External control 44 diagnostics 44 reference source diagram 45 stop start direction diagram 45 External fault 61 F Factory macros 83 85 Index Fault history clearing 30 viewing and resetting 30 FAULT WORD 1 216 FAULT WORD 2 217 FAULT WORD 4 220 FAULT WORD 5 221 FAULT WORD 6 224 FAULTED INT INFO 225 Faults communication protection 64 DC overvoltage 64 earth protection 63 external settings 61 overcurrent 64 preprog
63. constant setting 10 05 EXT 2 STRT Defines the source or constant for value PAR 10 05 of parameter 10 02 255 255 31 Parameter index or a constant value See parameter 10 04 for information on 255 255 31 C the difference 32768 32767 Defines the signal that activates jogging function The operation of the jogging is explained in section Jogging on page 79 Digital input DI3 0 Jogging is inactive 1 Jogging is active 2 be ____06 7 jSeeseedionDB 15 ir 7 08 Di j SeeseedinDI 8 NI A O Actual signals and parameters 105 10 07 CONTROL When active fieldbus overrides the selection of parameter 10 01 Fieldbus Control Word except bit 11 is enabled when 1 is selected as the active control location Note Only visible with the Generic Drive communication profile selected 98 07 Note The setting is not saved in the permanent memory will reset to zero when power is switched off 10 08 REFERENCE When active fieldbus overrides the selection of parameter 11 03 Fieldbus reference REF1 is enabled when EXT1 is selected as the active control location Note Only visible with the Generic Drive communication profile selected 98 07 Note The setting is not saved in the permanent memory will reset to zero when powe
64. for the sleep function See parameter 40 23 When the process actual value falls below the wake up level the wake up counter starts When the process actual value exceeds the wake up level the counter resets Visible only when parameter 99 02 PID CTRL 0 0 3600 0 5 Wake up delay 0 36000 40 25 ACTUAL1 PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 40 25 of parameter 40 07 255 255 31 255 255 31 C 32768 32767 40 26 PID MINIMUM Parameter index a constant value See parameter 10 04 for information on 100 1 the difference Defines the minimum limit for the PID controller output Using the minimum and maximum limits it is possible to restrict the operation to a certain speed range Example The process PID control is restricted to the forward rotation direction of the motor by setting the PID minimum limit to 0 and the maximum to 100 100 100 Limit in percent of the Absolute Maximum Speed of the motor 100 1 40 27 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum limit for the PID controller output Using the minimum and maximum limits it is possible to restrict the operation to a certain speed range See parameter 40 26 100 100 Limit in percent of the Absolute Maximum Speed of the motor 100 1 40 28 TRIM REF PTR 255 255 31 255 255 31 C 32768 C 32767 42 BRAKE CONTROL 42 01 BRAKE CTRL Activates the brake control function Defines the trim reference
65. in constant speed selection SPEEDS Group 16 SYST CTRL DI as external Run Enable fault reset or user macro change signal INPUTS DI as sleep function activation signal in PID process control Diagnostics Actual value Additional information 01 17 Values of the standard digital inputs 01 40 Values of the optional digital inputs IO CONFIG FF8B Improper use of optional I O Fm 42 0 COMM ERR 7000 Communication loss to Program features 52 Programmable relay outputs As standard there are three programmable relay outputs Six outputs can be added by using the optional digital I O extension modules By means of a parameter setting it is possible to choose which information to indicate through the relay output ready running fault warning motor stall etc It is possible to write a value to a relay output through a serial communication link Update cycles in the Standard Control Program ouput de Settings Additional information Group 14 RELAY RO value selections and operation times OUTPUTS 30 20 Operation of an externally controlled relay output on a communication break Group 42 BRAKE RO in a mechanical brake control CONTROL Group 98 OPTION Activation of optional relay outputs MODULES Diagnostics Actual value Additional information 01 21 Standard relay output states 01 41 Optional relays output states Program features 53 Actual signals Several actual signals a
66. inputs 51 relay outputs 52 Protection functions 61 R Ramps acceleration 57 deceleration 57 Reference control chain diagrams 266 handling 200 source EXT 1 45 types and processing 46 trimming 47 Relay outputs diagnostics 52 parameters 52 settings 52 Resets automatic 67 Resetting fault history 30 5 Scalar control 60 Sequential control macro 93 defined 83 Setting acceleration times 42 Settings acceleration 57 actual signals 52 53 Al lt Min gt 61 analogue outputs 50 automatic reset 67 automatic start 54 communication fault protection 64 constant speed 57 critical speeds 57 DC hold 55 DC magnetising 55 deceleration 57 digital inputs 51 earth fault protection 63 external control 44 external fault 61 flux braking 56 flux optimisation 56 hexagonal motor flux 61 Index IR compensation 60 limits 66 local control 44 motor phase loss 63 motor stall protection 63 motor temperature 62 motor underload protection 63 optional analogue inputs 64 optional analogue outputs 64 optional digital inputs 64 optional digital outputs 64 parameter lock 67 PID control 69 reference trimming 47 relay outputs 52 scalar control 60 speed controller 58 supervision 67 Short circuit fault 66 Sleep function 69 example 70 opeed controller tuning 58 opeed reference acceleration deceleration ramps 46 parameters 246 Stall protection 63 Start up 15 automatic start 54 basic settings 17 20 guided 15 16 otart up assistant applic
67. is supervised using one to three 5 sensors or one to three KTY84 1xx silicon temperature sensors Analogue output AO1 feeds constant current through the sensor s The resistance of the sensor increases sharply as the motor temperature rises over the sensor reference temperature as does the voltage over the resistor temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analogue input 11 and converts it into ohms The figure below shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function of the motor operating temperature Ohm Normal 0 1 5 kohm 1330 990 35 02 MOT 1 TEMP ALM L Defines the alarm limit for motor 1 temperature measurement The alarm indication is given when the limit is exceeded 10 5000 ohm C Limit in C or ohms C parameter 35 01 is 1xPT100 2XPT100 3XPT100 10 5000 PTC Pt100 Ohm parameter 35 01 is 1 3 PTC 35 03 MOT 1 TEMPFLTL Defines the fault trip limit for motor 1 temperature measurement The fault indication is given when the limit is exceeded 10 5000 ohm C Limit in C or ohms C parameter 35 01 is 1xPT100 2XPT100 3XPT100 10 5000 PTC Pt100 Ohm parameter 35 01 is 1 3 PTC 35 04 2 TEMP AI2 SEL Activates the motor 2 temperature measurement function and selects the sensor type Two motors can be protected only by using an optional analogue extension module Parameter 98 12 needs to be activated
68. limits 0 00 1800 00 5 Acceleration time 0 18000 DECEL TIME 1 Defines the deceleration time 1 i e the time required for the speed to change from the maximum see parameter 20 02 to zero If the speed reference decreases slower than the set deceleration rate the motor speed will follow the reference signal If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration rate the motor speed will follow the deceleration rate If the deceleration time is set too short the drive will automatically prolong the deceleration in order not to exceed drive operating limits If there is any doubt about the deceleration time being too short ensure that the DC overvoltage control is on parameter 20 05 Note If a short deceleration time is needed for a high inertia application the drive should be equipped with an electric braking option e g with a brake chopper and a brake resistor 2204 ACCEL TIME 2205 DECEL TIME Sepwamderzng 0 00 1800 00 s See parameter 22 03 0 18000 Actual signals and parameters 134 22 06 22 07 ACC DEC RAMP SHPE 0 00 1000 00 5 STOP RAMP TIME Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp See also section Jogging on page 79 0 00 s Linear ramp Suitable for steady acceleration or deceleration and for slow ramps 0 01 1000 00 s S curve ramp S curve ramps are ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads or other applications
69. module manual The following table lists the parameters which need to be defined when setting up communication through the standard Modbus link Parameter Alternative settings Setting for control Function Information through Standard Modbus Link COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION 98 02 NO STD MODBUS Initialises communication between drive FIELDBUS Standard Modbus Link and Modbus protocol ADVANT controller Activates communication parameters STD MODBUS in group 52 CUSTOMISED 98 07 ABB DRIVES ABB DRIVES Selects the communication profile used by the GENERIC drive See section Communication profiles on CSA 2 8 3 0 page 206 COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS 52 01 1 to 247 52 02 52 03 ODD EVEN NONE1STOPBIT NONE2STOPBIT After the communication parameters in group 52 have been set the drive control parameters section Drive control parameters on 195 must be checked and adjusted where necessary Specifies the station number of the drive on the Standard Modbus Link Defines the communication speed for the Standard Modbus Link Selects the parity setting for the Standard Modbus Link Fieldbus control 192 Modbus addressing Fieldbus control In the Modbus controller memory the Control Word the Status Word the references and the actual values are mapped as follows Data from fieldbus controller to drive Data from drive to fieldbus controller 40001 Control Word 40004 Status Word Reference 2 Actual 2 R
70. monitoring is based on the power semiconductor IGBT temperature measurement which is compared with a fixed maximum IGBT temperature limit However certain abnormal conditions such as cooling fan failure insufficient cooling air flow or excessive ambient temperature might cause overheating inside the converter module which the traditional temperature monitoring alone does not detect The Enhanced drive temperature monitoring improves the protection in these situations The function monitors the converter module temperature by checking cyclically that the measured IGBT temperature is not excessive considering the load current ambient temperature and other factors that affect the temperature rise inside the converter module The calculation uses an experimentally defined equation that simulates the normal temperature changes in the module depending on the load Drive generates a warning when the temperature exceeds the limit and trips when temperature exceeds the limit by 5 C Note The monitoring is available only for ACS800 U2 U4 and U7 frame sizes R7 and R8 with Standard Control Program version ASXR730U and later versions Types to which the enhanced drive temperature monitoring is available ACS800 Ux 0080 2 0100 2 0120 2 0140 2 3 7 0170 2 3 5 7 0210 2 3 5 7 0230 2 0260 2 3 5 7 0270 5 0300 2 5 0320 3 5 7 0400 3 5 7 0440 3 5 7 Program features 66 0490 3 5 7 0550 5 7 0610 5 7 Settings Additio
71. motor speed output frequency output current motor torque motor power etc It is possible to write a value to an analogue output through a serial communication link Update cycles in the Standard Control Program 24 ms 1000 ms 1 1 Update cycle in the motor temperature measurement function See group 35 MOT TEMP MEAS Settings Parameter Additional information Group 15 ANALOGUE AO value selection and processing standard outputs OUTPUTS 30 20 Operation of an externally controlled AO in a communication break 30 22 Supervision of the use of optional AO Group 35 MOT TEMP AO in motor temperature measurement MEAS Group 96 EXTERNAL Optional AO value selection and processing AO Group 98 OPTION Activation of optional I O MODULES Diagnostics Actual value Additional information 01 22 01 23 Values of the standard outputs 01 28 01 29 Values of the optional outputs CONFIG FF8B Improper use of optional I O Program features 51 Programmable digital inputs The drive has six programmable digital inputs as a standard Six extra inputs are available if optional digital extension modules are used Update cycles in the Standard Control Program Ud _ Settings Parameter Additional information Group 10 START STOP DI as start stop direction DIR Group 11 REFERENCE DI in reference selection or reference source SELECT Group 12 CONSTANT DI
72. on the location of the SHORT CIRCUIT fault see 03 05 FAULT WORD 1 and chapter Fault tracing 0 UPHSCU Phase U upper leg IGBT s short circuit Phase U lower leg IGBT s short circuit Phase V upper leg IGBT s short circuit Phase V lower leg IGBT s short circuit Phase W upper leg IGBT s short circuit Phase W lower leg IGBT s short circuit 227 Fault tracing Chapter overview The chapter lists all warning and fault messages including the possible cause and corrective actions Safety Instructions on the first pages of the appropriate hardware manual must be read WARNING Only qualified electricians are allowed to maintain the drive The Safety before you start working with the drive Warning and fault indications A warning or fault message on the panel display indicates abnormal drive status Most warning and fault causes can be identified and corrected using this information If not an ABB representative should be contacted If the drive is operated with the control panel detached the red LED in the panel mounting platform indicates the fault condition Note Some drive types are not fitted with the LEDs as standard The four digit code number in brackets after the message is for the fieldbus communication See chapter Fieldbus control How to reset The drive can be reset either by pressing the keypad RESET key by digital input or fieldbus or switching the supply voltage of
73. parameter lists There are some standard features that are disabled in the scalar control mode Motor Identification Run group 99 START UP DATA Speed Limits group 20 LIMITS Torque Limit group 20 LIMITS DC Hold group 21 START STOP DC Magnetizing group 21 START STOP Speed Controller Tuning group 23 SPEED CTRL Torque Control group 24 TORQUE CTRL Flux Optimization group 26 MOTOR CONTROL Flux Braking group 26 MOTOR CONTROL Underload Function group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS Motor Phase Loss Protection group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS Motor Stall Protection group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS For more information see section Scalar control on page 60 99 05 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor voltage Must be equal to the value on the motor VOLTAGE rating plate Voltage Allowed range is 1 2 2 of the drive 1 1V Note The stress on the motor insulations is always dependent on the drive supply voltage This also applies to the case where the motor voltage rating is lower than the rating of the drive and the supply of the drive Actual signals and parameters 185 99 06 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor current Must be equal to the value on the motor CURRENT rating plate If several motors are connected to the inverter enter the total current of the motors Note Correct motor run requires that the magnetizing current of the motor does not exceed 90 percent of the nominal current of the inverter 0 2 long Al
74. secon 03 30 LIMIT WORD INVon page 223 _ 053i ALARMWORDS A 16 bit data word See section 03 31 ALARM WORD Gon page 223 _ 03 32 EXT IO STATUS Status of emergency stop and step up modules See section 03 32 EXT IO STATUS on page 224 04 ACTUAL SIGNALS Signals for parallel connected inverters 04 01 FAULTED INT INFO A 16 bit data word See section 04 01 FAULTED INT INFO 225 04 02 INT SC INFO A 16 bit data word See section 04 02 INT SC INFO on page 226 09 ACTUAL SIGNALS Signals for the Adaptive Program EMEN 09 01 SCALED Value of analogue input Al1 scaled to an integer value 20000 10V 09 02 Al2 SCALED Value of analogue input Al2 scaled to an integer value 20000 20 mA 09 03 AI3 SCALED Value of analogue input scaled to an integer value 20000 20 mA 09 04 SCALED Value of analogue input 5 scaled to an integer value 20000 20 mA 09 05 Al6 SCALED Value of analogue input 16 scaled to an integer value 20000 20 mA 09 06 DS MCW Control Word CW of the Main Reference data set received from the 0 65535 master station through the fieldbus interface Decimal Actual signals and parameters 102 09 07 MASTER REF1 Reference 1 REF1 of the Main Reference data set received from the 32768 master station through the fieldbus interface 32767 09 08 MASTER REF2 Reference 2 REF2 of the Main Reference data set received from the 32768 master station through the fieldbus interfac
75. setpoint is connected to the drive instead of a speed reference An actual value process feedback is also brought back to the drive The process PID control adjusts the drive speed in order to keep the measured process quantity actual value at the desired level reference The control operates on a 24 ms time level Block diagrams The block diagram below right illustrates the process PID control The figure on the left shows an application example The controller adjusts the speed of a pressure boost pump according to the measured pressure and the set pressure reference Example PID Control Block Diagram Pressure boost pump ref ACS800 Actual Values Frequency 40 06 reference Filter 2 40 12 Filter 40 05 Speed Ae 40 13 AE PIDmax PIDmin 99 04 0 40 19 DIC IMOT external reference EXT REF2 see parameter 11 06 Program features 69 Settings 99 02 Process PID control activation 40 01 40 13 40 19 The settings of the process PID controller 40 25 40 27 2220 The supervision limits for the process reference REF2 and the variables ACT1 and ACT2 Diagnostics 01 12 01 24 01 25 PID process controller reference actual values and error value 01 26 and 01 34 Sleep function for the process PID control The sleep function operates on a 100 ms time level The block d
76. settings on page 75 If you want to perform the limited start up follow the instructions given in section How to perform the limited start up covers only the basic settings on page 77 How to perform the guided start up covers all essential settings Before you start ensure you have the motor nameplate data on hand The start up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician The safety instructions must be followed during the start up procedure See the appropriate hardware manual for safety instructions Check the installation See the installation checklist in the appropriate hardware installation manual Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger De couple the driven machine there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation or a Standard ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start up ID Run is essential only in applications which require the ultimate in motor control accuracy Start up and control through the I O 16 Apply mains power The control panel first shows the panel identification data then the Identification Display of the drive then the Actual Signal Display after which the display suggests starting the Language Selection If no key is pressed for a few seconds the display starts to alternate between the Actual Signal Display and the suggestion on selecting the language The drive is now re
77. speed difference between the Master and the Follower is possible allowed drooping is used see parameter 60 06 TORQUE The drive is torque controlled The selection is used in the Follower s when the motor shafts of the Master and Follower are coupled solidly to each other by gearing a chain or other means of mechanical power transmission and no speed difference between the drives is allowed or possible Note If TORQUE is selected the drive does not restrict the speed variation as long as the speed is within the limits defined by parameters 20 01 and 20 02 More definite speed supervision is often needed In those cases the selection ADD should be used instead of TORQUE MINIMUM The torque selector compares the direct torque reference and the speed controller output and the smaller of them is used as the reference for the motor torque control MINIMUM is selected in special cases only MAXIMUM The torque selector compares the direct torque reference and the speed controller output and the greater of them is used as the reference for the motor torque control MAXIMUM is selected in special cases only ADD The torque selector adds the speed controller output to the direct torque reference The drive is torque controlled in the normal operating range The selection ADD together with the window control forms a speed supervision function for a torque controlled Follower drive See parameter 60 03 60 03 WINDOW SEL ON Activates the Window
78. start must be simultaneous with a mechanical brake release This selection also guarantees the highest possible break away torque when the pre magnetising time is set long enough The pre magnetising time is defined by parameter 21 02 Note Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC magnetising is selected Note DC magnetising cannot be selected if parameter 99 04 SCALAR WARNING The drive will start after the set magnetising time has N passed although the motor magnetisation is not completed Ensure always in applications where a full break away torque is essential that the constant magnetising time is long enough to allow generation of full magnetisation and torque 21 00 CONST MAGN TIME Defines the magnetising time in the constant magnetising mode See parameter 21 01 After the start command the drive automatically pre magnetises the motor the set time 10 to 200 kW gt 200 to 1000 ms 200 to 1000 kW gt 1000 to 2000 ms 21 03 STOP FUNCTION Selects the motor stop function NEN COAST Stop by cutting of the motor power supply The motor coasts to a stop 1 30 0 10000 0 ms Magnetising time To ensure full magnetising set this value to the same value 30 10000 as or higher than the rotor time constant If not known use the rule of thumb value given in the table below Motor Rated Power Constant Magnetising Time 10 kW gt 100 to 200 ms WARNING If the mechanical brake control function is
79. the analogue I O extension 1 0 001 mA module optional A voltage signal is also displayed in mA instead of V 01 40 017 12 STATUS Status of digital inputs 017 to 0112 read from the digital I O extension 1 1 modules optional E g value 000001 DI7 is DI8 to 0112 are off 01 41 EXT RO STATUS Status of the relay outputs on the digital I O extension modules optional E g value 0000001 RO1 of module 1 is energised Other relay outputs are de energised 01 42 PROCESS SPEED REL Motor actual speed in percent of the Absolute Maximum Speed If parameter 99 04 is SCALAR the value is the relative actual output frequency 01 43 MOTOR RUN TIME Motor run time counter The counter runs when the inverter modulates 1 10h Can be reset by parameter 34 06 01 44 FAN ON TIME Running time of the drive cooling fan 1 10h Note Resetting of the counter is recommended when the fan is replaced For more information contact your local ABB representative 01 45 CTRL BOARD TEMP Control board temperature 01 46 SAVED KWH Energy saved in kWh compared to direct on line motor connection 1 100 kWh See parameter group 45 ENERGY OPT on page 767 01 47 SAVED GWH Energy saved in GWh compared to direct on line motor connection saved in Energy saved in GWh compared to direct on line motor connection compared to direct on line motor connection 1 1GWh Actual signals and parameters 100 01 48 SAVED AMOUNT Monetary savin
80. the controller works as a PI controller otherwise as a PID controller The derivation makes the control more responsive for disturbances Note Changing this parameter is recommended only if a pulse encoder is used The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant Gain K 1 T Integration time gt 0 Derivation time gt 0 T Sample time period 1 ms Ae Error value change between two samples Controller Output Error Value e Error value 0 0 9999 8 ms Derivation time value 23 04 ACC COMPENSATION Defines the derivation time for acceleration deceleration compensation In order to compensate inertia during acceleration a derivative of the reference is added to the output of the speed controller The principle of a derivative action is described for parameter 23 03 Note As a general rule set this parameter to the value between 50 and 100 of the sum of the mechanical time constants of the motor and the driven machine The speed controller Autotune Run does this automatically see parameter 23 06 The figure below shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is accelerated along a ramp No Acceleration Compensation Acceleration Compensation Speed reference Actual speed t Actual signals and parameters 137 23 05 SLIP GAIN Defines the slip gain for the motor slip compensation control 10
81. the setting needs to be changed only if the pulse encoder interface module is connected to channel 1 instead of channel 2 Then the speed must be changed to 4 Mbit s See also parameter 50 05 70 04 CHO DDCS HW Selects the topology of the channel 0 link CONN RING Devices are connected in ring topology STAR Devices are connected in a star topology 65535 70 05 CH2 HW Selects the topology of the DDCS channel CH2 link CONNECTION 0 RING Devices are connected in a ring Forwarding of messages is enabled 1 STAR Devices are connected in a star Forwarding of messages is disabled This selection is used with NDBU branching units IRUPERTPAD CURE 72 01 OVERLOAD FUNC Activates the user load curve and selects how the drive reacts when the user load curve has been exceeded User load curve is inactive WARNING The drive generates a warning USER L CURVE Drive output current is not limited FAULT The drive trips on a fault USER L CURVE LIMIT Drive output current is limited to luser curve LIMIT WARN Drive output current is limited to luser curve and the drive generates a warning USER L CURVE 72 02 LOAD CURRENT 1 Defines the first current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by par 72 10 LOAD 1 0 800 Value in percent of the nominal motor current 72 03 LOAD CURRENT 2 Defines the second current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by par 72 11 LOAD FREQ 2 0
82. to 10 V and two current inputs 0 4 to 20 mA Two extra inputs are available if an optional analogue extension module is used Each input can be inverted and filtered and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted Update cycles in the Standard Control Program ee _ Al extension 6 ms 100 ms 1 1 Update cycle in the motor temperature measurement function See group 35 TEMP MEAS Settings Additional information Group 11 REFERENCE Al as a reference source SELECT Group 13 ANALOGUE Processing of the standard inputs INPUTS 30 01 Supervision of Al loss Group 40 Al as a PID process control reference or actual values CONTROL Activation of optional analogue inputs 98 13 Optional Al signal type definition bipolar or unipolar 98 14 Optional Al signal type definition bipolar or unipolar Diagnostics Actual value Additional information 01 18 01 19 01 20 Values of standard inputs 01 38 01 39 Value of optional inputs Group 09 ACTUAL Scaled analogue input values integer values for function block SIGNALS programming Program features 50 Programmable analogue outputs Two programmable current outputs 0 4 to 20 mA are available as standard and two outputs can be added by using an optional analogue extension module Analogue output signals can be inverted and filtered The analogue output signals can be proportional to motor speed process speed scaled
83. to 16 For directions see the NTAC Ox NDIO Ox NAIO Ox Module Installation and Start up Guide 3AFY58919730 English RTAC SLOT 1 Communication active Module type RTAC Connection interface Option slot 1 of the drive Actual signals and parameters 170 RTAC SLOT2 Communication active Module type RTAC Connection interface Option slot 2 of the drive RTAC DDCS Communication active Module type RTAC Connection interface Optional I O module adapter AIMA that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link Note Module node number must set to 16 For directions see the 01 Pulse Encoder Interface User s Manual 3AFE64486853 English RRIA SLOT 1 Communication active Module type RRIA Connection interface option slot 1 of the drive RRIA SLOT2 Communication active Module type RRIA Connection interface option slot 2 of the drive RRIA DDCS Communication active Module type RRIA Connection interface Optional I O module adapter AIMA that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link Note Module node number must be set to 16 For directions see RRIA 07 Resolver Interface Module User s Manual 3AFE68570760 English RTACOS3 SLOT 1 Communication active Module type RTAC 03 Connection interface Option slot 1 of the drive RTACOS3 SLOT2 Communication active Module type RTAC 03 Connection interface Option slot 2 of the drive RTACO3 DDCS Communicatio
84. to get the status row visible Increase the speed reference from zero to a small value by pressing REF and then the arrow keys Press to start the motor Check that the motor is running in the desired direction Stop the motor by pressing To change the direction of rotation of the motor Disconnect mains power from the drive and wait 5 minutes for the intermediate circuit capacitors to discharge Measure the voltage between each input terminal U1 V1 and W1 and earth with a multimeter to ensure that the frequency converter is discharged Exchange the position of two motor cable phase conductors at the motor terminals or at the motor connection box Verify your work by applying mains power and repeating the check as described above Set the minimum speed Set the maximum speed Set the acceleration time 1 Note Check also acceleration time 2 if two acceleration times will be used in the application Set the deceleration time 1 Note Set also deceleration time 2 if two deceleration times will be used in the application Start up and control through the 1 L xxx rpm T FREQ xxx HZ CURRENT xx A POWER 5 forward direction S reverse N direction VS 1 L gt 20 LIMITS 01 MINIMUM SPEED 0 0 rpm O 1 L gt 20 LIMITS 02 MAXIMUM SPEED 0 0 rpm O 1 Lies 0 0 rpm O 22 ACCEL DECEL 02 ACCELER TIME 1 1 L gt 0 0 rp
85. up an RMBA 01 module see section Setting up communication through the Standard Modbus Link on page 191 Before configuring the drive for fieldbus control the adapter module must be mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions given in the hardware manual of the drive and the module manual The following table lists the parameters which need to be defined when setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter Parameter Alternative Setting for Function Information settings fieldbus control COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION NO FIELDBUS Initialises communication between drive and FIELDBUS fieldbus adapter module Activates module set up ADVANT parameters Group 51 STD MODBUS CUSTOMISED ABB DRIVES ABB DRIVES Selects the communication profile used by the GENERIC GENERIC or drive See section Communication profiles on page CSA 2 8 3 0 CSA 2 8 3 0 206 ADAPTER MODULE CONFIGURATION 51 01 MODULE Displays the type of the fieldbus adapter module TYPE 51 02 FIELDBUS These parameters are adapter module specific For more information see the module manual PARAMETER 2 Note that not all of these parameters are necessarily visible 51 26 FIELDBUS PARAMETER 26 51 27 PAR 0 DONE Validates any changed adapter module REFRESH 1 REFRESH configuration parameter settings After refreshing the value reverts automatically to DONE 51 28 FILE xyz binary coded Displays the required CPI firmw
86. value automatically restores to NO after an editing command has been executed PUSH Shifts the block in location defined by parameter 83 03 and the following blocks one location up A new block can be placed in the emptied location by programming the Block Parameter Set as usual 83 01 ADAPT PROG CMD Selects the operation mode for the Adaptive Program Example A new block needs to be placed in between the current block number four parameters 84 20 84 25 and five parameters 84 25 84 29 In order to do this Shift the program to the editing mode by parameter 83 01 Select location number five as the desired location for the new block by parameter 83 03 Shift the block in location number 5 and the following blocks one location forward by parameter 83 02 selection PUSH Program the emptied location number 5 by parameters 84 25 to 84 29 as usual DELETE Deletes the block in location defined by parameter 83 03 and shifts the following blocks one step down PROTECT Activation of the Adaptive Program protection Activate as follows Ensure the Adaptive Program operation mode is START or STOP parameter 83 01 Set the passcode parameter 83 05 Change parameter 83 02 to PROTECT When activated All parameters in group 84 excluding the block output parameters are hidden read protected Itis not possible to switch the program to the editing mode parameter 83 01 Parameter 83 05 is set to 0 Actua
87. when the value is above below the limit See section Supervisions on page 67 32 01 SPEED1 FUNCTION Activates deactivates the speed supervision function and selects the type of the supervision limit Supervision is not used LOW LIMIT Supervision wakes up if the value is below the limit HIGH LIMIT Supervision wakes up if the value is above the limit ABS LOW LIMIT Supervision wakes up if the value is below the set limit The limit is supervised in both rotating directions The figure below illustrates the principle speed rpm ABS LOW LIMIT ABS LOW LIMIT 32 02 SPEED1 LIMIT Defines the speed supervision limit See parameter 32 01 18000 18000 rpm Value of the limit 18000 18000 3248 SPEEDZFUNCTON O o OOO O O OOOO iy 3204 SPEEDZUMT 18000 18000 rpm See parameter 32 01 18000 18000 32 05 CURRENT Activates deactivates the motor current supervision function and selects the FUNCTION type of the supervision limit 3206 CURRENT LIMIT Defines the imit or tne motor curent supervision parameter 3205 _ 32 07 TORQUE 1 Activates deactivates the motor torque supervision function and selects the FUNCTION type of the supervision limit LOW LIMIT See parameter 32 01 gt Actual signals and parameters 149 HIGH LIMIT See parameter 32 01 32 0
88. 0 enter the Parameter Mode select the correct parameter group and parameter enter the parameter setting mode ENTER To scroll between the inversion group index and bit 1 L gt 1242 0 rpm fields 84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM 06 INPUT1 000 000 00 To adjust the value of a field 1 L gt 1242 0 rpm 84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM 06 INPUT1 000 018 00 1 L 51242 0 rpm Inversion field inverts the selected parameter 84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM value Plus sign no inversion minus sign 06 INPUT inversion 001 018 00 Bit field selects the bit number relevant only if the Inversion field parameter value is a packed boolean word Group field Index field selects the parameter index Index field Bit field Group field selects the parameter group Note Instead of pointing to another parameter it is also possible to define a constant by the source selection parameter Proceed as follows Change the inversion field to C The appearance of the row changes The rest of the line is now a constant setting field Give the constant value to the constant setting field Press Enter to accept Control panel 34 Function mode In the Function Mode the user can start a guided procedure for adjusting the drive settings assistants upload the drive parameter values and motor data from the drive to the panel e download group 1 to 97 parameter values from the panel to the drive 1 adjust the contrast of th
89. 0 par 11 08 0 0 10000 par 11 08 10000 par 11 08 1 par 11 07 O par 11 07 10000 par 11 08 10000 par 11 08 0 0 10000 par 11 08 Actual speed scaling 0 0 20000 par 99 08 DTC 99 07 scalar 0 0 20000 99 08 DTC 99 07 scalar 0 0 20000 99 08 DTC 99 07 scalar 0 0 20000 99 08 DTC 99 07 scalar 0 0 20000 99 08 DTC 99 07 scalar 0 0 20000 99 08 DTC 99 07 scalar 0 0 20000 par 99 08 DTC 99 07 scalar With DTC the filter time of the actual speed value can be adjusted using parameter 34 04 Final reference limited by 20 01 20 02 speed or 20 07 20 08 frequency Final reference limited by 20 01 20 02 speed 20 07 20 08 frequency Final reference limited by par 20 04 Final reference limited by par 20 04 Note The maximum reference value is 163 i e 163 1 63 value of parameter 99 08 99 07 value Fieldbus control 214 CSA 2 8 3 0 communication profile The CSA 2 8 3 0 communication profile is active when parameter 98 07 is set to CSA 2 8 3 0 The Control Word and Status Word for the profile are described below CONTROL WORD for the CSA 2 8 3 0 communication profile Bit Name Value Description ES _ 0 Reserved M 2 Reserved Enabled EN Coast to stop
90. 0 means full slip compensation 0 means no slip compensation The default value is 100 Other values can be used if a static speed error is detected despite of the full slip compensation Example 1000 rpm constant speed reference is given to the drive Despite of the full slip compensation SLIP GAIN 100 a manual tachometer measurement from the motor axis gives a speed value of 998 rpm The static speed error is 1000 rpm 998 rpm 2 rpm To compensate the error the slip gain should be increased At the 10695 gain value no static speed error exists 0 0 400 0 Slip gain value 0 400 23 06 AUTOTUNE RUN Start automatic tuning of the speed controller Instructions Run the motor at a constant speed of 20 to 40 of the rated speed Change the autotuning parameter 23 06 to YES Note The motor load must be connected to the motor NO Activates the speed controller autotuning Automatically reverts to NO 65535 23 07 SP ACT FILT TIME Defines the time constant of the actual speed filter i e time within the actual speed has reached 63 of the nominal speed 24 TORQUE CTRL Torque control variables Visible only if parameter 99 02 T CNTRL and parameter 99 04 DTC 24 01 TORQ RAMP UP Defines the torque reference ramp up time 0 00 120 00 s Time for the reference to increase from zero to the nominal motor torque 0 12000 24 00 RAMP DOWN Defines the torque reference ramp down time 0 00 120 00 s
91. 0 rpm DOWNLOAD gt gt Control panel 38 How to set the contrast of the display Enter the Function Mode I Ir 124240 rpm Motor Setup Application Macro Speed Control EXT1 Enter the page that contains the upload download and contrast functions 1 L gt 1242 0 rpm UPLOAD lt lt DOWNLOAD CONTRAST 4 Select a function a flashing cursor indicates the selected 1L gt 1242 0 rpm function UPLOAD lt lt DOWNLOAD gt gt ENTER ENTER gt gt CONTRAST 4 1 L gt 1242 0 rpm CONTRAST 4 Enter the contrast setting function Adjust the contrast 1L 1242 0 rpm CONTRAST 6 Accept the selected value 1L 1242 0 rpm O UPLOAD Esc DOWNLOAD gt gt CONTRAST 6 Cancel the new setting and retain the original value by 1L 1242 0 rpm I pressing any of the mode selection keys FREQ 45 00 Hz CURRENT 80 00 A POWER 75 00 9 The selected mode is entered Control panel 39 Drive selection mode In normal use the features available in the Drive Selection Mode are not needed the features are reserved for applications where several drives are connected to one panel link For more information see the nstallation and Start up Guide for the Panel Bus Connection Interface Module NBCI 3AFY58919748 English In the Drive Selection Mode the user can Select the drive with which the panel communicates through the panel link e Change the identificatio
92. 00 255 255 31 C the difference 1mA 32768 32767 ddl retold 16 01 RUN ENABLE Sets the Run Enable signal on or selects a source for the external Run Enable signal If Run Enable signal is switched off the drive will not start or stops if it is running The stop mode is set by parameter 21 07 temal sgnal requred trough dgtal input 1 RunEnable 2 Dg Da Dd D amp De _ GOMMOW etemal signal requred trough the Fieldbus Convoi 8 _ WwW Actual signals and parameters 125 can be opened by entering the valid code to parameter 16 03 0 30000 Setting 358 opens the lock The value reverts back to 0 automatically 0 30000 16 04 FAULT RESET SEL Selects the source for the fault reset signal The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists NOT SEL Fault reset only from the control panel keypad RESET key 1 Reset through digital input or by control panel f the drive is in external control mode Reset by a rising edge of DI1 f the drive is in local control mode Reset by the RESET key of the control panel DI2 See selection 011 DI3 See selection 011 See selection DI1 3 4 5 COMM CW Reset through the fieldbus Control Word bi
93. 00 Torque value in percent of the motor nominal torque 30000 30000 42 009 EXTEND RUN T Defines an extended run time for the brake control function at stop During the delay the motor is kept magnetised and ready for an immediate restart 0 0 60 0 5 0 0 5 Normal stop routine of the brake control function The motor 100 15 magnetisation is switched off after the brake close delay has passed 0 1 60 0 s Extended stop routine of the brake control function The motor magnetisation is switched off after the brake close delay and the extended run time have passed During the extended run time a zero torque reference is applied and the motor is ready for a immediate restart Start Stop Motor magnetised 1 brake close speed 2 brake close delay 3 extended run time 42 10 LOW REF BRK HOLD Activates a brake hold function and defines the hold delay for it The function stabilises the operation of the brake control application when the motor operates near zero speed and there is no measured speed feedback available pulse encoder 0 0 s inactive 100 15 0 1 5 60 0 s active When the absolute value of the motor speed reference falls below the brake close speed The brake hold delay counter starts The brake is closed according to normal stop routine of the brake control function During the delay the function keeps the brake closed despite of the speed reference value and the value of start command When
94. 05 INVERT Al Activates deactivates the inversion of analogue input Inversion active The maximum value of the analogue input signal corresponds to the minimum reference and vice versa See parameter 13 01 See parameter 13 01 See parameter 13 01 See parameter 13 01 See parameter 13 01 13 07 MAXIMUM 2 See parameter 13 02 See parameter 13 02 See parameter 13 02 See parameter 13 02 0 1000 65535 Actual signals and parameters Index Name Selection 13 08 SCALE AI2 0 1000 13 09 FILTER AI2 0 00 10 00 s 13 10 INVERT Al2 2 13 11 MINIMUM AI3 4 mA TUNED VALUE TUNE 13 12 MAXIMUM AI3 20 mA TUNED VALUE TUNE 13 13 SCALE AI3 100096 13 14 FILTER AI3 0 00 10 00 s 13 15 INVERT AI3 2 lt C YE 13 16 MINIMUM AI5 mA 4 TUNED VALUE TUNE 13 17 MAXIMUM AI5 20 mA TUNED VALUE TUNE 13 18 SCALE 5 0 1000 13 19 FILTER AI5 0 00 10 00 5 115 i 2 13 01 Note If RAIO 01 is used with voltage input signal 20 mA corresponds to 10 V See parameter 13 02 Note If RAIO 01 is used with voltage input signal 20 mA corresponds to 10 V See parameter 13 02 1 See parameter 13 02 2 See parameter 13 02 3 gt O gt O oO OO Actual signals and parameters a a Index Name
95. 07 20 08 frequency Final reference limited by 20 01 20 02 speed or 20 07 20 08 frequency Final reference limited by par 20 04 Final reference limited by par 20 04 211 Generic Drive communication profile The Generic Drive communication profile is active when parameter 98 07 is set to GENERIC The Generic Drive profile realises the device profile for drives speed control only as defined by specific fieldbus standards such as PROFIDRIVE for PROFIBUS AC DC Drive for DeviceNet Drives and Motion Control for CANopen etc Each device profile specifies its Control and Status Words Reference and Actual value scaling The profiles also define Mandatory services which are transferred to the application interface of the drive in a standardised way The Generic Drive communication profile be used through both EXT1 and EXT2 The proper functioning of the Generic Drive profile requires that Control Word commands are enabled by setting parameter 10 01 or 10 02 whichever control location is active to COMM CW or par 10 07 to 1 and by setting parameter 16 01 to YES vendor specific support of EXT2 reference see appropriate fieldbus manual Note The Generic Drive profile is only available with type Rxxx fieldbus adapter modules Fieldbus control 212 Drive commands supported by the Generic Drive communication profile Description 0 0000 STOP The drive decelerates the moto
96. 1 bit 14 programmable Fault Function 30 17 ENC CABLE 7310 3 31 AW 6 bit 3 programmable Fault Function 50 07 ENCODER A lt gt B 7302 3 09 AW 2 bit 4 ENCODER ERR 7301 3 08 AW 1 bit 5 FAN OTEMP FF83 3 16 AW 4 bit 0 HW RECONF RQ FF38 Cyclical communication between drive and master is lost Drive limits torque due to too high or too low intermediate circuit DC voltage Drive has detected load unbalance typically due to earth fault in motor or motor cable Pulse encoder phase signal is missing Pulse encoder phasing is wrong Phase A is connected to terminal of phase B and vice versa Communication fault between pulse encoder and pulse encoder interface module and between module and drive Excessive temperature of drive output filter fan Supervision is in use in step up drives Inverter type e g sr0025 3 has been changed Inverter type is usually changed at factory or during drive implementation 229 CAUSE WHAT TO DO Check status of fieldbus communication See chapter Fie dbus control or appropriate fieldbus adapter manual Check parameter settings group 51 COMM MODULE DATA for fieldbus adapter group 52 STANDARD MODBUS for Standard Modbus Link Check Fault Function parameters Check cable connections Check if master can communicate Informative alarm Check Fault Function parameters Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge ab
97. 10 kohm 2 The US default settings differ as X21 follows DI1 Start Pulse 0 21 Stop Pulse 1 20 jo nm etka OO 1 kohm lt R lt 10 kohm AM Speed reference 0 2 10 V Ri gt 200 By default not in use 0 4 20 mA Rin 6 2 100 ohm By default not in use 0 4 20 mA Rin e 100 ohm 9 AO1 Motor speed 0 4 20 mA 0 motor nom speed lt 700 ohm nom current lt 700 ohm 6 6 select ______ 24 VDC max 100 mA 8 9 DGND1 Digital ground X23 Forward Reverse 30 ramp times according to par 22 02 and 22 03 1 ramp times according to par 22 04 and 22 05 See parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS m 015 pre Operation 0 0 Setspeed trough AT Speed 2 5 See parameter 21 09 6 Total maximum current shared between this output and optional modules installed on the board Auxiliary voltage output and input non isolated 24 V DC 250 9 X25 Relay output 1 2 roe Ready RO13 X26 Relay output 2 Running X27 Ud R031 Relay output 3 Fault Inverted fault QS Application macros 87 Hand Auto macro Start Stop and Direction commands and reference settings can be given from one of two external control locations EXT1 Hand or EXT2 A
98. 20 0 0 600 0 that corresponds to the maximum setting of the analogue input 100 1 RUSTARTSTOR 21 01 START FUNCTION Selects the motor starting method See also section Automatic Start on page 54 Actual signals and parameters 130 Automatic start guarantees optimal motor start in most cases It includes the 1 flying start function starting to a rotating machine and the automatic restart function stopped motor can be restarted immediately without waiting the motor flux to die away The drive motor control program identifies the flux as well as the mechanical state of the motor and starts the motor instantly under all conditions Note If parameter 99 04 SCALAR no flying start or automatic restart is possible by default The flying start feature needs to be activated separately by parameter 21 08 DC MAGN DC magnetising should be selected if a high break away torque is required 2 The drive pre magnetises the motor before the start The pre magnetising time is determined automatically being typically 200 ms to 2 s depending on the motor size DC MAGN guarantees the highest possible break away torque Note Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC magnetising is selected Note DC magnetising cannot be selected if parameter 99 04 SCALAR CNST DC MAGN Constant DC magnetising should be selected instead of DC magnetising if constant pre magnetising time is required e g if the motor
99. 30 parameters 52 53 PID control 69 settings 52 53 speed controller 58 speed controller tuning 58 user defined variables 67 Actual values 53 actual signals 52 53 analogue outputs 50 defined 201 digital inputs 51 relay outputs 52 Adapter module fieldbus 188 Advent controller 193 194 Al lt Min settings gt 61 ALARM WORD 1 218 ALARM WORD 2 219 ALARM WORD 4 221 ALARM WORD 5 222 ALARM WORD 6 223 Analogue extension module 245 Analogue inputs optional supervising 64 Analogue outputs diagnostics 50 optional supervising 64 parameters 50 settings 50 APPLICATION MACRO 99 183 273 Application macros 83 factory 83 85 hand auto 83 87 PID control 83 89 reference control chain diagram 266 sequential control 83 93 torque control 83 91 user 83 95 Application selection for start up assistant 41 Automatic resets 67 Automatic start 54 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD 3 219 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD 4 220 B Boolean values 40 C Cable connection monitoring 63 Clearing fault history 30 Communication fault protection 64 profiles 206 214 using a fieldbus adapter module 189 Communication profiles 206 214 ABB drives 206 generic drive 211 Constant speeds 57 Control block diagrams 263 271 Control board temperature fault 66 Control panel basic keys 35 display mode 29 downloading drive data 37 drive control 27 28 overview 25 26 setting the display contrast 38 upload drive data 36 Control word 199 CSA 2 8 3 0
100. 5 06 2 TEMPFLTL ____ 35 07 MOT MOD COMPENSAT es o YES 8508MOTMODCOMPPIR D O D bD b b m amp AOOTPIDGAIN 40 02 TIME 0005 6000s 60008 005 005 40 03 DERIV TIME 05 005 0006 0006 00s 40 04 DERIV FILTER 1005 1 00 oos 005 1008 88 a0 05 ERROR VALUE NY RO 40 06 VALUE SEL 40 07 __ 2 A2 787 40 08ACTUALZINPUTSEL __ 2 A2 ____ p p b bD b0 40 10 MAXIMUM Hoo 009 ______100 ______ 100 ______100 40 ACTZMINIMUM 0 70 2797 7 40 12 ACT2 MAXIMUM 100 ______ 100 100 004 hoon 40 3PIDINTEGRATION _____ 4044TRIMMODE oF FF 86 A0 1S TRIMREFSEL ____ Ai Additional data actual signals and parameters 259 Index Name Selection FACTORY HAND AUTO PID TRL SEQCTRL PB W 40 16 TRIM REFERENCE 0 0 7 pon 000 7 00 7 00 40 17 TRIM RANGE ADJUST 100 0 100 0 1000 100 0 ____ 100 0 4018TRIMSELECTION 980 40 19 FLT TIME 004s 0045 0045 40 20 SLEEP SELECTION not visible _ notvisible ___ __
101. 509 tad gh ee ADAE E defe a a oi ed 44 arent 44 DIAGMOSUCS aed 44 Block diagram start stop direction source for 1 45 Block diagram reference source for EXT1 45 Reference types and processing 46 SCUINGS dU 46 DIGOPI OS S 2 3 rade iS rore OO ed A 46 Reference Enrmlnig OG eed fk deno e doe Pru dd 47 DOMINOS sears a eae tete 47 a 6 48 Programmable analogue inputs 49 Update cycles in the Standard Control Program 49 5 sate 49 DIagrioSll S ord MOM toi des 49 Programmable analogue outputs 50 Update cycles in the Standard Control Program 50 Spe Tm 50 8 61 M I pnr 50 Programmable digital inputs 51 Update cycles in the Standard Control Program 51 vice Jie jot aoe cas
102. 6 AW 4 bit 4 START INHIBI Optional start inhibit hardware logic is Check start inhibit circuit AGPS board FF7A activated AW 1 bit 0 START INTERL No Start Interlock signal received Check circuit connected to Start Interlock input FF8D on RMIO board SYNCRO SPEED Value of motor nominal speed set to parameter Check nominal speed from motor rating plate FF87 99 08 is not correct Value is too near and set parameter 99 08 exactly accordingly synchronous speed of motor Tolerance is 0 196 This warning is active only in DTC mode 3 18 AW 5 bit 1 TEMP DIF xx y Excessive temperature difference between Check cooling fan 4380 several parallel connected inverter modules Replace fan 4 01 FAULTED INT xx 1 12 refers to inverter module number Check air filters INFO and y refers to phase U V W Alarm is indicated when temperature difference is 15 C Fault is indicated when temperature difference is 20 C Excessive temperature can be caused e g by unequal current sharing between parallel connected inverters Fault tracing 234 WARNING THERMISTOR 4311 3 08 AW 1 bit 2 programmable Fault Function 30 04 30 05 T MEAS ALM FF91 3 08 AW 1 bit 6 UNDERLOAD FF6A 3 09 AW 2 bit 1 programmable Fault Function 30 13 USER L CURVE 2312 3 18 AW 5 bit 13 Fault tracing CAUSE WHAT TO DO Motor temperature is excessive Motor thermal protection mode selection is THERMISTOR M
103. 7 98 03 5803 108 TE 98 04 7 12 98 05 D SET REC AUX DS 124 ACT 1 90 01 REF3 2 3 125 ACT AUX DS CES ACTUAL 1 TI JA TUNE 5 40 25 FB ADAPTER SWITCH g DATASET LOC DIR AUX REF MAIN ACT DATASET SRT STP DIR SRT STP AUX ACT DATASET LOC START CTRLPANEL DRIV WNDW DIG IN R prp 4 gt Z m 771 LOC CV EXT 1 STRT PTR LOC 1024 LOC REM EXT 2 STRT PTR ziainiol o lt 2 gt 0 D aA gt mio Based on Prepared Project name Control block diagrams continued from the previous page LOC REM LOC LOC REF X LOC REM REM 2 EXT 30 01 30 02 30 18 1216 102 DIRECTION 10 03 11 CRITICAL 25 01 SPEEDS SWITCH d CRITICAL SPEEDS E EA ies b Gag G34 TRIM 4016 REFERENCE Fw SHEET 1 2 FAULT SPEED FUNCTION ACS 800 STANDARD APPLICATION PRG HANDLING OF REFERENCES amp DIR ABB Industry 265 MOTOR CTRL MODE a SPEED REF SALA SPEED REF DTC TRIM REF SEL 4015 SWITCH FACTORY SEQ E HANDZAUTO TORQUE EXT REF 12 TORQ REF DTC ANALOG OUTPUT 0 1 EXTERNAL AD Doc no 00170564dwg Continue on 00170545 dwg Control bl
104. 8 TORQUE 1 LIMIT Defines the limit for the motor torque supervision see parameter 32 07 ision 07 600 600 Value of the limit in percent of the motor nominal torque 6000 6000 32 09 TORQUE 2 Activates deactivates the motor torque supervision function and selects the FUNCTION type of the supervision limit LOW LIMIT See parameter 32 01 Bd HIGH LIMIT See parameter 32 01 Bg 32 10 TORQUE 2 LIMIT Defines the limit for the motor torque supervision see parameter 32 09 NENNEN 3 1 2 3 600 60096 Value of the limit in percent of motor nominal torque 6000 6000 32 11 REF1 FUNCTION Activates deactivates the external reference REF1 supervision function and selects the type of the supervision limit 1 2 3 Ds 1 LOW LIMIT See parameter 32 01 2 HIGH LIMIT See parameter 32 01 51 3212 REF1 LIMIT Defines the limit for REF1 supervision see parameter 32 11 1 selects the type of the supervision limit NO 3244 REF2LIMIT ___ Defines the tor REF2 supervision see parameter 2 PID controller and selects the type of the supervision limit 9216 ACTILIMIT Defines the imit for ACT supervision see parameter 3215 J PID controller and selects the type of the supervision limit 32 18 2 LIMIT Defines the limit for ACT2 supervision See parameter 32 17 0 200 Value of the limit 0 2000 Srna ae eee 33 01 SOFTWARE Displays the type and t
105. 8269100 jesey Jo y uo jeeus ay ees snqpjey YBnoy s JON Z uo jeeus ay ees SLOWS 43534 28 Z NI 98 2 dive ra LYVLS 2440 7440 19 MAD 50941313 AAD 6 8 ANO NIVIA 1 440 JINON 1X3 NO 1 dOLS 2440 440 NOpue aa D 6446 Ol NO LNdNI 49O TH3LLNI 2440 co LL MO WINOO x oomiaiNi 16012 MOWIOO 71 2001 Q 440 BN olo W901 NI LON OS 8079 n mm bow bi 5151 X o oud 4 4 1X3 zig 5 1091 MO 0 2 SLOWS
106. ACCELTIME2 5000s 6000s 60008 6000s 60006 804 2205 DECELTIME2 6000s 60 006 0005 6000s 5000s 2206 ACC DEC RAMPSHPE 0005 000s 000s 00s 00s 22 07 EM STOP RAMP TIME 005 05 05 05 00s pocer a D QD 70 M 229 bD b 0 mw eE 2302 NTEGRATION TIME 2 508 2506 7 2506 50s 50s 27 23 03 DERIVATION TIME 328 2304 ACC COMPENSATION 0008 00s i2s 29 23 05 SLIPGAIN 0009 100 09 ____ 100 0 0 0 23 06 Mo ____ NO H3 2507 SPACTFILT TIME ___ Bms Bms Bms H32 24 TORQUECTRE 24 01 TORARAMPUP ___ bos 24 02 TORQRAMPDOWN pos Aaditional data actual signals and parameters 257 Index Name Selection FACTORY PID CTRL _ T CTRL SEQCTRL PB W e ee el 25 01 CRIT SPEED SELECT OFF __ __ Qr JF ej 25 02 CRITSPEED 1LOW Drm ____ ____ Jmm 25 03 CRITSPEED THIGH Orm ____ ____ Dmm mm e 25 04 CRITSPEED2LOW mm ____ Qmm Dmm mm 25 06 SPEED 2HIGH __ mm Qmm Dmm mm M8 2 amp 06 CRITSPEED3LOW mm ____ Dmm mm mm 25 07 CRIT SPEED 3HIGH Omm rmm Dm rm 26 MOTORCONTROL 1 2eo4 RSTEPUPFREQ b buw
107. CURRENT LIM Motor current has exceeded or fallen below the set supervision limit See group 32 SUPERVISION 3 REF 1 LIM Reference 1 has exceeded or fallen below the set supervision limit See group 32 SUPERVISION 4 REF 2 LIM Reference 2 has exceeded or fallen below the set supervision limit See group 32 SUPERVISION 5 TORQUE 1 LIM The motor torque has exceeded or fallen below the TORQUE1 supervision limit See group 32 SUPERVISION TORQUE 2 LIM The motor torque has exceeded or fallen below the 2 supervision limit See group 32 SUPERVISION ACT 1 LIM PID controller actual value 1 has exceeded or fallen below the set supervision limit See group 32 SUPERVISION ACT 2 LIM PID controller actual value 2 has exceeded or fallen below the set supervision limit See group 32 SUPERVISION ABOVE_LIMIT 1 Actual frequency or speed value equals or exceeds the supervision limit par 32 02 0 Actual frequency or speed value is within supervision limit Reserved 15 03 15 FAULT WORD 4 Fieldbus control Step up module fault MOTOR 1 TEMP For the possible causes and remedies see chapter Fault tracing MOTOR 2 TEMP BRAKE ACKN 221 03 16 ALARM WORD 4 2 Step up module overtemperature alarm MOTOR 1 TEMP For the possible causes and remedies see chapter Fault tracing MOTOR 2 TEMP SLEEP MODE 03 17 FAULT WORD 5 0 BRBROEN
108. DG OV CT VOMACC 35252 a 64 8 55 65 ____________8___ 65 Enhanced drive temperature monitoring for ACS800 U2 U4 and U7 frame sizes R7 and R8 65 vig 66 DIAGMOSUCS 66 SHON CNCUIT 22 15 93 ee 66 OSS 4a 4 aot RE e CUR ea a e AE NOR ACE e dee o e dne Pob d 66 Conhtrol board temperate su 25 03 x vedere dud eee dd Rob Gad cies de Pad 66 66 Internal dU 66 I TT TUR 66 ead 66 FOWOI gt FER ee SS 67 AULOMAUG TOSE _ Ned a gt 67 SS ING Slaps arisen eaves amt 67 67 SEWNOS 67 DIAGNOSIICS 67 Parameter OD za 5 v dote SU dese 67 SENGS aes tae ek An 67 Process PID COMO dad wet tect 68 gt ee et 68
109. Drooping Max Speed Speed Example Speed Controller output is 50 DROOP RATE is of 1 maximum speed of the drive is 1500 rpm Speed decrease 0 50 0 01 1500 rpm 7 5 rpm nominal No Drooping 100 Par 60 06 DROOP RATE Drooping Speed Controller Drive load 100 Output 96 0 10096 Droop rate in percent of the motor nominal speed 0 1000 60 07 MASTER SIGNAL 2 Selects the signal that is sent by the Master to the Follower s as Reference 1 speed reference 0000 9999 Parameter index 0000 9999 60 08 MASTER SIGNAL Selects the signal that is sent by the Master to the Follower s as Reference 2 torque reference 0000 9999 Parameter index 0000 9999 70 01 CHANNEL ADDR Defines the node address for channel 0 No two nodes on line may have the same address The setting needs to be changed when a master station is connected to channel 0 and it does not automatically change the address of the slave Examples of such masters are an ABB Advant Controller or another drive 70 02 CHANNEL 3 ADDR Node address for channel 3 No two nodes on line may have the same address Typically the setting needs to be changed when the drive is connected in a ring which consists of several drives and a PC with the DriveWindow program running Actual signals and parameters 166 Index Name Selection Description 70 03 CH1 BAUD RATE The communication speed of channel 1 Typically
110. E 88 PID SC OMMONIMACKO T TIT LU ee eee eke Oe Re eee eS 89 Connection example 24 VDC 4 20 mA two wire sensor 89 Default control eornriectlors werd e de eite Ra OO i 90 Torque Control MACKO gt 1 3 423 eo aot werd not CR ark wd wand o act 91 Default control GonnieclloriS x uae uen ohn dae ee bse aw bee eee reae et Ri OE 2 92 seguehtral Gontrael flde bt ac c a 93 ODOratUorn diagrami a du trae Rn mata ca n RO Bek eae ds eee le 93 Derault control ConmeclloriS 2224 cd d rb TB CE eet eee eens ERR EP TUE E 94 USO MC So BER Cte 95 Actual signals and parameters Chapter Me ab ede c a e oe S e D CO Ka ei Uode E acu d 97 Terms andabbrevialloliS um eode det dc t ot e tea oe e d AC e 97 OT ACTUAL SIGNALS 1a tao entrar 98 TRANS SIONALE ESO as SM a ee 100 OS AG UAE De DIESEL 100 04 ACTUAL SIGNALS ween ree edd be Pow a Rw 101 OS AG TUS GINA Sse etur te we ah ee mod cara AR dco 101 VO SAS AP ee 103 REFERENSE SELECT 32 Beare ie Sede doque re ee gers pa e Shae 105 12 CONSTANT
111. E Defines the name for the drive or application The name is visible on the control panel display in the Drive Selection Mode Note The name can be typed only by using a drive PC tool Actual signals and parameters Fieldbus control Chapter overview 187 The chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a communication network System overview The drive can be connected to an external control system usually a fieldbus controller via an adapter module The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the external control interface or the control can be distributed between the external control interface and other available sources for example digital and analogue inputs The following diagram shows the control interfaces and connections of the drive Fieldbus controller Fieldbus ACS800 Other p devices Os Fieldbus adapter Controller Modbus Slot 1 E 99 8 RMBA 01 adapter OO std Modbus link Q 90 9Jz Slot 1 or 2 I O adapter x RTAC RDIO RAIO RDCO comm LEHI AIMA 01 10 DDCS adapter module I Ec CHO Fieldbus adapter DDCS NXXX or Data Flow lt lt Control Word CW lt q_ ___ References Process I O cyclic Status Word SW Actual values Parameter R W requests responses Si Advant controlle
112. ED cannot be performed if parameter 99 04 SCALAR See section Motor identification on page 53 ID MAGN No ID Run The motor model is calculated at first start by magnetising the motor for 20 to 60 s at zero speed This can be selected in most applications STANDARD Standard ID Run Guarantees the best possible control accuracy The ID Run takes about one minute Note The motor must be de coupled from the driven equipment Note Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID Run During the run the motor will rotate in the forward direction WARNING The motor will run at up to approximately 50 8096 of the N nominal speed during the ID Run ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN Actual signals and parameters 186 REDUCED Reduced ID Run Should be selected instead of the Standard ID Run if mechanical losses are higher than 20 i e the motor cannot be de coupled from the driven equipment if flux reduction is not allowed while the motor is running i e in case of a motor with an integrated brake supplied from the motor terminals Note Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID Run During the run the motor will rotate in the forward direction WARNING The motor will run at up to approximately 50 80 of the N nominal speed during the ID Run ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN 99 11 DEVICE NAM
113. ED Estimated motor speed 100 corresponds to the Absolute Maximum 20000 100 Speed of the motor 02 18 SPEED MEASURED Measured motor actual speed zero when no encoder is used 100 20000 100 corresponds to the Absolute Maximum Speed of the motor 02 19 MOTOR ACCELERATIO Calculated motor acceleration from signal 01 02 MOTOR SPEED 1 1 rpm s 02 20 USER CURRENT Measured motor current in percent of the user load curve current User 10 1 load curve current is defined by parameters 72 02 72 09 See section User load curve on page 87 03 ACTUAL SIGNALS Data words for monitoring of fieldbus communication each signal is a 16 2 bit data word 03 01 MAIN CTRL WORD A 16 bit data word See section 03 07 MAIN CONTROL WORD on page 207 03 02 MAIN STATUS WORD A 16 bit data word See section 03 02 MAIN STATUS WORD on page 208 03 03 AUX STATUS WORD A 16 bit data word See section 03 03 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD on page 275 03 04 LIMIT WORD 1 A 16 bit data word See section 03 04 LIMIT WORD 1 on 216 03 05 FAULT WORD 1 A 16 bit data word See section 03 05 FAULT WORD 1 on page 216 03 06 FAULT WORD 2 A 16 bit data word See section 03 06 FAULT WORD 2 on page 277 Actual signals and parameters 101 03 07 SYSTEM FAULT A 16 bit data word See section 03 07 SYSTEM FAULT WORD on page 218 03 08 ALARM WORD 1 A 16 bit data word See section 03 08 ALARM WORD 1 on 218 03 09 ALARM WORD 2 A 16 bit dat
114. FY58919730 English NO 2 RDIO SLOT 1 Communication active Module type RDIO Connection interface Option slot 1 3 of the drive RDIO SLOT2 Communication active Module type RDIO Connection interface Option slot 2 of the drive RDIO DDCS Communication active Module type RDIO Connection interface Optional I O module adapter AIMA that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link Note Module node number must be set to 3 For directions see the RD O Module User s Manual 3AFE64485733 English 98 05 DI O EXT MODULE 3 Activates the communication to the digital extension module 3 optional and defines the type and connection interface of the module Module inputs See parameter 98 11 for the use of the inputs in the drive application program Module outputs See parameters 14 14 and 14 15 for selecting the drive states that are indicated through the relay outputs NDIO Communication active Module type NDIO module Connection interface Fibre optic DDCS link Note Module node number must be set to 4 For directions see the NDIO Ox NAIO Ox Module Installation and Start up Guide 3AFY58919730 English RDIO SLOT1 Communication active Module type RDIO Connection interface Option slot 1 of the drive RDIO SLOT2 Communication active Module type RDIO Connection interface Option slot 2 of the drive Actual signals and parameters 180 RDI
115. Fault tracing CHOKE OTEMP FF82 STEPUP FAN ALM CMD DI2 of Step Up module For possible causes and remedies see chapter Fault tracing FAN OTEMP FF83 FREE DI3 of Step Up module STEPUP MODULATING RO1 of Step Up module Drive is modulating STATUS STEPUP TRIP STATUS RO2 of Step Up module See 03 02 MAIN STATUS WORD bit3 TRIPPED 03 33 FAULT WORD 6 Fieldbus control i o 2 ENC CABLE For possible causes and remedies see chapter Fault tracing 225 04 01 FAULTED INT INFO The FAULTED INT INFO Word includes information on the location of faults PPCC LINK OVERCURRENT EARTH FAULT SHORT CIRCUIT ACS800 TEMP TEMP DIF POWERF INV see 03 05 FAULT WORD 1 03 06 FAULT WORD 2 03 17 FAULT WORD 5 and chapter Fault tracing Used only with parallel connected inverters Fieldbus control 226 Inverter Block Diagram RMIO NT RMIO Motor Control and I O Board 0 0 0 Upper leg IGBTs INT Circuit Interface Board PPCS Link Branching Unit Ok OA Lower leg IGBTs U V W Inverter Unit Block Diagram 2 to 12 parallel inverters PBU INT3 INT1 INT2 INT 0 9 5 Nill 94 gs OF 5 63 64 OX OF LOR 04 02 INT SC INFO Fieldbus control The INT SC INFO Word includes information
116. I O extension module Note Actually the setting 10 mA 12 mA does not set the 1 minimum but fixes 10 12 mA to actual signal value zero Example Motor speed is read through the analogue output The motor nominal speed is 1000 rpm parameter 99 08 96 02 is NO 96 05 is 100 The analogue output value as a function of the speed is shown below Analogue output Analogue output 5 7 signal minimum 1 T 2 4mA 3 10 ER aa 12 96 04 FILTER EXT AO1 Defines the filtering time constant for analogue output AO1 of the analogue 1 0 extension module See parameter 15 04 0 00 10 00 s Filtering time constant 0 1000 96 05 SCALE EXT AO1 Defines the scaling factor for analogue output AO1 of the analogue I O extension module See parameter 15 05 10 100096 Scaling factor 100 10000 96 00 EXT AC2 Selects the signal connected to analogue output AO2 of the analogue module ___6 Actual signals and parameters 177 CONTROL DEV See parameter 15 01 12 ACTUAL 1 See parameter 15 01 4 ACTUAL 2 See parameter 15 01 1 COM REF5 See parameter 15 06 PARAM 96 12 Source selected by parameter 96 12 96 07 INVERT EXT 2 Activates the inversion of analogue output AO2 of the analogue I O extension module The analogue signal is at its mi
117. IN STATUS WORD The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in Figure 1 Value RDY ON 1 STATE Description READY TO SWITCH ON NOT READY TO SWITCH ON READY TO OPERATE OFF1 ACTIVE OPERATION ENABLED OPERATION INHIBITED FAULT No fault OFF2 inactive OFF2 ACTIVE OFF3 inactive OFF3 ACTIVE SWITCH ON INHIBITED RDY RUN 1 RDY REF 1 AT_SETPOINT Actual value differs from reference value is outside tolerance limits REMOTE 1 Drive control location REMOTE 1 or EXT2 Drive control location LOCAL ABOVE_LIMIT 1 Bit is read from the address defined by parameter 92 07 MSW B10 PTR EXT CTRL LOC 1 EXT RUN ENABLE 1 Warning Alarm No Warning Alarm 1 1 1 1 1 OPERATING Actual value equals reference value is within tolerance limits i e in speed control the speed error is less than or equal to 10 of the nominal motor speed The default value is signal 03 14 bit 9 ABOVE LIMIT Actual frequency or speed value equals or exceeds the supervision limit par 32 02 Actual frequency or speed value is within supervision limit External Control Location EXT2 selected External Control Location EXT1 selected External Run Enable signal received No External Run Enable received Bit is read from the address defined by parameter 92 08 MSW B13 PTR By default no address has been selected Bit is read from the a
118. L FUNCTION NO S212REFTLIMT ______ Qmm Jrpm Dm Opm e2 SETSREPTFUNCTON po po po S214REFZLIMT ______ 0 SETSACTIFUNCTON po NO poo o N B S216ACTTLIMT o Qe e 0 6 SZI7ACTIZFUNCHON _ NO _ S218 CT2LIMIT _____ o 0 7607 E n e 33 01 VERSION Versio Version Version Version Version SS 02 APPLSW VERSION Version Version Version Version Version 677 33 03 TESTDATE Date Date Date ag board Control board Control board Control board Ses aun n a 34 PROCESS VARIABLE umm 00 ho Oi Re M 0 ro SA03 SELECTP VAR pa a 3404 MOTOR SP FILT TIM 500 ms booms booms ooms 500 ms oj _ 3405 TORGACTFILTTIM i00 ms i00ms 100 100 100 me 705 _ 34 06 5 Mo SAR 4 DOCERE 35 01 1 TEMP SEL NOTINUSE NOTINUSE NOTINUSE NOTINUSE NOTINUSE 726 B5 02 MOTTTEMPALML po M0 mo 85 08 MOT TTEMPFLTL i30 po ho 35 04 2 TEMP SEL NOTIN USE NOTIN USE NOTINUSE NOTINUSE NOTINUSE 72 _ 8505MOT2TEMPALML Mo mo M0 3
119. LATEST WARNING 5S WARN 0 65535 o 03 30 LIMIT WORD INV LIMIT WO 0 65535 o emi 03 31 WORD 6 ALARM W6 0 65535 obo Bem 03 32 EXT IO STATUS EIOST 0 65535 ooo 3 33 FAULT WORD 6 FAULT W6 0 65535 pe 04 ACTUAL SIGNALS 24 01 FAULTED INT INFO on INT pa 65535 04 02 INT SC INFO INT SC 65535 Decimal ie SE eee eee 09 ACTUAL SIGNALS osoan SCALED ______ _5 __ ____ 20000 407 0 200 09 02 SCALED A2SCAL Q0000 20m 02000 09 03 SCALED A3SCAL 7 20000520 1 2000 F 09 04 5 SCALED A5SCAL 20000520 12000 09 05AI6 SCALED 20000520 0 2000 09 0605 MCW DS MCW 0 65535 Decimal 0 65535 sies ee Fw 0907 MRETI 32768 92767 32768 32767 09 08 MASTER REFZ srr j 09 09 AUX DS VAL ______ 5 _______ 32768 32767 3276832767 O9 10AUXDS VAL2 AUXDSV2 _____ 32768 32767 3276832767 091 AUXDSV3 _____ 32768 32767 _____________82768 32767 O9 I2LCUACTSIONALI O93 LCUACTSIGNAL2 LCUACI2 SN 1 Percent of motor max speed nominal torque max process reference depending on the ACS800 macro selected 2 The contents of these data words are detailed in chapter Fieldbus control For the contents of Actual Signal 3 11 see the Master Follower Ap
120. LCU PAR2 SEL Selects the line side converter address from which the actual signal 09 13 LCU ACT SIGNAL2 is read from 0 9999 Line side converter parameter index Default value 110 line side converter 0 9999 parameter 01 10 DC VOLTAGE For more information see GBT Supply Control Program 7 x Firmware manual 3AFE68315735 English 95 10 TEMP INV AMBIENT Defines the ambient temperature for the Enhanced drive temperature monitoring function See Enhanced drive temperature monitoring for ACS800 U2 U4 and 07 frame sizes R7 and R8 on page 65 Note If ambient temperature exceeds 40 C the drive load capacity decreases See the derating instructions in the appropriate hardware manual Actual signals and parameters 175 Index Name Selection FbEq 96 EXTERNAL AO Output signal selection and processing for the analogue extension module optional The parameters are visible only when the module is installed and activated by parameter 98 06 96 01 EXT AO1 Selects the signal connected to analogue output AO1 of the analogue extension module 2 E 96 02 INVERT EXT AO1 Activates the inversion of analogue output AO1 of the analogue I O extension module YES Active The analogue signal is at a minimum level when the drive signal indicated is at its maximum and vice versa Actual signals and parameters 176 96 03 MINIMUM EXT AO1 Defines the minimum value for the analogue output AO1 of the analogue
121. M REF1 AI1 5 in 11 03 COM REF2 AI1 COM REF2 AI5 COM REF2 AI1 COM REF2 AI5 in 11 06 These selections enable the correction of the fieldbus reference as follows Parameter Setting Effect of AI1 AI5 Input Voltage on Fieldbus Reference COM REFx Al1 COM REFx Al5 Fieldbus Reference Correction Coefficient 100 0 5 par 13 03 100 0 5 par 13 03 AI1 AI5 Input Voltage COM REFx AlI1 COM REFx AI5 Fieldbus Reference Correction Coefficient 100 AI1 AI5 Input Voltage Reference handling The control of rotation direction is configured for each control location EXT1 and EXT2 using the parameters in group 10 Fieldbus references are bipolar i e they can be negative or positive The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce the reference REF 1 REF2 Notes With the ABB Drives communication profile 100 reference is defined by parameters 11 05 REF1 and 11 08 REF2 e With the Generic Drive communication profile 100 reference is defined by parameter 99 08 DTC motor control mode REF 1 or 99 07 in scalar control mode REF1 and by parameter 11 08 REF 2 External reference scaling parameters 11 04 and 11 07 are also in effect For information on the scaling of the fieldbus reference see section Fieldbus reference scaling on page 210 for ABB Drives profile or Fieldbus reference scaling o
122. MP EST saved at power switch off when the power is switched on With the first power switch on the motor is at the ambient temperature 30 C The motor temperature increases if it operates in the region above the motor load curve The motor temperature decreases if it operates in the region below the curve This applies only if the motor is overheated The user defined thermal model uses the motor thermal time constant parameter 30 06 and the motor load curve parameters 30 07 30 08 and 30 09 User tuning is typically needed only if the ambient temperature differs from the normal operating temperature specified for the motor WARNING The model does not protect the motor if it does not cool N properly due to dust and dirt Actual signals and parameters 143 THERMISTOR Motor thermal protection is activated through digital input 016 A motor thermistor or a break contact of a thermistor relay must be connected to digital input DI6 The drive reads the DI6 states as follows DI6 Status Thermistor resistance 1 0 15 0 4 kohm or higher Overtemperature WARNING According to IEC 664 the connection of the motor thermistor to the digital input requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the thermistor Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creeping distance of 8 mm 400 500 VAC equipment If the thermistor assembly does not fulfil the requirement the other I O termin
123. O DDCS Communication active Module type RDIO Connection interface Optional I O 5 module adapter AIMA that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link Note Module node number must be set to 4 For directions see the RD O Module User s Manual 3AFE64485733 English 98 06 AI OEXT MODULE Activates the communication to the analogue extension module optional and defines the type and connection interface of the module Module inputs Values 5 and Al6 the drive application program are connected to module inputs 1 and 2 See parameters 98 13 and 98 14 for the signal type definitions Module outputs See parameters 96 01 and 96 06 for selecting the drive signals that are indicated through module outputs 1 and 2 NAIO Communication active Module type NAIO Connection interface Fibre optic DDCS link Note Module node number must be set to 5 For directions see the NTAC 0x NDIO OX NAIO Ox Module Installation and Start up Guide BAFY58919730 English RAIO SLOT 1 Communication active Module type RAIO Connection interface Option slot 1 of the drive RAIO SLOT2 Communication active Module type RAIO Connection interface Option slot 2 of the drive RAIO DDCS Communication active Module type RAIO Connection interface Optional I O module adapter AIMA that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link Note Module node number must be set to 5 For directi
124. ORCED TRIP FF8F Fault tracing Excessive intermediate circuit DC voltage DC overvoltage trip limit is 1 3 where max is maximum value of mains voltage range For 400 V units is 415 For 500 V units Umax is 500 V Actual voltage in intermediate circuit corresponding to mains voltage trip level is 728 VDC for 400 V units and 877 VDC for 500 V units Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient due to missing mains phase blown fuse or rectifier bridge internal fault DC undervoltage trip limit is 0 6 where U4 min is minimum value of mains voltage range For 400 V and 500 V units is 380 V For 690 V units is 525 V Actual voltage in intermediate circuit corresponding to mains voltage trip level is 307 VDC for 400 V and 500 V units and 425 VDC for 690 V units Drive has detected load unbalance typically due to earth fault in motor or motor cable Pulse encoder phase signal is missing Pulse encoder phasing is wrong Phase A is connected to terminal of phase B and vice versa Communication fault between pulse encoder and pulse encoder interface module and between module and drive Fault in external device This information is configured through one of programmable digital inputs Check that overvoltage controller is on parameter 20 05 Check mains for static or transient overvoltage Check brake chopper and resistor if used Check deceleration time
125. OWER REF value calculated with the following equation 100 1000 kVAr divided by converter nominal power in kVAr Example 3 When parameter 24 03 Q POWER REF2 SEL is set to PHI value 3000 of parameter 24 02 POWER REF2 equals approximately to parameter 24 01 Q POWER REF value calculated with the following equation 5 _ Q 5 P Qt p Positive reference 30 denotes capacitive load Negative reference 30 denotes inductive load P signal 01 09 POWER value cos 30 Parameter 24 03 values are converter to degrees by the line side converter application program 3000 30000 30 30 Value 10000 10000 equals to 30 30 since the range is limited to 3000 3000 10000 10000 Reference value See par description 95 07 LCU DC REF Defines the intermediate circuit DC voltage reference for the line side converter This reference is written into line side converter parameter 23 01 DC VOLT REF For more information see GBT Supply Control Program 7 x Firmware manual 3AFE68315735 English 0 100V 1100 V 0 1100V Voltage 95 08 LCU PAR1 SEL Selects the line side converter address from which the actual signal 09 12 ii SIGNAL 1 is read from 0 9999 Line side converter parameter index Default value 106 line side converter 0 9999 parameter 01 06 LINE CURRENT For more information see GBT Supply Control Program 7 x Firmware manual 3AFE68315735 English 95 09
126. POWER 75 00 switch to local control sod Only if the drive is not under local control i e there is L FREQ on the first row of the display CURRENT POWER To enter the Reference Setting function 1 L gt 1242 0 FREQ 45 CURRENT 80 POWER 75 To change the reference i bG 23250 slow change FREQ 45 CURRENT 80 POWER 75 fast change To save the reference 1L gt 1325 0 The value is stored in the permanent memory it is FREQ 45 restored automatically after power switch off CURRENT 80 POWER Control panel Actual signal display mode In the Actual Signal Display Mode the user can show three actual signals on the display at a time select the actual signals to display view the fault history reset the fault history 29 The panel enters the Actual Signal Display Mode when the user presses the ACT key or if he does not press any key within one minute How to select actual signals to the display To enter the Actual Signal Display Mode To select a row a blinking cursor indicates the selected row To enter the actual signal selection function To select an actual signal To change the actual signal group To accept the selection and to return to the Actual Signal Display Mode To cancel the selection and keep the original selection The selected keypad mode is entered 1 L gt 1242 0 rpm I FREQ 45 00 Hz CURRENT 80 00 A POWER 75 00
127. Parameter index or a constant value See parameter 10 04 for information 100 1 the difference The range of the flux is 25 140 With constant value settings 100 C 10000 Typically there is no need to change this value Defines the current reference used with flying start start to a rotating motor 1 1 when no pulse encoder is used If flying start fails i e drive is unable to detect motor speed 01 02 SPEED Monitor signals 01 02 SPEED and 01 04 CURRENT with DriveWindow PC tool and increase the reference in steps of 5 until the flying start function is successfully performed i e drive is able to detect 01 02 SPEED See also parameter 26 08 FLYSTART INIT DLY 0 100 Value in percent Actual signals and parameters 140 26 08 FLYSTART INIT DLY Defines together with the motor characteristics the delay before the speed value estimated at the beginning of flying start is connected to the speed reference ramp output Increase the delay if the motor starts to rotate in the wrong direction or if the motor starts to rotate with the wrong speed reference See also parameter 26 07 FLYSTART CUR REF Activates the flux correction at low frequencies lt 3 Hz when the torque exceeds 30 Effective in the motoring and generating modes ON atv O oo inactive C O NN Control of the brake chopper 27 01 BRAKE CHOPPER Activates the brake chopper control CTL Note If an external
128. RING RING RING RING Additional data actual signals and parameters 260 Index Name Selection ______ __ HAND AUTO PID CTRL FCTRL SEQCTRL PB W 72010VERLOADFUNC NO NO NO NO pa 72 02 LOAD CURRENT 1 00 o bo 500 B0 2 72 03 LOAD CURRENT2 fso o bo 500 00 7204 LOAD CURRENT3 ____ o 00 500 500 72 05 CURRENT4 00 o bo 90 50 1745 7206 LOAD CURRENT5 00 o 00 500 bo 7207 LOAD CURRENT6 ___ o 90 50 7477 7208 OAD CURRENT7 00 bo 00 7209 LOAD CURRENT8 500 o 00 7210LOADpFREQ1 bD p 1 po 721 LODFREQ2 Q0 p bD Q S pa 7212LOADFREQ3 QD 0 42 72134LOADFREQ4 _ bD bD 1 mpa 7 7214LOADFREQ bD M pa 7215LOADFREQ6 Q0 1 pa 72169LOADFREQ7 p 7217LOADFREQ8 bD 1 my 72 18 LOAD CURRENT LIMIT s00 300 ______ bo 800 1428 7219LOAD THERMAL TIME 00 po po 0 Q0 7220L0ADCOOLING TIME bD 0 7 JDAPTPROGCIRL SS02EDITCOMMAND _ NO o SsOSEDITBLOCK Op Q0 Q9 SS04 TIMELEVELSEL 10006 1006 ooms 1612 Ss0sPASSCOD b Q0 84 ADAPTIVEPROGRAM ___ ___ 0 sLosBLOCK NO No MANO AQ
129. S KW IKWHOURS 1 100kWh 1 100kWh kWh RWR 16 BLOCK OUTPUT 0 0 10000 1997 O1 17 DI6 T STATUS per LOO MET AA2 m _____ __ 9 OT20A3 mA _______ _____ __ 0121ROM1STATUS mpm 28 80 mA 01 24 ACTUAL VALUE 1 ACT VAL1 0 10000 JEN o 100 01 26 CONTROL DEVIATION DEV 10000 100 01 27 APPLICATION MACRO According to pcre rors fx FO OT29 EXTAO2 m ____ ____ ma 9 0130PPTTEMP ______ pereoo o C 0T31PP2TEMP P2TEM pereoo o C Bi OT32pP3TEMP ______ TC C EA e 4 TEMP PPATEM i vC 71 10096 DT35MOTORTTEMP ____ hercom C 01 36 2 TEMP M2TEMP ____ C w 0137MOTORTEMPEST wv 0138A5 m sma _____ mA Additional data actual signals and parameters 252 IndexName ________ Range _ osalema Aem ____ ma B9 07 40 017 12 STATUS Bo DTATEXTROSIATUS XIRO
130. S allora us ah C CR DE e e Olea oes cen xis o do C wn ode e d e 56 SEEMING P Em 56 Acceleration and deceleration ramps 57 SEWN Ohne hae 57 CIC DULL LTD 1 be 57 See iE OMEN E 57 Consan Speed snes SIS 57 SOLIUS acides dri rie E an P Pee eee 57 Speed controller 2 54 3 99 0 8 qct oC a SES a a ee qr d 58 DS CIOS Ge ees CN ee STEP 58 DIAGNOSIICS 2eaelc ccehineoet ob ee Ora 58 Speed control performance figures 59 Torque control performance figures 59 COMMON Ge wie Waka 60 SO FINS rtc A e eed ae ee 60 IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive 60 SS MIN Set cree Gee 60 Hexagonalinobord uX a eive 61 eer 61 Programmable protection functions 61 me
131. SATION TORQUE REF2 2 09 SPEED WINDOW SEL ON 0 04 WINDOW WIDTH POS WINDOW WIDTH NEG 8 56 9 5 IA lt PID CONTROLLER D PI T GH DERIVATION TIME TORQUE LIMIT CALCULATION TORQUE 2014 MAX TORQ SEL DC VOLTAGE POWER LIMIT LIMITER CALCULATION 20 04 TORQ MAX LIMI 20 17 20 19 TORQ MAX PTR TORQ d 2020 MIN SCALE 20 06 UNDERVOLTAGE 20 05 TORQ USED REF 213 MAX CURRENT TORQ USER CUR LIMIT 3 04 TREF TORQ roc 2 a gt gt lt L 0 21 AI SCALE MAX LIMIT TIER ANY 1 2012 P GENERATING CUR LIMIT TORQUE TREF TORQ 203 BLI OVERVOLTAGE 2011 P MOTORING 043 MIN TORQ SEL CIMET LIMIT 3 04 7 TORQ MOTOR LIMIT 3 04 TORQ MIN LIMI DC UNDERVOLT 2015 3 04 Ble 20 16 TORQ MIN LIM2 304 2018 TORQ MIN PTR DC OVERVOLT 20 20 MIN AI SCALE 80 21 MAX AI SCALE FLUX USED REF DTC 51 52 53 TORQUE USED REF 2113 CONTROL MEHR unen MEASUREMENTS SLIP GAIN ANS NOM VOLTAGE DUT VOLT NOM CURRENT CURRENT NOM FREQ FREQ NOM POWER POWER TORQUE repared ACS 800 STANDARD APPLICATION PRG Doc no 00170545 dwg ipproved HANDLING DF REFERENCES name SHEET 2 2 Revision A Revision A ABB A55 rusty Control block diagrams 270 Handling of Start Stop Run Enable and Start Interlock V 2
132. ST 10 02 EXT2 STRT STP DIR Defines the connections and the source of the start stop and direction commands for external control location 2 EXT2 NOT SEL See parameter 10 01 Actual signals and parameters 104 Index Name Selection Description See parameter 10 01 DI1 2 DI1P 2P DI1P 2P 3 DI1P 2P 3P See parameter 10 01 See parameter 10 01 See parameter 10 01 See parameter 10 01 See parameter 10 01 DI6 5 KEYPAD COMM CW DI7 DI7 8 DI7P 8P DI7P 8P 9 DI7P 8P 9P PARAM 10 05 DI1 F 012 R 10 03 REF DIRECTION FORWARD REVERSE REQUEST 10 04 EXT 1 STRT PTR 295 255 31 Parameter index a constant value See parameter 10 01 See parameter 10 01 See parameter 10 01 See parameter 10 01 See parameter 10 01 See parameter 10 01 gt NO gt N Bl Oo NO OO WO NM o See parameter 10 01 See parameter 10 01 Source selected by 10 05 See parameter 10 01 Enables the control of rotation direction of the motor or fixes the direction Fixed to forward Fixed to reverse Direction of rotation control allowed Defines the source or constant for value PAR 10 04 of parameter 10 01 255 255 31 C Parameter pointer Inversion group index and bit fields The bit number is 32768 C 32767 effective only for blocks handling boolean inputs Constant value Inversion and constant fields Inversion field must have value C to enable the
133. TRL MODE 0 1003 SPEED REF SCALAR SPEED REF DELAY SET RESET 40 82 SLEEP DELAY 4 SLEEP MODE DELAY StartRq WAKE UP 40 4 DELAY m RDY RUN 3 02 Bi RDY REF 3 08 ACS 800 STANDARD APPLICATIUN PRG Doc no 00170563 dwg HANDLING OF REFERENCE amp STRT STP DIR SHEET 1 2 ABB Industry Control block diagrams 268 Reference control chain sheet 2 All macros continued on the next page RAMP_OUT_ZERO SPEED REFERENCE CHAIN re SPEED REF ACC TIME b DEC TIME MOTOR MODEL SPEED ES 217 ENCODER SPEED CALCULATION 218 ENC MODULE ENC PULSE NR SPEED MEAS MODE ENC ALM FLT ENC DELAY CHANNEL FOR ACCEL DECEL 22 01 ACC DEC SEL ACCEL TIME 1 2 DECEL TIME 1 2 EDH acum EH TORQUE REFERENCE CHAIN LOC REM LOC TORQ CTRL 3 03 810 82425 m FREQUENCY LIMITER sur FREQ MAX LIM 24 01 304 Bil 24 02 TORQ RAMP DOWN 3 04 10 FREQ MIN LIM START Loo ey CONTROL 21 01 21 08 START GROUP FLUX BRAKE 0 WEAKENING Based on Customer Cust Doc No Date FLUX REFERENCE CHAIN FLUX OPTIMIZATION FLUX REF PTR FLUX MIN LIMIT Control block diagrams 269 continued from the previous page ACCELERATION COMPENSATION DROOP RATE 60 06 23 04 COMPEN
134. The measured maximum motor current is scaled to correspond to 20 mA analogue output signal by setting the scaling factor k to 150 The value is defined as follows The reference value of the output signal CURRENT is the motor nominal current i e 7 5 A see parameter 15 01 To make the measured maximum motor current correspond to 20 mA it should be scaled equal to the reference value before it is converted to an analogue output signal Equation kK 5A 7 5A gt k 1 5 150 10 11 12 13 Actual signals and parameters 124 dex WamsSeecion ACTUM Semumarib GOMMREFS The value is read fieldbus reference REFS See chapter Fieldbus control 18 _ PARWIS12 I 1807 Beepwameeris 02 1508 i _ A _ 14 15 16 1 2 0 15 40 SCALE AO2 See parameter 15 05 10 100096 See parameter 15 05 100 10000 15 11 1 PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 15 11 of parameter 15 01 255 255 31 Parameter index or constant value See parameter 10 04 for information 1000 255 255 31 C the difference 1 32768 32767 15 12 2 Defines the source constant for value PAR 15 12 of parameter 15 06 255 255 31 Parameter index or a constant value See parameter 10 04 for information 10
135. Time for the reference to decrease from the nominal motor torque to zero 0 12000 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS Speed bands within which the drive is not allowed to operate See section Critical speeds on page 57 25 01 CRIT SPEED Activates deactivates the critical speeds function SELECT Example A fan has vibrations in the range of 540 to 690 rpm and 1380 to 1560 rpm To make the drive to jump over the vibration speed ranges activate the critical speeds function set the critical speed ranges as in the figure below Motor speed rpm Par 25 02 540 rpm Par 25 03 690 rpm Par 25 04 1380 rpm Par 25 05 1590 rpm Drive speed reference 2 3 4 rpm Note If parameter 99 02 PID CTRL the critical speeds are not in use rr Actual signals and parameters 138 25 02 CRIT SPEED 1 LOW Defines the minimum limit for critical speed range 1 Minimum limit The value cannot be above the maximum parameter 25 03 0 18000 rpm 0 18000 Note If parameter 99 04 SCALAR the unit is Hz 25 03 CRIT SPEED 1 HIGH Defines the maximum limit for critical speed range 1 0 18000 rpm Maximum limit The value cannot be below the minimum parameter 25 02 0 18000 Note If parameter 99 04 SCALAR the unit is Hz 25 04 CRIT SPEED 2 LOW See parameter 25 02 0 18000 rpm See parameter 25 02 18000 25 05 CRIT SPEED 2 HIGH See parameter 25 03 0 18000 rom See parameter 25 03 25
136. UE1 and CONTROL DEVIATION Connection example 24 VDC 4 20 mA two wire sensor X21 RMIO board SA Process actual value measurement 0 4 6 Al2 20 mA Rj 100 ohm X23 RMIO board Auxiliary voltage output non isolated NN 24 VDC 250 mA Note The sensor is supplied through its current output Thus the output signal must be 4 20 mA not 0 20 mA Application macros 90 Default control connections The figure below shows the external control connections for the PID Control macro The markings of the standard I O terminals on the RMIO board are shown 1 Selection between two external X20 control locations EXT1 and EXT2 1 kohm lt R lt 10 kohm 2 In use only when the speed control X21 Reference voltage 10 VDC 2 1 2 1 kohm lt R lt 10 kohm EJ 3 an oe ref A or process ref Off Run Enable off Drive will not Z ___ jane process enl 10 V 8 gt 200 start stops On Run Enable _ A Ji Process actual value measurement 0 4 j 20 mA Ri 100 ohm a By default not in use 0 4 20 mA Rin See parameter 21 09 8 100 1 Motor speed 0 4 20 mA 97 TS aot _ 9 The sensor needs to be powered 170 faor 0 motor nom speed lt 700 ohm See the manufacturer s instructions aC ama m Output current 0 4 20 mA 2 A connecti
137. ULES 9 amp 01ENCODERMODUE 90 98 02 60 MODULELNK No 902 98 03 DVOEXTMODULET 90 9 amp 04 OEXTMODULE2 No 9M 9805D OEXTMODUE3 osovo MODUE Mo i900 9807 COMM PROFILE DRIVES ABB DRIVES DRIVES DRIVES ABB DRIVES 1907 9 amp 09DO EXTTDIFUNC D789 ___ Dres Dreo 1900 95 10DO EXT2 DIFUNC DM0 11 2 2 95 11 D OEXT3DIFUNC Diii2 Dii i2 pon 95 2A O MOTOR TEMP NO i92 98 13 AI O EXT Al1 FUNC UNIPOLAR UNIPOLAR UNIPOLAR UNIPOLAR UNIPOLAR 1913 or 98 14 AI O EXT Al2 FUNC UNIPOLAR UNIPOLAR UNIPOLAR UNIPOLAR UNIPOLAR 914 AO e EC as STARTUPDATA a aa 99 01 LANGUAGE ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH 1926 _ 99 02 MACRO FACTORY HAND AUTO PID CTRL SEQCTRL 1927W SEOSIAPPLICRESTORE NO po ho taw 9 04 CTRL MODE Dre __ Additional data actual signals and parameters 262 Index Name Selection ______ __ HAND AUTO PID TRL FCTRL SEQCTRL PB W Additional data actual signals an
138. Use coast to stop function if applicable Retrofit frequency converter with brake chopper and brake resistor Check mains supply and fuses Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable Check that there is no earth fault in motor or motor cables measure insulation resistances of motor and motor cable If no earth fault can be detected contact your local ABB representative Check pulse encoder and its wiring Check pulse encoder interface module and its wiring Interchange connection of pulse encoder phases A and B Check pulse encoder and its wiring pulse encoder interface module and its wiring and parameter group 50 ENCODER MODULE settings Check external devices for faults Check parameter 30 03 EXTERNAL FAULT Generic Drive Communication Profile trip See appropriate communication module command manual 239 FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO GD DISABLED FF53 ID RUN FAIL FF84 IN CHOKE TEMP FF81 3 17 FW 5 bit 5 INT CONFIG 5410 03 17 FW 5 bit 10 INV DISABLED 03 17 FW 5 bit 7 3200 INV OVERTEMP 4290 3 17 FW 5 bit 13 AGPS power supply of parallel connected inverter module has been switched off during run X 1 12 refers to inverter module number Motor ID Run is not completed successfully Excessive input choke temperature Number of inverter modules is not equal to original number of inverters Optional DC switch has opene
139. VE 54 ay doa eode ae hh _ _ _ gt _ ded 187 ces _______ ___ _ 187 Fedundaant fieldb s cohtfol 33 5 5 cy e Ree EE ES 188 Setting up communication through fieldbus adapter module 189 Setting up communication through the Standard Modbus Link 191 PU qtue 192 Setting up communication through Advant controller 193 Drive contFoFbaralmelelS aum __ _ __ __ ____ 195 The fieldbus control interface 198 The Control Word and the Status Word 199 BIRTH a eee Bs 199 Fieldbus reference selection and correction 199 RD yd See ew ee ee PE Se 200 SS ae a 201 Block diagram Control data input from fieldbus when a type Rxxx fieldbus adapter is used 202 Block diagram Actual value selection for fieldbus when a type Rxxx fieldbus adapter is used 203 Block diagram Control data input from fieldbus when a type Nxxx fieldbus adapter is used 204 Block Diagram Actual value selection for fieldbus when a type Nxxx fieldbus ad
140. Warning during the ID Run Warning after a successfully started completed ID Run 1 L gt 1242 0 rpm 1 L gt 1242 0 rpm 1 L gt 1242 0 rpm ACS800 ACS800 ACS800 WARNING WARNING WARNING MOTOR STARTS ID RUN ID DONE Start up and control through the I O 23 In general it is recommended not to press any control panel keys during the ID run However The Motor ID Run can be stopped at any time by pressing the control panel stop 6 e After the ID Run is started with the start key it is possible to monitor the actual values by first pressing the ACT key and then a double arrow key Start up and control through the I O 24 Start up and control through the Control panel Chapter overview The chapter describes how to use the control panel CDP 312R The same control panel is used with all ACS800 series drives so the instructions given apply to all ACS800 types The display examples shown are based on the Standard Control Program displays produced by other application programs may differ slightly Overview of the panel o00Q DRIVE The LCD type display has 4 lines of 20 characters The language is selected at start up parameter 99 01 The control panel has four operation modes Actual Signal Display Mode ACT key Parameter Mode PAR key Function Mode FUNC key Drive Selection Mode DRIVE key The use of single arrow keys double a
141. a separate reverse command 2 Set if supervision of living zero is used Analogue Extension Module 247 Parameter settings bipolar input in joystick mode The table below lists the parameters that affect the handling of the speed and direction reference received through the extension module bipolar input AI5 of the drive Parameter 98 06 Al O EXT MODULE RAIO SLOT1 98 13 Al O EXT Al1 FUNC BIPO 15 10 03 DIRECTION 11 02 EXT1 EXT2 SELECT 11 03 EXT SELECT 11 04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM 11 05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM 13 16 MINIMUM 13 17 MAXIMUM 13 18 SCALE 13 20 INVERT 30 01 lt FUNCTION m UI The figure below presents the speed reference corresponding to bipolar input of the extension module in joystick mode Operation Range 22222222 maxREF 1 10 03 DIRECTION FORWARD or REQUEST minREF1 4 x D L minREF1 77777777777 gt 10 03 DIRECTION REVERSE REQUEST scaled l maxREF1 77 0 EDITT maxAl5 minAl5 minAl5 maxAl5 Analogue Input Signal minAl5 13 15 MINIMUM AI5 maxAl5 13 17 MAXIMUM AI5 scaled maxREF1 13 18 SCALE 5 x 11 05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM minREF 1 11 04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM 1 Enables the use of both positive and negative speed range 2 Set if supervision of living zero is used Analogue Extension Module 240 Analogue Extension Modu
142. a word See section 03 09 ALARM WORD 2 on page 279 03 11 FOLLOWER MCW A 16 bit data word For the contents see Master Follower Application Guide 3AFE64590430 English 03 13 AUX STATUS WORD A 16 bit data word See section 03 13 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD 3 page 279 03 14 AUX STATUS WORD 4 A 16 bit data word See section 03 14 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD 4 220 0515 FAULT WORD 4 ____ 16 bit data word See section 03 75 FAULT WORD Fon page 220 _ 0516 ALARMWORD 4 ___ 16 bit data word See secon 3 76 ALARM WORD fon page 221 _ 03 17 FAULT WORDS A16 bit data word See secon 3 17 FAULT WORD Son page 221 _ 0518 ALARMWORDS A 16 bit data word See secon 3 18 ALARM WORD Son page 222 _ 0519 INTINITFAULT A 16 bit data word See secon 0319 INT INIT FAULT on page 222 _ 0320 LATESTFAULT Fieldbus code ofthe latest fault See chapter Fault racing forthe codes 0521 2LATESTFAULT Fieldbus code ofthe 2ndlaestfaut _ 0822 SLATESTEAULT FiMbuscoieofhegritesumi O _ 0828 ALATESTEAULT FiMbuscoieofhediiiesmi O O OOOO 0324 SLATESTFAULT FibuscoieofheBhisesmi O OOOO 0825 LATESTWARNING 0826 2LATEST WARNING Fieldbus ofthe 0327 SLATESTWARNING Fieldbus code ofthe Srdlatestwarning OOOO _ 0828 4LATESTWARNING Fieldbus code ofthe 0828 SLATESTWARNING Feidbus code Sriestwamns OO 0320 LIMIT WORD INV A 16 bit data wora See
143. ady for the start up Press the FUNC key Scroll to the desired language by the arrow keys or and press ENTER to accept The drive loads the selected language into use shifts back to the Actual Signal Display and starts to alternate between the Actual Signal Display and the suggestion on starting the guided motor set up Press FUNC to start the guided motor set up The display shows which general command keys to use when stepping through the assistant Press ENTER to step forward Follow the instructions given on the display Start up and control through the I O CDP312 PANEL Vx xx ACS800 ID NUMBER 1 1 gt FREQ CURRENT POWER 0 0 rpm O 0 00 Hz 0 00 A 0 00 1 gt 0 0 rpm INFORMATION Press FUNC to start Language Selection Language Selection 1 1 LANGUAGE ENGLISH ENTER OK ACT EXIT 1 gt 0 0 rpm INFORMATION Press FUNC to start guided Motor Setup Motor Setup 1 10 ENTER Ok Continue ACT Exit FUNC More Info Motor Setup 2 10 MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA AVAILABLE ENTER Yes FUNC Info 17 How to perform the limited start up covers only the basic settings Before you start ensure you have the motor nameplate data at your hand The start up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician The safety instructions must be followed during the start up procedure See the appropriate hardware manual for safety instructions Check the installation S
144. al S wc MERIT ee bors ae 251 we entre ee aha ate ns 204 Control block diagrams Chapter OVENVIEW 263 Reference control chain sheet 1 FACTORY HAND AUTO SEQ CTRL and CTRL macros continued on the next 264 Reference control chain sheet 1 PID CTRL macro continued on the next 266 Reference control chain sheet 2 All macros continued on the next page 268 Handling of Start Stop Run Enable and Start Interlock 270 Handling of Reset and On Off 271 Index Table of contents 13 Introduction to the manual Chapter overview The chapter includes a description of the contents of the manual In addition it contains information about the compatibility safety and intended audience Compatibility The manual is compatible with Standard Control Program version ASXR7350 See parameter 33 01 SOFTWARE VERSION Safety instructions Follow all safety instructions delivered with the drive Reader Read the complete safety instructions before you install commission or use the drive The complete safety instructions are given at the beginning of the Hardware Manual Read the software function specific warnings and notes before changing th
145. als of the drive must be protected against contact or a thermistor relay must be used to isolate the thermistor from the digital input WARNING Digital input DI6 may be selected for another use Change N these settings before selecting THERMISTOR In other words ensure that digital input DI6 is not selected by any other parameter The figure below shows the alternative thermistor connections At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor If this is not possible the shield is to be left unconnected Alternative 1 Thermistor RMIO board X22 oe 7 iir avec Alternative 2 RMIO board X22 _ Af fr avec Note If the motor nominal current is above 800 A the user defined motor thermal model is used instead of the calculated model and the user must define parameters 30 06 30 07 30 08 and 30 09 Actual signals and parameters 144 Index Name Selection Description Defines the thermal time constant for the user defined thermal model see the selection USER MODE of parameter 30 05 30 06 MOTOR THERM TIME Motor Load 100 Temperature 100 63 Motor thermal time constant 256 0 9999 8 s Time constant 256 30 07 MOTOR LOAD Defines the load curve together by parameters 30 08 and 30 09 The load CURVE curve is used in the user defined thermal model see the selection USER MODE of parameter 30 05
146. ameters Check source selection pointer parameter settings Switch control board power off to validate inverter type change 233 WARNING CAUSE WHAT TO DO PPCC LINK Fibre optic link to INT board is faulty Check fibre optic cables or galvanic link With 5210 frame sizes R2 R6 link is galvanic 3 06 FW 2 bit 11 If RMIO is powered from external supply ensure that supply is on See parameter 16 09 CTRL BOARD SUPPLY Check signal 03 19 Contact ABB representative if any of faults in signal 3 19 are active PPCC LINK xx INT board fibre optic connection fault in Check connection from inverter module Main 5210 inverter unit of several parallel connected Circuit Interface Board INT to PPCC inverter modules xx refers to inverter module Branching Unit PBU Inverter module 1 is number connected to PBU INT1 etc Check signal 03 19 Contact ABB representative if any of faults in signal 3 19 are active 3 06 FW 2 bit 11 and 4 01 PP OVERLOAD Excessive IGBT junction to case temperature Increase ramp time 5482 This can caused by excessive load at low Reduce load frequencies e g fast direction change with 3 18 AW 5 bit 5 i i excessive load and inertia REPLACE FAN Running time of inverter cooling fan has Replace fan 4280 exceeded its estimated life time Reset fan run time counter 01 44 3 18 AW 5 bit O SLEEP MODE Sleep function has entered sleeping mode See parameter group 40 PID CONTROL FF8C 3 1
147. and Start Interlock Product and service inquiries Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative quoting the type code and serial number of the unit in question A listing of ABB sales support and service contacts can be found by navigating to www abb com drives and selecting Sales Support and Service network Product training For information on ABB product training navigate to www abb com drives and select Training courses Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals Your comments on our manuals are welcome Go to www abb com drives and select Document Library Manuals feedback form LV AC drives Introduction to the manual 15 Start up and control through the I O Chapter overview The chapter instructs how to do the start up start stop change the direction of rotation and adjust the speed of the motor through the interface e perform an Identification Run for the drive How to start up the drive There are two start up methods between which the user can select Run the Start up Assistant or perform a limited start up The Assistant guides the user through all essential settings to be done In the limited start up the drive gives no guidance The user goes through the very basic settings by following the instructions given in the manual f you want to run the Assistant follow the instructions given in section How to perform the guided start up covers all essential
148. appropriate database element for the AC 80 DRISTD as follows 1 Multiply the hundreds of the value of POSITION by 16 2 Add the tens and ones of the value of POSITION to the result For example if the POSITION terminal of the DRISTD database element has the value of 110 the tenth drive on the Optical ModuleBus ring parameter 70 01 must be set to 16 x 1 10 26 Fieldbus control 195 Drive control parameters After the fieldbus communication has been set up the drive control parameters listed in the table below must be checked and adjusted where necessary The Setting for fieldbus control column gives the value to use when the fieldbus interface is the desired source or destination for that particular signal The Function Information column gives a description of the parameter The fieldbus signal routes and message composition are explained later in section The fieldbus control interface on page 198 Parameter Setting for Function Information fieldbus control CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION 10 01 COMM CW Enables the fieldbus Control Word except 03 01 Main Control Word bit 11 when 1 is selected as the active control location See also par 10 07 10 02 COMM CW Enables the fieldbus Control Word except 03 01 Main Control Word bit 11 when 2 is selected as the active control location FORWARD Enables rotation direction control as defined by parameters 10 01 and REVERSE or 10 02 The direction control is e
149. apter is used 205 COMMUNIGAUNON DEFOlllGS 6 3 4 3 de qiie ood mad de hd Oe o wd wd dL 206 ABB Drives communication profile 206 03 01 MAIN CONTROL WORD 4 uda Pee Aa 207 03 02 MAIN STATUS WORD Roe E ede cu wr Re RR De aes 208 Fieldbus reference 2 _ RS 210 Table of contents Generic Drive communication profile 211 Drive commands supported by the Generic Drive communication profile 212 Fieldbus reference scaling 213 CSA 2 8 3 0 communication profile 214 CONTROL WORD for the CSA 2 8 3 0 communication profile 214 STATUS WORD for the CSA 2 8 3 0 communication profile 214 Diverse status fault alarm and limit words 215 03 05 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD 3 aiat at xe xg e ede CX GORE ra neu 215 03 04 TIME WORD vacuo d edo Ero Tl UR SO 216 EADLTWVOIRD ET 2d doo dei do dio GU p dae ton d a 216 03 00 FEAULT WORD Z 2 4 3656 e eB UR o ob eX s 217 03 07 SYSTEM FAULT WORD ou 65e CES aro un uo ora EC Ee s a e E 218 03 08 ALARM WORD 1 ace xcci e Ce ode E od uS acu ea E Ban eoo eS 218 03 09 ALARM WORD tatur c
150. arameter 95 10 Check converter module cooling air flow and fan operation Cabinet installation Check cabinet air inlet filters Change when necessary See appropriate hardware manual Modules installed in cabinet by user Check that cooling air circulation in cabinet has been prevented with air baffles See module installation instructions Check inside of cabinet and heatsink of converter module for dust pick up Clean when necessary CONFIG Input or output of optional I O extension or Check Fault Function parameters FF8B fieldbus module has been selected as signal Check parameter group 98 OPTION programmable interface in application program but MODULES Fault Function communication to appropriate I O extension 30 22 module has not been set accordingly MACRO CHANGE Macro is restoring or User macro is being Wait until drive has finished task FF69 saved MOD BOARD T Overtemperature in AINT board of inverter Check inverter fan FF88 module Check ambient temperature 09 11 AW 3 bit 14 MOD CHOKE T Overtemperature in choke of liquid cooled Check inverter fan FF89 inverter module Check ambient temperature 09 11 AW 3 bit 13 Check liquid cooling system MOT CUR LIM Drive limits motor current according to current Reduce load or increase ramp time 2300 limit defined by parameter 20 05 MAXIMUM Increase parameter 20 03 MAXIMUM 3 18 AW 5 bit 10 37 CURRENT value programmable Check Fault Function p
151. arameter defines the inching 2 speed The sign is taken into account See chapter Fieldbus control 18000 18000 rpm Setting range 18000 18000 12 15 Zero volts Note The program cannot detect a loss of analogue input signal TUNED VALUE The value measured by the tuning function See the selection TUNE TUNE 13 02 Oo ov Fen vats TUNED VALUE The value measured by the tuning function See the selection TUNE TUNE CONST SPEED 14 MINIMUM MAXIMUM Defines speed 14 An absolute value Does not include the direction information Note If the jogging function is in use the parameter defines the jogging speed The sign is not taken into account See section Jogging on page 79 0 18000 rpm Setting range 0 18000 12 16 CONST SPEED 15 Defines speed 15 or Fault speed The program considers the sign when used as a fault speed by parameter 30 01 and 30 02 18000 18000 rpm Setting range 18000 18000 13 ANALOGUE INPUTS 13 01 The analogue input signal processing See section Programmable analogue inputs on page 49 Defines the minimum value for analogue input Al1 When used as a reference the value corresponds to the reference minimum setting Example If Al1 is selected as the source for external reference REF1 this value corresponds to the value of parameter 11 04 The value measurement triggering Procedure Connect the minimum signal to input Set t
152. arameters Fault Function 30 23 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in stall region due to e g Check motor load and drive ratings 7121 excessive load or insufficient motor power Check Fault Function parameters 3 09 AW 2 bit 9 programmable Fault Function 30 10 MOTOR STARTS Motor Identification Run starts This warning Wait until drive indicates that motor FF34 belongs to ID Run procedure identification is completed Fault tracing 232 WARNING CAUSE WHAT TO DO MOTOR TEMP Motor temperature is too high or appears to be Check motor ratings load and cooling 4310 3 08 AW 1 bit 3 programmable Fault Function 30 04 30 09 MOTOR 1 TEMP 4312 3 16 AW 4 bit 1 MOTOR 2 TEMP 4313 3 16 AW 4 bit 2 MOT POW LIM FF 86 3 18 AW 5 bit 12 programmable Fault Function 30 23 MOT TORQ LIM FF85 3 18 AW 5 bit 11 programmable Fault Function 30 23 PANEL LOSS 5300 3 09 AW 2 bit 13 programmable Fault Function 30 02 POINTER ERROR FFDO gt POWEROFF FF39 Fault tracing too high due to excessive load insufficient motor power inadequate cooling or incorrect start up data Measured motor temperature has exceeded alarm limit set by parameter 35 02 Measured motor temperature has exceeded alarm limit set by parameter 35 05 Drive limits motor power according to limits defined by parameters 20 11 and 20 12 Drive limits motor torque according to calculated motor p
153. are revision of the FW REV decimal fieldbus adapter as defined in the configuration file stored in the memory of the drive The CPI firmware version of the fieldbus adapter refer to par 51 32 must contain the same or a later CPI version to be compatible x major revision number y minor revision number z correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 Fieldbus control 190 Parameter Alternative Setting for Function Information settings fieldbus control 51 29 FILE xyz binary coded Displays the fieldbus adapter module configuration CONFIG decimal file identification stored in the memory of the drive This information is drive application program dependent 51 30 FILE xyz binary coded Displays the fieldbus adapter module configuration CONFIG REV decimal file revision stored in the memory of the drive major revision number y minor revision number z correction number Example 1 revision 0 01 51 31 0 IDLE Displays the status of the adapter module STATUS 1 EXEC INIT 2 TIME OUT 3 CONFIG IDLE Adapter not configured EXEC INIT Adapter initialising ERROR TIME OUT timeout has occurred in the 4 OFF LINE communication between the adapter and the drive 5 ON LINE CONFIG ERROR Adapter configuration error 6 RESET The major or minor revision code of the CPI program revision in the drive is not the revision required by the module refer to par 51 32 or configu
154. ation selection 41 default tasks 41 tasks and parameters 41 otatus word 199 auxiliary 215 CSA 2 8 3 0 communication profile 214 Supervising user selectable variables 67 SYSTEM FAULT WORD 218 System overview 187 T Temperature calculation method 62 measurement using standard I O 70 71 Torque control macro 83 91 performance figures 58 Tuning the speed controller 58 U Underload protection 63 277 User macros 95 defined 83 user defined supervising 67 V Variables 67 Viewing fault history 30 Index 278 Index ED FADD ED ABB Oy AC Drives P O Box 184 00381 HELSINKI FINLAND Telephone 358 10 22 211 358 10 22 22681 www abb com Telefax Internet ABB Inc Automation Technologies Drives amp Motors 16250 West Glendale Drive New Berlin WI 53151 USA Telephone 262 785 3200 800 HELP 365 Fax 262 780 5135 ABB Beijing Drive Systems Co Ltd No 1 Block D A 10 Jiuxiangiao Beilu Chaoyang District Beijing P R China 100015 Telephone 86 10 5821 7788 Fax 86 10 5821 7618 Internet www abb com 3AFE64527592 REV EFFECTIVE 20 02 2009
155. bel for change parameter value is 7 Note Not every parameter has Profibus equivalent value PB Additional data actual signals and parameters 250 01 InterBus S Adapter 100 12288 converted into hexadecimal where xxyy drive parameter number Example The index number for drive parameter 13 09 is 1309 12288 13597 dec 351D hex NMBP 01 ModbusPlus Adapter and NMBA 01 Modbus Adapter 4xxyy where xxyy drive parameter number Additional data actual signals and parameters 251 Actual signals IndexName 1 1 01 ACTUAL SIGNALS 01 55 VARIABLE ERGEVAR VAR 0 parameter 34 02 02 SPEED SPEED 20000 100 rom 20000 100 of motor absolute max mes Hoo 2 05 TORQUE TORQUE 10000 P OOo 499 10000 100 of 01 06 POWER POWER 1000 100 1000 100 of motor 0707 0 805 DCBUSV o WV 01 08 VOLTAGE MANSV 01 09 00 OuTVOLT ge1V OT 10 ACS800 TEMP ACSTEMP 0711 EXTERNALREFT i imm pm f 01 12 EXTERNAL REF 2 EXT REF2 0 0 10000 ER ne 01 13 CTRL LOCATION CTRL LOC 1 cUm SES 3 LOCAL EXT1 __ em _ 01 14 OP HOUR COUNTER HOURS lt 01 15 HOUR
156. ber md _ 3282 0 Drive status 1242 0 ZO H Running Drive control status 4 O Stopped L Local control Direction 4 rotation Dis reference Run disabled R Remote control gt Forward External control lt Reverse Control panel 27 Drive control with the panel The user can control the drive with the panel as follows start stop and change direction of the motor give the motor speed reference or torque reference give a process reference when the process PID control is active reset the fault and warning messages e change between local and external drive control The panel can be used for control of the drive control always when the drive is under local control and the status row is visible on the display How to start stop and change direction To show the status row gt 1242 0 rpm 45 00 CURRENT 80 00 POWER 75 00 To switch to local control 1 G SOA 2 only if the drive is not under local control i e there is no L FREQ on the first row of the display CURRENT POWER 3 To stop lh 5 gt 1242 FREQ CURRENT POWER i i To start 1 L 521242 FREQ CURRENT POWER To change the direction to reverse 1 L lt 1242 FREQ CURRENT POWER To change the direction to forward I G 5412424 FREQ CURRENT POWER Control panel 20 How to set speed reference To show the status row gt 1242 0 rpm FREQ 45 00 CURRENT 80 00
157. by par 72 17 LOAD FREQ 8 72 10 LOAD FREQ 1 Defines the first frequency point of the load curve 0 par 72 11 96 Value in percent of the nominal motor frequency Defines the second frequency point of the load curve Value in percent of the nominal motor frequency Defines the third frequency point of the load curve Value in percent of the nominal motor frequency Defines the fourth frequency point of the load curve Value in percent of the nominal motor frequency Defines the fifth frequency point of the load curve Value in percent of the nominal motor frequency Value in percent of the nominal motor frequency Defines the sixth frequency point of the load curve Defines the seventh frequency point of the load curve Value in percent of the nominal motor frequency 72 17 LOAD FREQ 8 Defines the eight frequency point of the load curve par 72 16 600 Value in percent of the nominal motor frequency Defines the overload current Value is used by the overload integrator 1 20 72 18 LOAD CURRENT LIMIT 100 800 If the continuous motor load capacity i e the defined user load curve is not 10095 at the nominal frequency calculate the overload current using the following equation 1007 72 18 LOAD CURRENT LIMIT luser curve where loverloag 5 the motor overload and luser curve IS the current defined by the user load curve at the nominal frequency User load curve is def
158. cessary Reset and restart after problem is solved and let converter module cool down Fault tracing 240 FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO COMM ERR Communication error on control board Check connections of fibre optic cables on 7000 channel CH1 channel CH1 3 06 FW 2 bit 6 Electromagnetic interference Check all I O modules if present connected to channel CH1 Check for proper earthing of equipment Check for highly emissive components nearby LINE CONV Fault on line side converter Shift panel from motor side converter control FF51 board to line side converter control board See line side converter manual for fault description MOD BOARD T Overtemperature in AINT board of inverter Check inverter fan FF88 module Check ambient temperature MOD CHOKE T Overtemperature in choke of liquid cooled Check inverter fan FF89 inverter module Check ambient temperature Check liquid cooling system MOTOR PHASE One of motor phases is lost due to fault in Check motor and motor cable FF56 motor motor cable thermal relay if used or Check thermal relay if used 3 06 FW 2 bit 15 internal fault Check Fault Function parameters Disable this programmable protection Fault Function 30 16 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in stall region due to e g Check motor load and drive ratings 7121 excessive load or insufficient motor power Check Fault Function parameters 3 06 FW 2 bit 14 programmable Fault F
159. chopper e g NBRA xxx is used parameter must be disabled Active Note Ensure the brake chopper and resistor are installed and the 65535 overvoltage control is switched off parameter 20 05 27 02 BR OVERLOAD Activates the overload protection of the brake resistor The user adjustable FUNC variables are parameters 27 04 and 27 05 WARNING Active If the drive detects an overload it generates a warning FAULT Active If the drive detects an overload it trips on a fault 27 03 BR RESISTANCE Defines the resistance value of the brake resistor The value is used for brake chopper protection 27 04 BR THERM TCONST Defines the thermal time constant of the brake resistor The value is used in the overload protection See parameter 27 02 With type SACE brake resistors the parameter setting must be 200 s With type SAFUR brake resistors the parameter setting must be 555 s 27 05 MAX CONT BR Defines the maximum continuous braking power which will raise the resistor POWER temperature to the maximum allowed value The value is used in the overload protection See parameter 27 02 27 06 CTRL MODE Selects the control mode of the braking chopper AS GENERATOR Chopper operation is allowed when the DC voltage exceeds the braking limit the inverter bridge modulates and the motor generates power to the drive The selection prevents the operation in case the intermediate circuit DC voltage rises due to abnormally high supply v
160. cified the brake manufacturer 42 04 BRAKE CLOSE Defines the brake close delay The delay counter starts when the motor actual DELAY speed has fallen below the set level parameter 42 05 after the drive has received the stop command Simultaneously with the counter start the brake control function de energises the relay output controlling the brake and the brake starts closing During the delay the brake function keeps the motor live preventing the motor speed from falling below zero Delay time Set the delay time to the same value as the mechanical make up time of the brake operating delay when closing specified by the brake manufacturer 42 05 ABS BRAKE CLS Defines the brake close speed See parameter 42 04 SPD 0 1000 Speed an absolute value 0 100000 42 06 BRAKE FAULT FUNC Defines how the drive reacts in case the status of the optional external brake acknowledgement signal does not meet the status presumed by the brake control function SEL release The value is read in percent of the motor nominal torque NO source selected This isthe defauitvatue _ _ a Od A2 8 A8 740 7 _____ The motor torque stored atthe previous brake close command e _ 42 08 START TORQ REF Defines the motor starting torque at brake release if parameter 42 07 has value 40 28 NM gt Actual signals and parameters 161 300 3
161. constant current to motor 1 temperature sensor The current value depends on the setting of parameter 35 01 AOT is 9 1 mA with selection 1xPT100 1 is 1 6 mA with selection 1 3 Measures voltage over motor 1 temperature sensor Motor 2 temperature measurement AO2 Feeds a constant current to motor 2 temperature sensor The current value depends on the setting of parameter 35 04 AC2 is 9 1 mA with selection 1xPT 100 AO2 is 1 6 mA with selection 1 3 PTC Measures voltage over motor 2 temperature sensor Before setting the drive parameters ensure the module hardware settings are appropriate for the motor temperature measurement 1 The module node number is 9 2 The input signal type selections are the following for one Pt 100 sensor measurement set the range to O 2 V for two to three Pt 100 sensors or one to three PTC sensors set the range to 10 V 3 The operation mode selection is unipolar Actual signals and parameters 182 Communication active Module type NAIO Connection interface Fibre optic DDCS link Note Make the module hardware settings as described above For instructions see the NTAC 0x NDIO 0x NAIO 0x Module Installation and Start up Guide 3AFY58919730 English RAIO SLOT1 Communication active Module type RAIO Connection interface Option slot 1 of the drive Note Make the module hardware settings as described above The node number is not
162. control function The Window control together with selection ADD at parameter 60 02 forms a speed supervision function for a torque controlled drive The parameter is visible only when parameter 99 02 is T CTRL External control location 2 EXT2 must be active to enable window control YES Window control is active Selection YES is used only when parameter 60 02 65535 has value ADD Window control supervises the speed error value Speed Reference Actual Speed In the normal operating range window control keeps the speed controller input at zero The speed controller is evoked only if the speed error exceeds the value of parameter 60 04 or the absolute value of the negative speed error exceeds the value of parameter 60 05 When the speed error moves outside the window the exceeding part of the error value is connected to the speed controller The speed controller produces a reference term relative to the input and gain of the speed controller parameter 23 01 which the torque selector adds to the torque reference The result is used as the internal torque reference for the drive Example In a load loss condition the internal torque reference of the drive is decreased to prevent an excessive rise of the motor speed If window control were inactivated the motor speed would rise until a speed limit of the drive were reached 60 04 WINDOW WIDTH Defines the supervision window width above the speed reference See POS pa
163. ction 30 13 30 15 USER L CURVE Integrated motor current has exceeded load Check parameter group 72 USER LOAD 2312 curve defined by parameter group 72 USER CURVE settings 3 17 FW 5 bit 11 LOAD CURVE After motor cooling time specified by parameter 72 20 LOAD COOLING TIME has elapsed fault can be reset USER MACRO No User Macro saved or file is defective Create User Macro FFA1 3 07 SFW bit 1 Fault tracing 244 Fault tracing 245 Analogue Extension Module Chapter overview The chapter describes the use of analogue extension module RAIO as an speed reference interface of ACS800 equipped with Standard Control Program Speed control through the analogue extension module Two variants are described Bipolar Input in Basic Speed Control Bipolar Input in Joystick Mode Only the use of a bipolar input signal range is covered here The use of unipolar input corresponds to that of a standard unipolar input when the settings described below are done and e the communication between the module and the drive is activated by parameter 98 06 Basic checks Ensure the drive is installed and commissioned and the external start and stop signals are connected Ensure the extension module e settings are adjusted See below is installed and reference signal is connected to is connected to the drive Settings of the analogue extension module and the drive Setthe module nod
164. ction through digital input DI1 DI2 and 013 DH Di2 013 Constant speedinuse SS 0 0 0 Noconstant speed 1 0 0 Speed defined by parameter 202 0 1 0 Speed defined by parameter 1205 1 1 0 Speed defined by parameter 1204 N C2 O O 1 Speed defined by parameter 12 05 1 0 1 Speed defined by parameter 12 06 O 1 1 Speed defined by parameter 12 07 Speed defined by parameter 12 08 DI3 4 5 See selection 011 2 3 12 DI4 5 6 See selection DI1 2 3 DI3 4 5 6 Constant speed selection through digital input DI3 4 5 and 6 DH Di2 Di DM Constant speedinuse 0 o 0 0 Nocosntsped 1 0 0 0 Speeddefnedbyparameter 207 1 0 0 Sbeeddefnedbyparameter 203 7 0 0 Speed defined parameter 1207 0 1 0 Speeddefined by parameter 1205 Speed defined by parameter 12 06 Speed defined by parameter 12 06 1 0 Speed defined by parameter 12 07 1 1 1 1 0 defined by parameter 12 08 O 1 Speed defined by parameter 12 09 O 1 Speed defined by parameter 12 10 1 0 1 Speed defined by parameter 12 11 1 1 0 1 Speed defined by parameter 12 12 Speed defined by parameter 12 13 1 O 1 1 Speed defined by parameter 12 14 O 1 1 1 Speed defined by parameter 12 15 1 Speed defined by parameter 12 16 DI7 SPEED1 Speed d
165. d even if the power of the drive is switched off and on However backup of the default parameter settings factory settings of each standard macro is still available See parameter 99 03 Two control devices are connected to the drive device 1 communicates through the interface defined by external control location EXT1 device 2 communicates through the interface defined by external control location EXT2 EXT1 or 2 is active at a time Switching through a digital input PID control For application in which the drive controls a process value E g pressure control by the drive running the pressure boost pump Measured pressure and the pressure reference are connected to the drive See sections Process PID control on page 68 and Sleep function for the process PID control on page 69 Sequential Control macro For applications that are frequently run through a pre defined speed pattern constant speeds and acceleration and deceleration ramps User 1 macro loaded into use Before loading check that the saved parameter 6 settings and the motor model are suitable for the application Actual signals and parameters 184 USER 1 SAVE Save User 1 macro Stores the current parameter settings and the motor model Note There are parameters that are not included in the macros See parameter 99 03 USER 2 LOAD User 2 macro loaded into use Before loading check that the saved parameter settings and the motor model are sui
166. d parameters 135 23 SPEED CTRL Speed controller variables The parameters are not visible if parameter 99 04 SCALAR See section Speed controller tuning on page 58 23 01 GAIN Defines a relative gain for the speed controller Great gain may cause speed oscillation The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant Gain K 1 T Integration time 0 Tp Derivation time 0 Error Value Controller Output Controller e Error value output Ky e 23 02 INTEGRATION TIME Defines an integration time for the speed controller The integration time defines the rate at which the controller output changes when the error value is constant The shorter the integration time the faster the continuous error value is corrected Too short an integration time makes the control unstable The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant Controller Output Gain K 1 T Integration time gt 0 Tp Derivation time 0 t 0 01 999 97 5 Integration time 10 999970 Actual signals and parameters 136 23 03 DERIVATION TIME Defines the derivation time for the speed controller Derivative action boosts the controller output if the error value changes The longer the derivation time the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change If the derivation time is set to zero
167. d parameters 263 Control block diagrams Chapter overview Diagram Related diagrams Reference control chain sheet 1 Continued on Valid when FACTORY HAND AUTO SEQ CTRL or CTRL macro is active see parameter 99 02 Sheet 2 Reference control chain sheet 1 Continued on Valid when PID CTRL macro is active see parameter 99 02 sheet 2 Reference control chain sheet 2 Continued from Valid with all macros see parameter 99 02 sheet 1 Handling of Start Stop Run Enable Start Interlock Valid with all macros See parameter 99 02 Handling of Reset and On Off Valid with all macros See parameter 99 02 Control block diagrams 264 Reference control chain sheet 1 FACTORY HAND AUTO SEQ CTRL and T CTRL macros continued on the next page FACTORY HAND AUTO SEQUENTIAL AND TORQUE MACRO 1102 EXT 1 2 SEL DIG IN LOC REM 4 MAX VALUE EXT 1 2 SEL SCALE 103 FUNCTION E xiii i ne LOC REF1 LOC REF1 INVERT DIG IN T EXT REF1 i LOC REF COM REF1 EXT 1 REF PTR CUONSTANTSPEED SWITCH SELECTION MAX VALUE SVITCH SCALE AIL2 3 FILTER SNUERT CUNST SP15 AI DIG IN 12 02 CONSTANT 216 _SPEEDS Loc REFe Q MAX VALUE APPL BLOCK EE DIG IN 2 PID CONTROL DUT b FILTER REF2 j AL 116 INVERT Ee TORQUE 126 CONTROL AI3 DEVIATION DIGITAL INPUTS 11 0
168. d while unit was running or start command was given Converter module temperature is excessive Check Prevention of Unexpected Start up circuit Replace AGPS board of R8i inverter module Check maximum speed parameter 20 02 It should be at least 80 of motor nominal speed parameter 99 08 Stop drive Let it cool down Check ambient temperature Check that fan rotates in correct direction and air flows freely Check status of inverters See signal 04 01 FAULTED INT INFO Check fibre optic cables between APBU and inverter modules If Reduced Run function is used remove faulted inverter module from main circuit and write number of remaining inverter modules into parameter 95 03 INT CONFIG USER Reset drive Close DC switch Check 5 Fuse Switch Controller unit Check ambient temperature If it exceeds 40 C ensure that load current does not exceed derated load capacity of drive See appropriate hardware manual Check that ambient temperature setting is correct parameter 95 10 Check converter module cooling air flow and fan operation Cabinet installation Check cabinet air inlet filters Change when necessary See appropriate hardware manual Modules installed in cabinet by user Check that cooling air circulation in cabinet has been prevented with air baffles See module installation instructions Check inside of cabinet and heatsink of converter module for dust pick up Clean when ne
169. ddress defined by parameter 92 09 MSW B14 PTR By default no address has been selected 1 Communication error detected by fieldbus adapter module on fibre optic channel CHO Fieldbus adapter CHO communication OK 1 2 3 4 9 T 10 11 12 13 14 15 Fieldbus control 209 c SWITCH ON MAINS OFF Communication gt NOT READY Profile ABCD TO SWITCH ON SW Bit0 0 CW Control Word SW Status Word CW xxxx x1xx x110 Le CW Bit3 0 Input Current RFG Ramp Function Generator f Frequency READY TO SWITCH ON OPERATION INHIBITED SW BitO 1 SW Bit2 0 from any state E CWzxxxx x1xx xxxx x111 Fault READY TO OPERATE SW Bit1 1 Dr SW Bit3 1 from any state CW Bit7 1 CWzxxxx x1xx xxxx 1111 OFF1 Bit0 0 and SW Bit12 1 gt OFF 1 from any state from any state ACTIVE SW Bit1 0 Emergency Stop Emergency OFF OFF2 CW Bit1 0 CW Bit3 1 OFF3 CW Bit2 0 CW Bit1 0 n f 0 and 2 y SW Bit5 0 SW Bit4 0 n f 0 1 0 CW Bit4 0 gt gt OPERATION ENABLED SW Bit2 1 A lt XXXX X1XX XXX CW Bit5 0 CW 1 1 1111 gt D RFG OUTPUT ENABLED B KI it6 XXXX X1XX XX CW Bit6 0 CW 1 11 1111 RFG ACCELERATOR ENABLED CWzxxxx x1xx x111 1111 OPERATING SW Bit8 1 D lt Figure 1 State Machine for the ABB Drives communication profile Fieldbus control
170. dge NO MODULATION 2 RELEASE RFG INPUT RFG INPUT TO ZERO RFG Ramp Function Generator in the speed control loop reference handling BRAKE ACK FAULT State Symbol NN State name X Y Z State outputs operations X71 Open the brake The relay output set to brake on off control energises 1 Forced start The function keeps the internal Start on until the brake is closed in spite of the status of the external Start signal Ramp in zero Forces the used speed reference internal to zero along a ramp State change conditions Symbol mmm Brake control active O gt 1 OR Inverter is modulating 0 Motor magnetised 1 AND Drive running 1 Brake acknowledgement 1 AND Brake open delay passed AND Start 1 Start 0 Start 0 Start 1 Actual motor speed lt Brake close speed AND Start 0 Start 1 Brake acknowledgement 0 AND Brake close delay passed 1 AND Start 0 Only if parameter 42 02 7 OFF 10 Brake acknowledgement 0 AND Brake open delay passed 1 11 Brake acknowledgement 0 12 Brake acknowledgement 0 13 Brake acknowledgement 1 AND Brake close delay passed 1 N OD 5 Program features 78 Settings Additional information 14 01 Relay output for the brake control set to BRAKE CTRL Group 42 BRAKE CONTROL Brake function settings Diagnostics Warnings SSS Master Follower use o
171. e 0 0 Filter time constant E Unfiltered Signal OzI 1 et filter input step O filter output t time T filter time constant 40 05 ERROR VALUE INV Inverts the error at the process PID controller input error process reference process actual value ES b Inversion With sleep function the drive operation is as follows The drive enters the sleep mode when the motor speed is below the sleep level 02 02 40 21 and when the process PID control actual value is smaller than the wake up level 01 34 40 23 The drive wakes up when the process PID actual value is greater than the wake up level 01 34 40 23 See also section S eep function for the process PID control on page 69 40 06 ACTUAL VALUE SEL Selects the process actual value for the process PID controller The sources for the variable ACT1 and ACT2 are further defined by parameters 40 07 and 40 08 mma Seekshesmdlro ACTIadACIA eooo s s NEN AS Filtered Signal Actual signals and parameters 156 5 Analogue input 16 4009 _ ACT1 MINIMUM Defines the minimum value for the variable ACT1 if an analogue input is selected as a source for ACT1 See parameter 40 07 The minimum and maximum 40 10 settings of ACT1 define how the voltage current signal received from the measuring device is converted to a percentage value used by the process PID controller 1000
172. e Connection pointer 85 01 CONSTANT1 35 08 MOT MOD COMP PTR 085 001 00 40 PID CONTROL process PID control 99 02 PID CTRL 32768 32767 speed or torque reference trimming 99 02 is not PID CTRL sleep function for the process PID control 99 02 PID CTRL For more information see section Process PID control on page 68 40 01 PID GAIN Defines the gain of the process PID controller 0 1 100 0 Gain value The table below lists a few examples of the gain settings and the 10 resulting speed changes when a 10 or 50 error value is connected to the controller error process reference process actual value motor maximum speed is 1500 rpm parameter 20 02 Speed Change Speed Change 10 50 40 02 PID INTEG TIME Defines the integration time for the process PID controller Error Controller output controller input error O controller output G gain t time Ti 7 integration time 0 02 320 00 5 Integration time 2 32000 Actual signals and parameters 4003 TIME Defines the derivation time of the process PID controller The derivative component at the controller output is calculated on basis of two consecutive error values and Ex according to the following formula PID DERIV TIME E 4 Ts in which Ts 12 ms sample time E Error Process reference process actual valu
173. e default settings of the function For each function the warnings and notes are given in this manual in the section describing the related user adjustable parameters The reader of the manual is expected to know the standard electrical wiring practices electronic components and electrical schematic symbols Contents The manual consists of the following chapters Start up and control through the instructs in setting up the application program and how to start stop and regulate the speed of the drive Control panel gives instructions for using the panel Program features contains the feature descriptions and the reference lists of the user settings and diagnostic signals Application macros contains a short description of each macro together with a connection diagram Actual signals and parameters describes the actual signals and parameters of the drive Fieldbus control describes the communication through the serial communication links Introduction to the manual 14 Fault tracing lists the warning and fault messages with the possible causes and remedies e Analogue Extension Module describes the communication between the drive and the analogue I O extension optional Additional data actual signals and parameters contains more information on the actual signals and parameters e Control block diagrams contains block diagrams concerning reference control chains and handling of Start Stop Run Enable
174. e 32767 09 09 AUX DS VAL1 Auxiliary data set value 1 received from the master station through the 32768 fieldbus interface 32767 09 10 AUX DS VAL2 Auxiliary data set value 2 received from the master station through the 32768 fieldbus interface 32767 09 11 AUX DS VAL3 Auxiliary data set value 3 received from the master station through the 32768 fieldbus interface 32767 09 12 LCU ACT SIGNAL Line side converter signal selected by parameter 95 08 A 16 bit data word 09 13 LCU ACT SIGNAL2 Line side converter signal selected by parameter 95 09 A 16 bit data MEN word 1 Percent of motor maximum speed nominal torque maximum process reference depending on the ACS800 macro selected 2 The contents of these data words are detailed in chapter Fie dbus control Actual signals and parameters 103 10 01 EXT1 STRT STP DIR Defines the connections and the source of the start stop and direction commands for external control location 1 EXT1 Start and stop through digital input DI1 O stop 1 start Direction is fixed according to parameter 10 3 DIRECTION on NOT SEL No start stop and direction command source DI1 2 DI1P 2P DI1P 2P 3 DI1P 2P 3P WARNING After a fault reset the drive will start if the start signal is 3 Start and stop through digital input DI1 0 stop 1 start Direction through digital input DI2 forward 1 reverse To control direction pa
175. e absolute value of the minimum Speed limit is higher than the maximum limit Actual signal Signal measured or calculated by the drive Can be monitored by the user No user setting possible FbEq Fieldbus equivalent The scaling between the value shown on the panel and the integer used in serial communication Parameter A user adjustable operation instruction of the drive Actual signals and parameters 98 01 ACTUAL SIGNALS Basic signals for monitoring of the drive 01 01 PROCESS VARIABLE Process variable based on settings in parameter group 34 PROCESS VARIABLE Calculated motor speed in rpm Filter time setting by parameter 34 04 01 02 SPEED 100 20000 100 of motor abs max speed 01 03 FREQUENCY Calculated drive output frequency 100 1 Hz 100 1 Hz 01 04 CURRENT Measured motor current 10 1A 01 05 TORQUE Calculated motor torque 100 is the motor nominal torque Filter time 10000 setting by parameter 34 05 100 10000 100 of motor nom torque 01 06 POWER Motor power 100 is the nominal power 1000 100 1000 100 of motor nom power 01 07 DC BUS VOLTAGE V Measured intermediate circuit voltage 01 08 MAINS VOLTAGE Calculated supply voltage 01 09 OUTPUT VOLTAGE Calculated motor voltage 1 1V 01 10 ACS800 TEMP Calculated IGBT temperature 10 1 01 11 EXTERNAL REF 1 External reference REF1 in rpm Hz if value of parameter 99 04 is 1 1 rpm SCALAR 01 12 EXTERNAL REF
176. e action taken by the drive upon the underload condition warning indication fault indication amp stop the drive no reaction Settings Parameters 30 13 to 30 15 Motor Phase Loss The Phase Loss function monitors the status of the motor cable connection The function is useful especially during the motor start the drive detects if any of the motor phases is not connected and refuses to start The Phase Loss function also supervises the motor connection status during normal operation Settings Parameter 30 16 Program features 64 Earth Fault Protection The Earth Fault Protection detects earth faults in the motor or motor cable The protection is based on sum current measurement An earth fault in the mains does not activate the protection In earthed grounded supply the protection activates 200 microseconds floating mains the mains capacitance should be 1 microfarad or more e The capacitive currents due to screened copper motor cables up to 300 metres do not activate the protection Earth fault protection is deactivated when the drive is stopped Note With parallel connected inverter modules the earth fault indication is CUR UNBAL xx See chapter Fault tracing Settings Parameter 30 17 Communication Fault The Communication Fault function supervises the communication between the drive and an external control device e g a fieldbus adapter module Settings Parameters 30
177. e address to 5 not required if installed to the option slot of the drive e Select the signal type for the module input switch Select the operation mode unipolar bipolar of the module input switch Ensure the drive parameter settings correspond to the mode of the module inputs parameter 98 13 and 98 14 e Set the drive parameters see the appropriate section on the following pages Analogue Extension Module 246 Parameter settings bipolar input in basic speed control The table below lists the parameters that affect the handling of the speed reference received through the extension module bipolar input 11 15 of the drive Parameter Parameter feg _ 98 13 A O EXT FUNC BOOIAKMNFUNCTON The figure below presents the speed reference corresponding to bipolar input of the extension module Operation Range scaled 6544254248628 555454 45 54 maxREF 1 10 03 DIRECTION FORWARD REQUEST a gt minREF1 Lit m 4 1 i i minREF1 2 10 03 DIRECTION REVERSE or REQUEST scaled maxREF1 0 maxAl5 minAl5 minAl5 maxAl5 Analogue Input Signal minAl5 13 16 MINIMUM AI5 maxAl5 13 17 MAXIMUM AI5 scaled maxREF1 13 18 SCALE AI5 x 11 05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM minREF 1 11 04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM 1 For the negative speed range the drive must receive
178. e display The panel enters the Function Mode when the user presses the FUNC key 1 The parameter groups 98 99 and the results of the motor identification are not included by default The restriction prevents downloading of unfit motor data In special cases it is however possible to download all For more information please contact your local ABB representative Control panel 35 How to enter an assistant browse and exit The table below shows the operation of the basic keys which lead the user through an assistant The Motor Setup task of the Start up Assistant is used as an example The Start up Assistant is not available in Scalar mode or when the parameter lock is on 99 04 MOTOR CTRL MODE SCALAR or 16 02 PARAMETER LOCK LOCKED or 16 10 ASSIST SEL OFF To enter the Function Mode 1L gt 1242 0 rpm rue Motor Setup Application Macro Speed Control To select a task or function from the list a flashing cursor 1L gt 1242 0 rpm indicates the selection 7 Motor Setup Double arrows To change page to see more assistants Application Macro functions Speed Control EXT 1 To enter the task ENTER Motor Setup 1 10 ENTER Ok Continue Exit FUNC More Info To accept and continue ENTER Motor Setup 2 10 MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA AVAILABLE ENTER Yes FUNC Info To accept and continue ENTER Setup 3 10 NOM VOLTAGE Ok RESET Back a To adjust the requested drive parameter Motor Setup
179. e is ready for a quick restart 0 0 60 0 5 Delay time 22 ACCEL DECEL Acceleration and deceleration times See section Acceleration and deceleration ramps on page 57 22 01 ACC DEC SEL Selects the active acceleration deceleration time pair ACC DEC 1 Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are used See parameters 22 02 and 22 03 Actual signals and parameters Name Selection 0112 See selection 011 14 133 Description FbEq Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are used See parameters 22 04 2 and 22 05 Acceleration deceleration time pair selection through digital input DI1 0 3 Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are in use 1 Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are in use See selection D 1 See selection D 1 4 5 See selection 011 e INI 22 08 09 Acceleration and deceleration times given by parameters 22 08 and 22 09 ACCEL TIME 1 Defines the acceleration time 1 i e the time required for the speed to change from zero to the maximum speed If the speed reference increases faster than the set acceleration rate the motor speed will follow the acceleration rate If the speed reference increases slower than the set acceleration rate the motor speed will follow the reference signal If the acceleration time is set too short the drive will automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to exceed the drive operating
180. e motor flux in such a way that the rotating flux vector follows a circular pattern This is ideal in most applications When operated above the field weakening point FWP typically 50 or 60 Hz it is however not possible to reach 100 of the output voltage The peak load capacity of the drive is lower than with the full voltage If hexagonal flux control is selected the motor flux is controlled along a circular pattern below the field weakening point and along a hexagonal pattern in the field weakening range The applied pattern is changed gradually as the frequency increases from 100 to 120 of the FWP Using the hexagonal flux pattern the maximum output voltage can be reached The peak load capacity is higher than with the circular flux pattern but the continuous load capacity is lower in the frequency range of FWP to 1 6 FWP due to increased losses Settings Parameter 26 05 Programmable protection functions lt Al lt Min function defines the drive operation if an analogue input signal falls below the preset minimum limit Settings Parameter 30 01 Panel Loss Panel Loss function defines the operation of the drive if the control panel selected as control location for the drive stops communicating Settings Parameter 30 02 External Fault External Faults can be supervised by defining one digital input as a source for an external fault indication signal Settings Parameter 30 03 Program features
181. e of parameter 11 03 is Al1 The reference minimum and maximum correspond the Al minimum and maximum settings as follows EXT Range gt Range 2 Note If the reference is given through fieldbus the scaling differs from that of an analogue signal See chapter Fieldbus control for more information Actual signals and parameters 109 11 05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum value for external reference REF1 absolute value 0 18000 Setting range Hz if value of parameter 99 04 is SCALAR 1 18000 See parameter 11 04 11 06 EXT REF2 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF2 REF2 is a speed reference in percent of the Absolute Maximum Speed if parameter 99 02 FACTORY HAND AUTO or SEQ CTRL torque reference in percent of the motor nominal torque if parameter 99 02 TORQUE process reference in percent of the maximum process quantity if parameter 99 02 PID CTRL frequency reference in percent of the Absolute Maximum Frequency if parameter 99 04 SCALAR KEYPAD See parameter 11 03 Al2 Al3 See parameter 11 03 Note If the signal is bipolar 10 VDC use the selection Al1 BIPOLAR The selection ignores the negative signal range SS ae 5 7 Actual signals and parameters 110 i 7
182. e of felabus reference REFA is Wen Sd 8008 AUX DS REFS Selects the adress irto which the value of felabus reference REFS is Wen 90 04 MAIN DS SOURCE Defines the data set from which the drive reads the Control Word Reference REF1 and Reference REF2 1 255 Data set number 1 90 05 AUX DS SOURCE Defines the data set from which the drive reads References REF3 REF4 and 5 Actual signals and parameters 172 Index Name Selection 1 255 92 D SET TR ADDR 92 01 MAIN DS STATUS WORD 302 fixed 9202 MAIN DS ACT1 0 9999 92 08 MAIN DS ACT2 0 9999 9204 AUX DS ACT3 0 9999 9205 AUX DS ACTA 0 9999 Data set number Stores the address from which the Main Status Word is read from Fixed value not visible Parameter index Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 1 is read to the Main Data Set Parameter index Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 2 is read to the Main Data Set Parameter index Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 3 is read to the Auxiliary Data Set Parameter index Parameter index Main and Auxiliary Data Sets which the drive sends to the fieldbus master station The parameters are visible only when a fieldbus communication is activated by parameter 98 02 For more information see chapter Fie dbus control Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 4 is read to the Auxi
183. ection 63 Operation limits 66 Overcurrent fault 64 Overfrequency fault 66 Panel link ID number changing 39 Panel loss 61 Parameter lock 67 275 Parameter settings bipolar input in joystick mode 247 Parameters actual signals 52 53 Advent controller 193 194 Al lt Min gt 61 analogue outputs 50 automatic reset 67 communication fault protection 64 data tables 254 defined 97 digital inputs 51 drive control 195 197 earth fault protection 63 external fault 61 fieldbus adapter 189 190 hexagonal motor flux 61 IR compensation 60 motor phase loss 63 motor stall protection 63 motor temperature 62 motor underload protection 63 operation limits 66 optional analogue inputs and outputs 64 parameter lock 67 reference trimming 47 relay outputs 52 scalar control 60 selecting and changing values 32 speed controller tuning 58 standard modbus link 191 192 start up assistant 41 supervision 67 PB defined 249 Performance figures speed controller 58 torque control 58 PID control block diagrams 68 macro 83 89 macro reference control diagram 266 parameters 69 settings 69 sleep function 69 Power limit 67 Power loss ride through 54 Preprogrammed faults 64 control board temperature 66 DC undervoltage 65 drive temperature 65 Enhanced drive temperature monitoring 65 input phase loss 66 internal fault 66 overfrequency 66 Index 276 short circuit 66 Program features 41 82 Programmable analogue outputs 50 digital
184. ed ZERO SPEED Absolute value of motor actual speed is below zero speed limit 4 of synchronous speed INTERNAL SPEED Internal speed feedback followed FB M F COMM ERR Master Follower link on CH2 communication See the Master Follower Application Guide 3AFY58962180 English Fieldbus control 216 03 04 LIMIT WORD 1 um _ ___ _ enerom 03 05 FAULT WORD 1 Fieldbus control Description For the possible causes and remedies see chapter Fault meme 0 C 220008 SYSTEM_FAULT A fault is indicated by the System Fault Word Actual Signal 3 07 UNDERLOAD For the possible causes and remedies see chapter Fault tracing oy OJIN 217 03 06 FAULT WORD 2 cat NM 0 SUPPLYPHASE For the possible causes and remedies see chapter Fault For the possible causes and remedies see chapter Fault s omma overswenca _ Fieldbus control 218 03 07 SYSTEM FAULT WORD ernie FLT 2 14 Internal time level 4 overflow UNLCCNENNU T I I0 NN rat Rrra Aiea pean seein oer rere mson p mum semen 00000 C Reserved 03 08 ALARM WORD 1 Bit Description START INHIBIT For the possible causes and remedies see chapter Fault
185. ed with parameter 30 18 30 20 ZERO Determines the state in which relay outputs RO1 to RO3 and analogue LAST VALUE outputs AO1 and 2 are left upon loss of the Auxiliary Reference data set 60 05 Defines the time between Auxiliary Reference data set loss detection and the action selected with parameter 30 18 Note This supervision function is disabled if this parameter or parameters 90 01 90 02 and 90 03 are set to 0 FIELDBUS REFERENCE TARGET SELECTION Defines the drive parameter into which the value of fieldbus reference is written Format xxyy where xx parameter group 10 to 89 yy parameter Index E g 3001 parameter 30 01 Fieldbus control 197 Parameter Setting for Function Information fieldbus control 90 02 Defines the drive parameter into which the value of fieldbus reference REF4 is written Format see parameter 90 01 90 03 Defines the drive parameter into which the value of fieldbus reference REF5 is written Format see parameter 90 01 90 04 1 Fieldbus Control or If 98 02 is set to CUSTOMISED this parameter selects the source from 81 Standard Modbus which the drive reads the Main Reference data set comprising the fieldbus Control Control Word fieldbus reference REF1 and fieldbus reference REF2 90 05 3 Fieldbus Control or If 98 02 is set to CUSTOMISED this parameter selects the source from 83 Standard Modbus which the drive reads the Auxiliary Reference data set comprising
186. ee the installation checklist in the appropriate hardware installation manual Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger De couple the driven machine there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation or a Standard ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start up ID Run is essential only in applications which require the ultimate in motor control accuracy Apply mains power The control panel first shows the panel identification data then the Identification Display of the drive then the Actual Signal Display after which the display suggests starting the Language Selection If no key is pressed for a few seconds the display starts to alternate between the Actual Signal Display and the suggestion on starting the Language Selection Press ACT to remove the suggestion on starting the language selection The drive is now ready for the limited start up Select the language The general parameter setting procedure is described below The general parameter setting procedure Press PAR to select the Parameter Mode of the panel Press the double arrow keys or qp to scroll the parameter groups Press the arrow keys 5 or to scroll parameters within a group Activate the setting of a new value by ENTER Change the value by the arrow keys A or fast change by the double arrow keys or Press ENTER to
187. eed for brake chopper and resistor s Check motor parameter settings parameter group 99 START UP DATA Ensure that ID run has been completed successfully Check panel connection see appropriate hardware manual Check control panel connector Replace control panel in mounting platform Check Fault Function parameters Check DriveWindow connection Switch control board power off and on again Reload firmware to control board Replace control board Check that INT board power cable is connected Check that POW board is working correctly Replace INT board Fault tracing 242 FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO POWERF INV xx 3381 3 17 FW 5 bit 9 and 4 01 PPCC LINK 5210 3 06 FW 2 bit 11 PPCC LINK xx 5210 3 06 FW 2 bit 11 and 4 01 PP OVERLOAD 5482 3 17 FW 5 bit 6 RUN ENABLE FF8E 3 06 FW 2 bit 4 SC INV xx y 2340 3 05 FW 1 bit 0 4 01 and 4 02 SHORT CIRC 2340 3 05 FW 1 bit O and 4 02 SLOT OVERLAP FF8A START INHIBI FF7A 3 03 bit 8 SUPPLY PHASE 3130 3 06 FW 2 bit 0 Fault tracing INT board powerfail in inverter unit of several parallel connected inverter modules xx 1 12 refers to inverter module number Fibre optic link to INT board is faulty INT board fibre optic connection fault in inverter unit of several parallel connected inverter modules xx refers to inverter module number Excessive IGBT junction to case temperature This fault protect
188. eference 3 Actual 3 More information on Modbus communication is available from the Modicon website http www modicon com 193 Setting up communication through Advant controller The Advant controller is connected via DDCS link to channel CHO of the RDCO module AC 800M Advant Controller DriveBus connection C1858 DriveBus Communication Interface required See C1858 DriveBus Communication Interface User s Manual SAFE 68237432 English Optical ModuleBus connection TB811 5 MBd or TB810 10 MBd Optical ModuleBus Port Interface required See section Optical ModuleBus connection below For more information see AC 800M Controller Hardware Manual 3BSE027941 English AC 800M C Communication Protocols and Design Manual 3BSE028811 English ABB Industrial Systems Vasteras Sweden AC 80 Advant Controller Optical ModuleBus connection TB811 5 MBd or TB810 10 MBd Optical ModuleBus Port Interface required See section Optical ModuleBus connection below e CI810A Fieldbus Communication Interface Optical ModuleBus connection TB811 5 or TB810 10 MBd Optical ModuleBus Port Interface required The TB811 Optical ModuleBus Port Interface is equipped with 5 MBd optical components and the TB810 is equipped with 10 MBd components All optical components on a fibre optic link must be of the same type since 5 MBd components do not match with 10 MBd components The choice between TB810 and TB811 de
189. efined by parameter 12 02 is activated through digital input 017 1 active inactive DI8 SPEED2 Speed defined by parameter 12 03 is activated through digital input 018 1 active inactive 15 16 Actual signals and parameters 112 DI9 SPEED3 Speed defined by parameter 12 04 is activated through digital input 019 1 active inactive N NO NM 2 NO OO NM DI10 SPEED4 Speed defined by parameter 12 05 is activated through digital input DI10 1 active inactive DI11 SPEED5 Speed defined by parameter 12 06 is activated through digital input DI11 1 active inactive DI12 SPEED6 Speed defined by parameter 12 07 is activated through digital input DI12 1 active O inactive DI7 8 DI9 10 DI11 12 12 02 CONST SPEED 1 0 18000 rpm 12 03 CONST SPEED 2 0 18000 rpm 12 04 CONST SPEED 3 0 18000 rpm 12 05 CONST SPEED 4 0 18000 rpm 12 06 CONST SPEED 5 0 18000 rpm 12 07 CONST SPEED 6 0 18000 rpm 12 08 CONST SPEED 7 0 18000 rpm 12 09 CONST SPEED 8 0 18000 rpm 12 40 CONST SPEED 9 0 18000 rpm 12 11 CONST SPEED 10 See selection 011 2 See selection 011 2 See selection 011 2 Defines speed 1 An absolute value Does not include the direction information Setting range 0 18000 Defines speed 2 An absolute value Does not include the direction information Setting range 0 18000 Defines speed 3 An absolute
190. elected mode is entered Control panel 40 Reading and entering packed boolean values the display Some actual values and parameters are packed boolean i e each individual bit has a defined meaning explained at the corresponding signal or parameter On the control panel packed boolean values are read and entered in hexadecimal format In this example bits 1 3 and 4 of the packed boolean value are ON Boolean 0000 0000 0001 1010 Hex 0 0 1 Control panel 41 Program features Chapter overview The chapter describes program features For each feature there is a list of related user settings actual signals and fault and warning messages Start up Assistant Introduction The assistant guides the user through the start up procedure helping the user to feed the requested data parameter values to the drive The assistant also check that the entered values are valid i e within the allowed range At the first start the drive suggests entering the first task of the assistant Language Select automatically The Start up Assistant is divided into tasks The user may activate the tasks either one after the other as the Start up Assistant suggests or independently The user may also adjust the drive parameters in the conventional way without using the assistant at all See chapter Contro panel on how to start the assistant browse and exit The default order of the tasks Depending on the selection made i
191. er connections to Main 2211 measurement circuit Circuit Interface Board INT CUR UNBAL xx Drive has detected excessive output current Check there are no power factor correction 2330 unbalance in inverter unit of several parallel capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable 3 05 FW 1 bit 4 and connected inverter modules This can be Check that there is no earth fault in motor or 4 01 caused by external fault earth fault motor motor cables programmable motor cabling etc or internal fault damaged Fault Function inverter component xx 1 12 refers to 30 17 inverter module number measure insulation resistances of motor and motor cable If no earth fault can be detected contact your local ABB representative DC HIGH RUSH Drive supply voltage is excessive When Check supply voltage level drive rated voltage FF80 supply voltage is over 124 of unit voltage and allowed voltage range of drive rating 415 500 or 690 V motor speed rushes to trip level 4096 of nominal speed Fault tracing 238 FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO DC OVERVOLT 3210 3 05 FW 1 bit 2 DC UNDERVOLT 3220 3 06 FW 2 bit 2 EARTH FAULT 2330 3 05 FW 1 bit 4 programmable Fault Function 30 17 ENC CABLE 7310 3 33 FW 6 bit 2 programmable Fault Function 50 07 ENCODER A lt gt B 7302 ENCODER ERR 7301 3 06 FW 2 bit 5 EXTERNAL FLT 9000 3 06 FW 2 bit 8 programmable Fault Function 30 03 F
192. erature model is active If the IGBT junction to case temperature continues to rise in spite of the current limitation PP OVERLOAD alarm or fault occurs See chapter Fault tracing INV TRIP CUR Current limit at inverter overcurrent trip limit OVERLOAD CUR Maximum inverter overload current limit See par 20 03 CONT DC CUR Continuous dc current limit CONT OUT CUR Continuous output current limit Ico max 11 15 Reserved active with ACS800 Factory macro default settings 03 31 ALARM WORD 6 Rane eim INV OVERTEMP For the possible causes and remedies see chapter Fault tracing Reserved ENC CABLE For the possible causes and remedies see chapter Fault tracing Fieldbus control 224 03 32 EXT IO STATUS 0 0 EMSTOP MODULE Emergency stop module is not communicating with the ERROR drive software EMSTOP OFF2 CMD DI1 of emergency stop module See 03 01 MAIN CONTROL WORD bit1 OFF2 CONTROL EMSTOP OFF3 CMD DI2 of emergency stop module See 03 01 MAIN CONTROL WORD bit2 OFF3 CONTROL FREE DI3 of emergency stop module EMSTOP OFF3 STATUS RO1 of emergency stop module See 03 02 MAIN STATUS WORD bit5 OFF STA Bit inverted EMSTOP TRIP STATUS RO2 of emergency stop module See 03 02 MAIN STATUS WORD bit3 TRIPPED STEPUP MODULE Step up module is not communicating with the drive ERROR software STEPUP CHOKE FLT DI1 of Step Up module For the possible causes and CMD remedies see chapter
193. es 78 Master Follower use of several drives 78 Settings and diagnostics 78 JOOOW NO 55 ir vat aides Gal gabe ee i EO dark 19 SSMS CT 80 80 vicus e C ECC 80 Table of contents DIAGMOSICS yeti eames eon eee 80 WSC CUNG 81 OVE ete Be ne EE 81 CUMIN des phe Syed aa LIT I0 82 IAC T TOTIS T 82 Application macros Chiapter oVelVIOW BA REO d uide dea a He ea Or ee wl 83 GRIS SET eds 83 Note on external power supply 84 Parameter uuo Sins ae eee ENDO Iq Cee ela be eigen a ees 84 FACON IAC la es Sas Bon hee Roe oe Ha ee ee 85 Default control connections 86 AUlOMaClO tran awd ey a Sick ar oe ee a 87 Default control connectloriS cui auem ORR Oe ORS OSES POS B SERS SD
194. f for a while When the fault has been removed the motor can be restarted Fault history When a fault is detected it is stored in the Fault History The latest faults and warnings are stored together with the time stamp at which the event was detected The fault logger collects 64 of the latest faults When the drive power is switched off 16 of the latest faults are stored See chapter Control panel for more information Fault tracing 220 Warning messages generated by the drive WARNING CAUSE WHAT TO DO ACS800 TEMP Drive IGBT temperature is excessive Fault trip Check ambient conditions 4210 limit is 100 Check air flow and fan operation 3 08 AW 1 bit 4 Check heatsink fins for dust pick up Check motor power against unit power Al lt MIN FUNC Analogue control signal is below minimum Check for proper analogue control signal 8110 allowed value due to incorrect signal level or levels 3 09 AW 2 bit 10 failure in control wiring Check control wiring programmable Check Fault Function parameters Fault Function 30 01 AP message Message generated by an EVENT block in the Consult the documentation or author of the Adaptive Program Adaptive Program BACKUP USED PC stored backup of drive parameters is Wait until download is completed FFA3 downloaded into use BATT FAILURE APBU branching unit memory backup battery With parallel connected inverters enable 5581 error caused by backup battery by set
195. f several drives In a Master Follower application the system is run by several drives the motor shafts of which are coupled to each other The master and follower drives communicate via a fibre optic link The figures below illustrate two basic application types M F Application Overview Solidly coupled motor shafts Flexibly coupled motor shafts Speed controlled Master Speed controlled Master Follower follows the torque reference Follower follows the speed reference of the Master of the Master External control signals Supply Follower fault supervision External control signals 2 Follower fault Follower Link supervision Supply Additional information Master Follower parameters Master Follower Application Guide 3AFE64590430 English explains the functionality in further detail Program features 79 Jogging The jogging function is typically used to control a cyclical movement of a machine section One push button controls the drive through the whole cycle When it is on the drive starts accelerates to a preset speed at a preset rate When it is off the drive decelerates to zero speed at a preset rate The figure and table below describe the operation of the drive They also represent how the drive shifts to normal operation jogging inactive when the drive start command is switched on Jog cmd State of the jogging input Sta
196. ference REF3 See chapter Fieldbus control CONTROL and section Control of a mechanical brake on page 75 ges wont men energises when the status meets the setting NOTUSED RERDY RUNG Ta FAULTIRST 2 NM 4 Actual signals and parameters Index Name Selection REVERSED EXT CTRL REF 2 SEL CONST SPEED DC OVERVOLT DC UNDERVOLT SPEED 1 LIM SPEED 2 LIM CURRENT LIM REF 1 LIM REF 2 LIM TORQUE 1 LIM TORQUE 2 LIM STARTED LOSS OF REF AT SPEED ACT 1 LIM ACT 2 LIM See parameter 14 01 COMM REF3 14 See parameter 14 01 PARAM 14 17 BRAKE CTRL BC SHORT CIR See parameter 14 01 14 03 RELAY OUTPUT Selects the drive status to be indicated through relay output The relay energises when the status meets the setting Description See parameter 14 01 See parameter 14 01 See parameter 14 01 See parameter 14 01 See parameter 14 01 See parameter 14 01 See parameter 14 01 NO NO See parameter 14 01 NO C2 See parameter 14 01 See parameter 14 01 See parameter 14 01 NO O See parameter 14 01 N N O Bl WwW NIJI Cl CO WI NIN gt OJIN gt See parameter 14 01 See parameter 14 01 See parameter 14 01 See parameter 14 01
197. fieldbus Control references REF3 REF4 REF5 ACTUAL SIGNAL SELECTION FOR FIELDBUS 92 01 302 Fixed The Status Word is transmitted to as the first word of the Main Actual Signal data set 92 02 Selects the Actual signal or parameter value to be transmitted as the second word ACT 1 of the Main Actual Signal data set Format X xyy where x x actual signal group or parameter group yy actual signal or parameter index E g 103 actual signal 1 03 FREQUENCY 2202 parameter 22 02 ACCEL TIME 1 Note With the Generic Drive communication profile active par 98 07 GENERIC this parameter is fixed to 102 actual signal 1 02 SPEED in DTC motor control mode or 103 1 03 FREQUENCY in Scalar mode 92 03 Selects the actual signal or parameter value to be transmitted as the third word ACT 2 of the Main Actual Signal data set Format see parameter 92 02 92 04 Selects the actual signal or parameter value to be transmitted as the first word ACT3 of the Auxiliary Actual Signal data set Format see parameter 92 02 92 05 bes Selects the actual signal or parameter value to be transmitted as the second word 4 of the Auxiliary Actual Signal data set Format see parameter 92 02 92 06 s Selects the actual signal or parameter value to be transmitted as the third word ACT5 of the Auxiliary Actual Signal data set Format see parameter 92 02 92 07 255 255 31 255 255 31 Selects the address from wh
198. g steady or slow acceleration deceleration S curve Ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads or other applications where a smooth transition is required when changing the speed Settings Parameter group 22 ACCEL DECEL Critical speeds A Critical Speeds function is available for applications where it is necessary to avoid certain motor speeds or speed bands because of e g mechanical resonance problems Settings Parameter group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS Constant speeds It is possible to predefine 15 constant speeds Constant speeds are selected with digital inputs Constant speed activation overrides the external speed reference This function operates on a 6 ms time level Settings Parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS Program features 58 Speed controller tuning During the motor identification the speed controller is automatically tuned It is however possible to manually adjust the controller gain integration time and derivation time or let the drive perform a separate speed controller Autotune Run In Autotune Run the speed controller is tuned based on the load and inertia of the motor and the machine The figure below shows speed responses at a speed reference step typically 1 to 20 No 0 A Undercompensated B Normally tuned autotuning C Normally tuned manually Better dynamic performance than with B D Overcompensated speed controller The figure below is a simplified block diagram of
199. ge 80 NO C O Ex motor application Used with motors which comply with the ATEX directive SIN Sine filter application See the Sine Filters User s Manual for ACS800 Drives 3AFE68389178 English EX amp SIN EX motor and sine filter applications See the Sine Filters User s Manual for 4 ACS800 Drives 3AFE68389178 English 95 05 INC SW FREQ Activates the minimum switching frequency limitation for Ex motor applications Parameter is visible if parameter 95 04 EX SIN REQUEST is set to EX NO YES Active Minimum switching frequency limit is set to 2 kHz Used with motors 1 with an ATEX certification based on 2 kHz minimum switching frequency Actual signals and parameters 174 9506 LCU Q PW REF Defines the reference value for the line side converter reactive power generation Line side converter can generate reactive power to the supply network This reference is written into line side converter unit parameter 24 02 Q POWER REF2 For more information see GBT Supply Control Program 7 x Firmware manual 3AFE68315735 English Example 1 When parameter 24 03 Q POWER REF2 SEL is set to PERCENT value 10000 of parameter 24 02 Q POWER REF2 equals to value 100 of parameter 24 01 Q POWER REF i e 100 of the converter nominal power given in signal 04 06 CONV NOM POWER Example 2 When parameter 24 03 Q POWER REF2 SEL is set to kVAr value 1000 of parameter 24 02 Q POWER REF2 equals to parameter 24 01 Q P
200. ges calculated for Channel direction 2 Channel A positive and negative edges calculated for Channel not used Channel A positive and negative edges calculated for Channel direction All edges of the signals are calculated 50 03 ENCODER FAULT Defines the operation of the drive if a failure is detected in communication between the pulse encoder and the pulse encoder interface module or between the module and the drive Encoder supervision function activates if either of the following conditions is valid 0 1 2 3 The difference between estimated and measured speed is greater than 20 of the motor nominal speed No pulses are received from the encoder within the defined time see parameter 50 04 and the drive is simultaneously at current or torque limit WARNING The drive generates a warning indication FAULT The drive trips on a fault gives a fault indication and stops the motor 65535 50 04 ENCODER DELAY Defines the time delay for the encoder supervision function See parameter 50 03 0 50000 ms Time delay 0 50000 50 05 ENCODER DDCS Defines the fibre optic channel of the control board from which the drive program reads the signals coming from the pulse encoder interface module The setting is valid only if the module is connected to the drive via the DDCS link i e not to the option slot of the drive CH 1 Signals via channe
201. gital input DI1 0 Value of parameter 20 04 1 Value of parameter 20 17 See selection 011 06 S De 7 8 bse section 8 Dg M Alt Analogue input Al1 See parameter 20 20 on how the signal is converted toa 14 torque limit Actual signals and parameters gt 129 See selection 11 20 15 TOROMINUMi Defines the minimum torquelimit forthe dive Defines the maximum torque limit 2 for the drive 20 18 TORGMINPTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 2018 of parameter2013 _ 255 255 31 Parameter index or a constant value 100 1 255 255 31 C 32768 C 32767 20 19 TORQMAX PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 20 19 of parameter 20 14 255 255 31 Parameter index a constant value See parameter 10 04 for information 100 1 255 255 31 the difference FbEq for the torque value is 100 1 32768 32767 20 20 AI SCALE Defines how an analogue signal mA or V is converted to a torque minimum maximum limit The figure below illustrate the converting when analogue input Al1 has been set the source for a torque limit by parameter 20 13 or 20 14 Torque limit 13 01 Analogue signal 0 0 600 0 value that corresponds to the minimum setting of the analogue input 100 1 20 21 MAX Al SCALE See parameter 20
202. gs compared to direct on line motor connection This 1 100 cur value is a multiplication of parameters 01 46 SAVED KWH and 45 02 ENERGY TARIFF1 See parameter group 45 ENERGY OPT on page 767 01 49 SAVED AMOUNT M Monetary savings in millions compared to direct on line motor 1 1 connection 01 50 SAVED 2 Reduction in emissions in kilograms compared to direct on line 1 100 kg motor connection This value is calculated by multiplying saved energy in megawatt hours by 500 kg MWh See parameter group 45 ENERGY OPT on page 767 01 51 SAVED CO2 KTON Reduction in emissions kilotons compared to direct on line motor 1 1 kton connection PARTUM 02 01 SPEED REF 2 Limited speed reference 100 corresponds to the Absolute Maximum 0 0 20000 Speed of the motor 100 of motor absolute max speed 02 02 SPEED REF Ramped and shaped speed reference 100 corresponds to the 20000 100 Absolute Maximum Speed of the motor 02 09 TORQUE REF 2 Speed controller output 100 corresponds to the motor nominal torque 0 0 10000 100 of motor nominal torque 02 10 TORQUE REF 3 Torque reference 100 corresponds to the motor nominal torque 10000 100 02 13 TORQ USED REF Torque reference after frequency voltage and torque limiters 100 10000 100 corresponds to the motor nominal torque 02 14 FLUX REF Flux reference in percent 10000 100 02 17 SPEED ESTIMAT
203. gue input signal under the allowed minimum level parameter group 98 OPTION MODULES Example The supervision function wakes up if parameter 16 01 is set to DI7 but 98 03 is set to NO Activates deactivates limit alarms INV CUR LIM DC BUS LIM MOT CURLIM MOT TORQ LIM and or MOT POW LIM For more information see chapter Fault tracing Value in decimal As default none of the alarms are active i e parameter value is O bit O INV CUR IND bit 1 DC IND bit2 MOT CUR LIM IND bit 3 MOT IND bit4 MOT POW LIM IND Example When parameter value is set to 3 bit O and 1 values are 1 alarms INV CUR LIM and DC BUS LIM are active Automatic fault reset Automatic resets are possible only for certain fault types and when the automatic reset function is activated for that fault type The automatic reset function is not operational if the drive is in local control L visible on the first row of the panel display See section Automatic resets on page 67 Resetting delay 0 300 Actual signals and parameters 140 YES Active WARNING The drive may restart even after long stop if the 65535 analogue input signal is restored Ensure that the use of this feature will not cause danger 31 08 LINE CONV Activates deactivates the automatic reset for the fault LINE CONV FF51 fault on line side converter 32 SUPERVISION Supervision limits A relay output can be used to indicate
204. h OPE LESE bae 219 03 13 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD 3 219 03 14 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD 4 220 05 To FAULT WORD s Y ACAD EC dC enis 220 03 T6 AEAIRM WORD A o cx arit et ir d s b D aea e ere a e P s 221 DS IT FAULT WORDS 5 eod te ee e coc td oc ro 221 03 IS ALARM WORDS ua md rab eb idee 222 OS T9 INT ANTI FAULT urs za ut ed 222 03 30 EIMIT WORDINY ulia ac Ce c e D Go cR Cer 223 ALARM WORD O d coii t o edo EROR 223 PAP MOS CE 224 095 99 FAULT 1564 aee a eid n ee ee 224 FAULTED INT INGO uide ra pa iw ed Qe E UR De uo CER Re p ER e 225 INT SC INIBOE onde dem e eden d e e rie 226 Fault tracing Chapter oVerVIB W ate ce heh WALES YO ou EO CR ADIRE Qe 227 pla en oh Sad 227 and fault indications a 227 usa ae ure soe 22 ts ck ta TEIL TK Pr 22 Warning messages generated by the drive
205. hange the parameter settings The panel enters the Parameter Mode when the user presses the PAR key How to select a parameter and change the value To enter the Parameter Mode 1L 1242 0 rpm 10 START STOP DIR 01 EXT1 STRT STP DIR To select group 1L 1242 0 rpm 11 REFERENCE SELECT 01 KEYPAD REF SEL REF1 rpm To select a parameter within a group 1L 1242 0 rpm O 11 REFERENCE SELECT 03 EXT REF1 SELECT AI1 To enter the parameter setting function 1L 1242 0 rpm O 11 REFERENCE SELECT 03 EXT REF1 SELECT AI1 To change the parameter value 1L 1242 0 rpm O slow change for numbers and text 11 REFERENCE SELECT 03 EXT SELECT AI2 fast change for numbers only To save the new value 1L 1242 0 rpm O 11 REFERENCE SELECT 03 EXT REF1 SELECT AI2 To cancel the new setting and keep the original value 1 gt 1242 0 rpm press any of the mode selection keys 11 REFERENCE SELECT The selected mode is entered 03 EXT REF1 SELECT ATI Control panel 33 How to adjust a source selection pointer parameter Most parameters define values that are used directly in the drive application program Source selection pointer parameters are exceptions They point to the value of another parameter The parameter setting procedure differs somewhat from that of the other parameters See the table above to 1L gt 1242 0 rpm 84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM 06 INPUT1 000 000 0
206. he PLC with type Rxxx fieldbus adapter modules The Generic Drive profile is supported by type Rxxx fieldbus adapter modules The CSA 2 8 3 0 communication profile can be selected for backward compatibility with Application Program versions 2 8 and 3 0 This eliminates the need for reprogramming the PLC when drives with the above mentioned program versions are replaced ABB Drives communication profile Fieldbus control The ABB Drives communication profile is active when parameter 98 07 is set to ABB DRIVES The Control Word Status Word and reference scaling for the profile are described below The ABB Drives communication profile can be used through both EXT1 and EXT2 The Control Word commands are in effect when par 10 01 or 10 02 whichever control location is active is set to COMM CW 207 03 01 MAIN CONTROL WORD The case boldface text refers to the states shown in Figure 1 Enter STATE Description OFF 1 C Enter READY OPERATE tee along currently active deceleration ramp 22 03 22 05 Enter OFF1 ACTIVE proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks OFF2 OFF3 are active OFF2 CONTROL Continue operation OFF2 inactive Emergency OFF coast to stop Enter OFF2 ACTIVE proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED INHIBIT _ OPERATION Enter OPERATION ENABLED Note The Run Enable signal must be active see parameter 16 01 If par 16 01 is set to COMM CW this bit also activates the Run Enab
207. he parameter to TUNE Note The readable range in tuning is O 10 V Defines the maximum value for analogue input When used as a reference the value corresponds to the reference maximum setting Example If Al1 is selected as the source for external reference REF 1 this value corresponds to the value of parameter 11 05 Triggering of the tuning function Procedure Connect the maximum signal to input Set the parameter to TUNE Note The readable range in tuning is O 10 V Actual signals and parameters 114 13 03 SCALE Scales analogue input 11 Example The effect on speed reference REF1 when REF1 source selection parameter 11 03 Al1 AlI3 REF1 maximum value setting parameter 11 05 1500 rom Actual value 4 V 40 of the full scale value Actual Al3 value 12 mA 60 of the full scale value scaling 100 AI3 scaling 10 Al3 AIS 10 V 1500 rom 20 150 rpm 1500 rpm 60 90 rpm 40 600 rpm 0 100095 Scaling range 0 32767 13 04 FILTER AI1 Defines the filter time constant for analogue input 11 76 Signal 1 1 100 filter input step filter output Filtered Signal T filter time constant om Note The signal is also filtered due to the signal interface hardware 10 ms time constant This cannot be changed by any parameter 0 00 10 00 5 Filter time constant 13
208. he version of the firmware package in the drive VERSION Note Parameter setting cannot be changed by the user Actual signals and parameters 150 Decoding key Product Series ACS800 Product S ACS800 Standard Firmware Version Version 7 33 02 APPL SW VERSION Displays the type and the version of the application program Note Parameter setting cannot be changed by the user Decoding key Product Series T A ACS800 Product S ACS800 Standard Firmware Type A Application Program Firmware Version 7xyx Version 7 33 03 TEST DATE Displays the test date Note Parameter setting cannot be changed by the user Date value in format DDMMYY day month year 33 04 BOARD Shows the control board type Note RMIO 1x boards have different type of FLASH memory chips than RMIO Ox Only software version ASXR7300 later will operate with the RMIO 1x boards user variable and unit 34 PROCESS VARIABLE filtering for the actual signals speed and torque reset of the run time counter 34 01 SCALE Scales the selected drive variable into a desired user defined variable which is stored as an actual signal 01 01 The block diagram below illustrates the use of the parameters that define actual signal 01 01 PARAMETER TABLE 00 00 16 99 99 Select Unit for actual signal 01 01 0 00 100000 00 Scaling factor 0 100000
209. hieve higher break away torque Since voltage cannot be fed to the transformer at 0 Hz special IR compensation is used in step up applications Full IR compensation starts around slip frequency The figure below illustrates the step up IR compensation 26 0318 COMPENSATION 26 04 IR STEP UP Field weakening FREQ point FWP For more information see the Sine Filters User s Manual for ACS800 Drives 3AFE68389178 English 26 05 HEX FIELD WEAKEN Selects whether motor flux is controlled along a circular or a hexagonal pattern in the field weakening area of the frequency range above 50 60 Hz See section Hexagonal motor flux on page 61 The rotating flux vector follows a circular pattern Optimal selection in most applications Minimal losses at constant load Maximal instantaneous torque is not available in the field weakening range of the speed Motor flux follows a circular pattern below the field weakening point typically 65535 50 or 60 Hz and a hexagonal pattern in the field weakening range Optimal selection in the applications that require maximal instantaneous torque in the field weakening range of the speed The losses at constant operation are higher than with the selection NO 26 06 FLUX REF PTR Selects the source for the flux reference or sets the flux reference value 26 07 255 255 31 255 255 31 C 32768 C 32767 FLYSTART CUR REF
210. iagram below illustrates the sleep function enable disable logic The sleep function can be put into use only when the process PID control is active Mot speed 1 0 1 lt 2 INTERNAL Set Reset 40 21 42 refActive 5 PIDCtrlActive 40 20 modulating S R 1 R 03 02 B1 1 lt 1 1 Activate o sleeping StartRq lt 1 0 Deactivate 01 34 sleeping INTERNAL M 40 23 vii 40 20 Mot speed Actual speed of the motor JorefActive The reference EXT REF2 is in use See parameter 11 02 PIDCtrlActive 99 02 is PID CTRL modulating The inverter IGBT control is operating Program features 70 Example The time scheme below visualises the operation of the sleep function Motor Speed ty Sleep delay parameter 40 22 t lt ty ty Par 40 21 ps Sleep level N Text on SLEEP MODE Actual Value STOP No inversion i e par 40 05 is NO Wake plevel Parameter 42 23 Time Wake up delay parameter 40 24 Inverted i e 40 0515 YES Parameter 42 23 Wake up level Time Sleep function for a PID controlled pressure boost pump The water consumption falls at night As a consequence the PID process controller decreases the motor speed However due to natural losses in the pipes and the low efficiency of the centrifugal pump at low speeds the motor does not stop but keeps rotating The sleep funct
211. iate drive hardware manual Fault tracing 237 FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO BR OVERHEAT Brake resistor overload Let resistor cool down 7112 Check parameter settings of resistor overload 3 17 FW 5 bit 3 protection function see parameter group 27 BRAKE CHOPPER Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits Check that drive supply AC voltage is not excessive BR WIRING Wrong connection of brake resistor Check resistor connection 7111 Ensure brake resistor is not damaged 3 17 FW 5 bit 1 CHOKE OTEMP Excessive temperature of drive output filter Let drive cool down 82 Supervision is in use in step up drives Check ambient temperature Check filter fan rotates in correct direction and air flows freely COMM MODULE Cyclical communication between drive and Check status of fieldbus communication See 7510 master is lost chapter Fieldbus control or appropriate 3 06 FW 2 bit 12 fieldbus adapter manual programmable Check parameter settings Fault Function group 51 COMM MODULE DATA for fieldbus 30 18 30 19 adapter or group 52 STANDARD MODBUS for Standard Modbus Link Check Fault Function parameters Check cable connections Check if master can communicate CTRL B TEMP Control board temperature is above 88 C Check ambient conditions 4110 Check air flow 3 06 FW 2 bit 7 Check main and additional cooling fans CURR MEAS Current transformer failure in output current Check current transform
212. ich the 03 02 Main Status Word bit 10 is read C 32768 32767 from 92 08 255 255 31 255 255 31 Selects the address from which the 03 02 Main Status Word bit 13 is read C 32768 C 32767 from 92 09 255 255 31 255 255 31 Selects the address from which the 03 02 Main Status Word bit 14 is read C 32768 C 32767 from Fieldbus control 198 The fieldbus control interface The communication between a fieldbus system and the drive employs data sets One data set abbreviated DS consists of three 16 bit words called data words DW The Standard Control Program supports the use of four data sets two in each direction The two data sets for controlling the drive are referred to as the Main Reference data set and the Auxiliary Reference data set The sources from which the drive reads the Main and Auxiliary Reference data sets are defined by parameters 90 04 and 90 05 respectively The contents of the Main Reference data set are fixed The contents of the Auxiliary Reference data set can be selected using parameters 90 01 90 02 and 90 03 The two data sets containing actual information on the drive are referred to as the Main Actual Signal data set and the Auxiliary Actual Signal data set The contents of both data sets are partly selectable with the parameters at group 92 Data from fieldbus controller to drive Data from drive to fieldbus controller LONNL NNI Cont NEN Index Main Reference da
213. ifference 32768 32767 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS Constant speed selection and values An active constant speed overrides the drive speed reference See section Consiant speeds on page 57 Mx If parameter 99 04 is SCALAR only speeds 1 to 5 and speed 15 are in 12 01 CONST SPEED SEL Activates the constant speeds or selects the activation signal NOT SEL No constant speeds in use DI1 SPEED1 Speed defined by parameter 12 02 is activated through digital input DI1 1 active inactive DI2 SPEED2 Speed defined by parameter 12 03 is activated through digital input 012 1 active inactive DI3 SPEED3 Speed defined by parameter 12 04 is activated through digital input DI3 1 active inactive DI4 SPEED4 Speed defined by parameter 12 05 is activated through digital input DI4 1 active O inactive Actual signals and parameters DIS SPEED5 Speed defined by parameter 12 06 is activated through digital input 015 1 active inactive DI6 SPEED6 Speed defined by parameter 12 07 is activated through digital input DI6 1 active inactive DI1 2 Constant speed selection through digital input 011 and 012 DI1 012 Constant speed in use 0 0 No constant speed 1 0 Speed defined by parameter 12 02 0 1 Speed defined by parameter 12 03 Speed defined by parameter 12 04 DI3 4 See selection 011 2 DI5 6 See selection 011 2 DI1 2 3 Constant speed sele
214. in case the N analogue input signal is lost 30 02 __ PANEL LOSS Selects how the drive reacts to a control panel communication break FAULT Drive trips on a fault and the motor stops as defined by parameter 21 03 1 CONST SP 15 The drive generates a warning and sets the speed to the speed defined by 2 parameter 12 16 WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a N panel communication break LAST SPEED The drive generates a warning and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a AN panel communication break 30 03 EXTERNAL FAULT Selects an interface for an external fault signal See section External Fault on page 61 External fault indication is given through digital input DI1 0 Fault Motor 2 coasts to stop 1 No external fault Be By D Actual signals and parameters 142 30 04 MOTOR THERM PROT FAULT WARNING Selects the thermal protection mode of the motor When overtemperature is detected the drive reacts as defined by parameter 30 04 30 05 MOT THERM P MODE USER MODE Selects how the drive reacts when the motor overtemperature is detected by the function defined by parameter 30 05 See section Mo
215. ined by parameters 72 02 72 17 Example Motor overload capacity is 150 of the nominal current for 10 s 10 min and the continuous load capacity is 80 at the nominal frequency 72 18 LOAD CURRENT LIMIT 4 150 807 1002 162 72 19 LOAD THERMAL TIME 10 5 72 20 LOAD COOLING TIME 590s Value in percent of the nominal motor current 99 06 MOTOR NOM 10 1 CURRENT Actual signals and parameters 160 72 19 LOAD THERMAL Defines the overload time Value is used by the overload integrator 12 6 the example given for par 72 18 LOAD CURRENT LIMIT 0 0 9999 9 5 Time If the value is set to zero the drive output current is limited to the user load curve defined by parameters 72 02 72 17 72 20 LOAD COOLING Defines the cooling time The output of the overload integrator is set to zero if TIME the current stays continuously below the user load curve for the defined cooling time See the example given for par 72 18 LOAD CURRENT LIMIT 0 9999 5 Time 83 ADAPT PROG CTRL Control of the Adaptive Program execution For more information see the Adaptive Program Application Guide 3AFE64527274 English STOP Stop The program cannot be edited Run The program cannot be edited EDIT Stop to edit mode Program can be edited 83 02 EDIT COMMAND Selects the command for the block placed in the location defined by parameter 83 03 The program must be in editing mode see parameter 83 01 NO Home value The
216. inimum level when the indicated drive signal is at its maximum level and vice versa Actual signals and parameters 1 2 4 5 7 10 NO OO 1 3 4 5 1 1 N 65535 123 15 03 MINIMUM AO1 Defines the minimum value of the analogue output signal 1 Ld 4mA 15 04 FILTER AO1 Defines the filtering time constant for analogue output 1 0 00 10 00 5 Filter time constant 0 1000 Unfiltered Signal OzI 1 et filter input step O filter output t time T filter time constant Ns Filtered Signal LV T Note Even if you select s as the minimum value the signal is still filtered with a time constant of 10 ms due to the signal interface hardware This cannot be changed by any parameters 15 05 SCALE AO1 Scales the analogue output AO1 signal 1 10 1000 15 06 ANALOGUE OUTPUT2 See parameter 15 01 NOT USED See parameter 15 01 P SPEED See parameter 15 01 SPEED See parameter 15 01 Scaling factor If the value is 10096 the reference value of the drive signal 100 corresponds to 20 mA 10000 Example The nominal motor current is 7 5 A and the measured maximum current at maximum load 5 A The motor current O to 5 A needs to be read as O to 20 mA analogue signal through AO1 The required settings are 1 AO1 is set to CURRENT by parameter 15 01 2 AO1 minimum is set to mA by parameter 15 03 3
217. inverter module number Output current exceeds trip limit Motor is turning faster than highest allowed speed due to incorrectly set minimum maximum speed insufficient braking torque or changes in load when using torque reference Trip level is 40 Hz over operating range absolute maximum speed limit Direct Torque Control mode active or frequency limit Scalar Control active Operating range limits are set by parameters 20 01 and 20 02 DTC mode active or 20 07 and 20 08 Scalar Control active Switching frequency is too high Control panel or DriveWindow selected as active control location for drive has ceased communicating CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check error INT board powerfail in several inverter units of parallel connected inverter modules Check motor load Check acceleration time Check motor and motor cable including phasing Check encoder cable including phasing Check motor nominal values from group 99 START UP DATA to confirm that motor model is correct Check that there are no power factor correction or surge absorbers in motor cable Check motor load Check acceleration time Check motor and motor cable including phasing Check that there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable Check encoder cable including phasing Check minimum maximum speed settings Check adequacy of motor braking torque Check applicability of torque control Check n
218. ion detects the slow rotation and stops the unnecessary pumping after the sleep delay has passed The drive shifts into sleep mode still monitoring the pressure The pumping restarts when the pressure falls under the allowed minimum level and the wake up delay has passed Settings Additional information 99 02 Process PID control activation 40 20 40 24 Sleep function settings Diagnostics Warning SLEEP MODE on the panel display Program features 71 Motor temperature measurement through the standard I O This section describes the temperature measurement of one motor when the drive control board RMIO is used as the connection interface RMIO board One sensor 10nF The minimum voltage gt 630 VAC D of the capacitor must be 630 VAC Three sensors RMIO board 10 nF gt 630 VAC e WARNING According to IEC 664 the connection of the motor temperature sensor to the RMIO board requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the sensor Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creepage distance of 8 mm 400 500 VAC equipment If the assembly does not fulfil the requirement The RMIO board terminals must be protected against contact and they may not be connected to other equipment Or e The temperature sensor must be isolated from the RMIO board terminals See also section Motor Thermal Protection on page 62 Program featu
219. it power Al MIN FUNC Analogue control signal is below minimum Check for proper analogue control signal 8110 allowed value due to incorrect signal level or levels 3 06 FW 2 bit 10 failure in control wiring Check control wiring programmable Check Fault Function parameters Fault Function 30 01 AP message Message generated by an EVENT block in the Consult the documentation or author of the Adaptive Program Adaptive Program BACKUP ERROR Failure when restoring PC stored backup of Retry FFA2 drive parameters Check connections Check that parameters are compatible with drive BC OVERHEAT Brake chopper overload Let chopper cool down 7114 Check parameter settings of resistor overload 3 17 FW 5 bit 4 protection function see parameter group 27 BRAKE CHOPPER Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits Check that drive supply AC voltage is not excessive BC SHORT CIR Short circuit in brake chopper IGBT s Replace brake chopper 7113 Ensure brake resistor is connected and not 3 17 FW 5 bit 2 damaged BRAKE ACKN Unexpected state of brake acknowledge signal See parameter group 42 BRAKE CONTROL FF 74 Check connection of brake acknowledgement 3 15 FW 4 bit 3 signal BR BROKEN Brake resistor is not connected or it is Check resistor and resistor connection 7110 damaged Check that resistance rating meets 3 17 FW 5 bit 0 Resistance rating of brake resistor is too high specifications See appropr
220. l 1 CH1 The pulse encoder interface module must be connected to CH1 instead of CH2 in applications where 2 is reserved by a Master station e g a Master Follower application See also parameter 70 03 Signals via channel 2 CH2 Can be used in most cases 2 Actual signals and parameters 163 50 07 ENC CABLE CHECK Selects the drive operation when encoder signal is missing Note Monitoring is only for RTAC 03 For more information see RTAC 03 Pulse Encoder Interface Module User s Manual 3AFE68650500 English WARNING Drive generates warning ENC CABLE FAULT Drive trips on fault ENC CABLE 2 51 COMM MODULE The parameters are visible and need to be adjusted only when a fieldbus DATA adapter module optional is installed and activated by parameter 98 02 For details on the parameters refer to the manual of the fieldbus module and chapter Fieldbus control These parameter settings will remain the same even though the macro is changed 52 STANDARD The settings for the Standard Modbus Link See chapter Fie dbus control MODBUS 52 01 STATION NUMBER Defines the address of the device Two units with the same address are not allowed on line 19200 19200 bit s 52 08 PARITY Defines the use of parity and stop bit s The same setting must be used in all on line stations NONESOPBT NONESTOPBIT NopwpbiMosbis A _
221. l signals and parameters 10 15 1 15 1 2 3 1 2 C2 169 UNPROTECT Inactivation of the Adaptive Program protection Inactivate as follows Ensure the Adaptive Program operation mode is START or STOP parameter 83 01 Set the passcode parameter 83 05 Change parameter 83 02 to UNPROTECT Note If the passcode is lost it is possible to reset the protection also by changing the application macro setting parameter 99 02 83 03 EDIT BLOCK Defines the block location number for the command selected by parameter 83 02 83 04 TIMELEVEL SEL Selects the execution cycle time for the Adaptive Program The setting is valid for all blocks 1000 ms 1000 milliseconds 3 83 05 PASSCODE Sets the passcode for the Adaptive Program protection The passcode is needed at activation and inactivation of the protection See parameter 83 02 Passcode The setting restores to after the protection is activated inactivated Note When activating write down the passcode and store it in a safe place 84 ADAPTIVE selections of the function blocks and their input connections PROGRAM diagnostics For more information see the Adaptive Program Application Guide 3AFE64527274 English 84 01 STATUS Shows the value of the Adaptive Program status word The table below shows the alternative bit states and the corresponding values on the panel display Bit Display Meaning 0 8 8 tdi 6
222. le 249 Additional data actual signals and parameters Chapter overview This chapter lists the actual signal and parameter lists with some additional data For the descriptions see chapter Actual signals and parameters Terms and abbreviations Profibus equivalent for drive parameters communicating through the NPBA 12 Profibus Adapter FbEq Fieldbus equivalent The scaling between the value shown on the panel and the integer used in serial communication Absolute Maximum Frequency Value of 20 08 or 20 07 if the absolute value of the minimum limit is greater than the maximum limit Absolute Maximum Speed Value of parameter 20 02 or 20 01 if the absolute value of the minimum limit is higher than the maximum limit Write access is not allowed when the motor is running Fieldbus addresses Rxxx adapter modules such as RPBA 01 RDNA 01 etc See the appropriate fieldbus adapter module User s Manual Nxxx adapter modules such as NPBA 12 NDNA 02 etc NPBA 12 Profibus Adapter All versions e see column PB in the tables below Version 1 5 or later see 12 PROFIBUS Adapter Installation and Start Up Guide 3BFE64341588 English Reading or writing a drive parameter can be done also by converting the parameter group PNU and the parameter index subindex into hexadecimal Example drive parameter 12 07 12 OC hex 07 O7 hex gt 0 07 Request label for request parameter value is 6 Request la
223. le signal O operation Enter OPERATION INHIBITED RAMP OUT _ Normal operation ZERO Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR OUTPUT ENABLED Ramp Function Generator output to zero ramps to stop current and DC voltage limits in force RAMP_HOLD Enable ramp function Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATOR ENABLED 2 OFF3 CONTROL UE Continue operation OFF3 inactive Emergency stop stop within time defined by par 22 07 Enter OFF3 ACTIVE proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED Warning Ensure motor and driven machine can be stopped using this stop mode Halt ramping Ramp Function Generator output held RAMP BER 1 Normal operation Enter OPERATING EOM 0 Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero mE RESET NN reset if an active fault exists Enter SWITCH ON INHIBITED 0 Continue normal operation INCHING 1 Not in use Not in use INCHING 2 Not in use 120 Noti in use REMOTE CMD EBEN control enabled Word lt gt 0 or Reference lt gt 0 Retain last Control Word and Reference Control Word 0 and Reference 0 Fieldbus control enabled Reference and deceleration acceleration ramp are locked EXT CTRL LOC 1 Select External Control Location EXT2 Effective if par 11 02 is set to COMM CW Select External Control Location EXT1 Effective if par 11 02 is set to COMM CW A Fieldbus control 08 03 02 MA
224. liary Data Set 92 06 AUX DS ACT5 Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 5 is read to the Auxiliary Data Set 92 07 MSW B10 PTR Selects the address from which the 03 02 Main Status Word bit 10 is read from EN 255 255 31 255 255 31 C 32768 32767 Parameter index or a constant value Parameter pointer Inversion group index and bit fields The bit number is effective only for blocks handling boolean inputs Constant value Inversion and constant fields Inversion field must have value C to enable the constant setting 9208 MSWB13PTR Selects the address from which the 03 02 Main Status Word bit 13 is read from 255 255 31 255 255 31 C 32768 32767 Parameter index or a constant value Parameter pointer Inversion group index and bit fields The bit number is effective only for blocks handling boolean inputs Constant value Inversion and constant fields Inversion field must have value C to enable the constant setting 9209 MSW B14 PTR Selects the address from which the 03 02 Main Status Word bit 14 is read from 255 255 31 255 255 31 C 32768 C 32767 Parameter index or a constant value Parameter pointer Inversion group index and bit fields The bit number is effective only for blocks handling boolean inputs Constant value Inversion and constant fields Inversion field must have value C to enable the constant setting
225. ller Updated only when 0 0 10000 parameter 99 02 PID CTRL 100 01 26 CONTROL DEVIATION Deviation of the process PID controller i e the difference between the 10000 reference value and the actual value Updated only when parameter 100 10000 99 02 PID CTRL 100 01 31 PP 2 TEMP Measured heatsink temperature in inverter 2 used only in high power 1 1 C units with parallel inverters 01 32 PP 3 TEMP Measured heatsink temperature in inverter used only in high power 1 1 C units with parallel inverters 01 33 PP 4 TEMP Measured heatsink temperature in inverter no 4 used only in high power 1 1 C units with parallel inverters 01 34 ACTUAL VALUE Process PID controller actual value See parameter 40 06 0 0 10000 100 01 35 1 Measured temperature of motor 1 See parameter 35 01 1 1 C ohm 01 36 MOTOR 2 TEMP Measured temperature of motor 2 See parameter 35 04 1 1 C ohm 01 37 MOTOR TEMP EST Estimated motor temperature Estimated motor temperature Signal value is saved at power switch off value is saved at power switch Estimated motor temperature Signal value is saved at power switch off 1 12fUC 12fUC 01 38 AI5 mA Value of analogue input 5 read from of the analogue I O extension 1 0 001 mA module optional A voltage signal is also displayed in mA instead of V 01 39 Al6 mA Value of analogue input AI6 read from AI2 of
226. lowed range approx 1 6 2 1 of ACS800 parameter 99 04 DTC 1 0 1A Allowed range approx 0 2 long of ACS800 parameter 99 04 SCALAR 99 07 MOTOR NOM FREQ Defines the nominal motor frequency 8 300 Hz Nominal frequency 50 or 60 Hz typically 800 30000 99 08 MOTOR NOM SPEED Defines the nominal motor speed Must be equal to the value on the motor rating plate The motor synchronous speed or another approximate value must not be given instead Note If the value of parameter 99 08 is changed the speed limits in parameter group 20 LIMITS change automatically as well 1 18000 rpm Nominal motor speed 1 18000 99 09 MOTOR Defines the nominal motor power Set exactly as the motor rating plate If POWER several motors are connected to the inverter enter the total power of the motors 0 9000 kW Nominal motor power 0 90000 99 40 MOTOR ID RUN Selects the type of the motor identification During the identification the drive MODE will identify the characteristics of the motor for optimum motor control The ID Run Procedure is described in chapter S art up and control through the Note The ID Run STANDARD or REDUCED should be selected if The operation point is near zero speed and or Operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque within a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback is required Note The ID Run STANDARD or REDUC
227. m 22 ACCEL DECEL 03 DECELER TIME 1 The drive is now ready for use How to control the drive through the I O interface 21 The table below instructs how to operate the drive through the digital and analogue inputs when the motor start up is performed and the default factory parameter settings are valid Ensure the Factory macro is active If you need to change the direction of rotation change the setting of parameter 10 03 to REQUEST Ensure the control connections are wired according to the connection diagram given for the Factory macro Ensure the drive is in external control mode Press the LOC REM key to change between external and local control Start by switching digital input DI1 on Regulate the speed by adjusting the voltage of analogue input Forward direction Switch digital input DI2 off Reverse direction Switch digital input DI2 on Switch off digital input DI1 See parameter 99 02 See chapter Application macros In External control there is no L visible on the first row of the panel display 1 gt 0 0 FREQ 0 CURRENT 0 POWER 0 1 gt 500 0 FREQ 16 CURRENT 1 2 POWER 8 1 gt 500 0 FREQ 16 CURRENT 12 POWER 8 1 lt 500 0 FREQ 16 CURRENT 12 POWER 8 1 gt 500 0 FREQ 0 CURRENT 0 POWER 0 1 00 Hz 00 A 00 5 rpm 1 66 Hz A 33 5 rpm 1 66 Hz A 33 5 rpm 1 66 Hz A 33 rpm 00 Hz
228. modes 21 01 21 02 21 03 Selecting the use of Run Enable signal 16 01 21 07 Setting the ramp time for the Run Enable function 22 07 Setting the torque and current limits 20 03 20 04 Output Signals Selecting the signals indicated through the relay outputs RO1 Group 14 RO2 and optional RO s if installed 15 01 15 02 15 03 15 04 15 05 Group 96 Selecting the signals indicated through the analogue output AO1 AO2 and optional AO s if installed Setting the minimum maximum scaling and inversion Program features 43 Contents of the assistant displays There are two types of displays in the Start up Assistant The main displays and the information displays The main displays prompt the user to feed in information or answer a question The assistant steps through the main displays The information displays contain help texts for the main displays The figure below shows a typical example of both and explanations of the contents Main Display Information Display Motor Setup 3 10 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE 0 V INFO P99 05 Set as given on the motor nameplate ENTER Ok RESET Back Name of the assistant step number total number of steps Request question Feed in field Commands accept value and step forward or cancel and step backwards Local control vs external control Text INFO index of parameter to be set Help text help text continued double arrow symbol indicates tha
229. n active Module type RTAC 03 Connection interface Optional I O module adapter AIMA that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link Note Module node number must be set to 16 For directions see the RTAC 03 Pulse Encoder Interface User s Manual 3AFE68650500 English 98 02 COMM MODULE Activates the external serial communication and selects the interface See LINK chapter Fieldbus control FIELDBUS The drive communicates through an Rxxx type fieldbus adapter connected to slot 1 or through an Nxxx type fieldbus adapter connected to RMIO board channel CHO See also parameter group 51 COMM MODULE DATA ADVANT The drive communicates with an ABB Advant OCS system via CHO on the RDCO board optional See also parameter group 70 DDCS CONTROL STD MODBUS The drive communicates with a Modbus controller via the Modbus Adapter Module RMBA in option slot 1 of the drive See also parameter 52 STANDARD MODBUS CUSTOMISED The drive communicates via a customer specified link The control sources are defined by parameters 90 04 and 90 05 Activates the communication to the digital extension module 1 optional and defines the type and connection interface of the module 98 08 EXT MODULE 1 Module inputs See parameter 98 09 for the use of the inputs in the drive application program Module outputs See parameters 14 10 and 14 11 for selecting the drive states that are indicated through the relay outpu
230. n number of a drive connected to the panel link View the status of the drives connected on the panel link The panel enters the Drive Selection Mode when the user presses the DRIVE key Each on line station must have an individual identification number ID By default the ID number of the drive is 1 Note The default ID number setting of the drive should not be changed unless the drive is to be connected to the panel link with other drives on line How to select a drive and change its panel link ID number To enter the Drive Selection Mode ACS800 5000 XXXXXX ID NUMBER 1 To select the next drive view ACS800 The ID number of the station is changed by first pressing ENTER the brackets round the ID number appear and ASAAA5000 xxxxxx then adjusting the value with arrow buttons The new value is accepted with ENTER The power of the drive must be M ME switched off to validate its new ID number setting The status display of all devices connected to the Panel Link is shown after the last individual station If all stations do not fit on the display at once press the double arrow up to view the rest of hon ie Drive stopped direction forward 17 Drive running direction reverse F Drive tripped on a fault To connect to the last displayed drive and to enter another 1L 1242 0 rpm I mode press one of the mode selection keys FREQ 45 00 Hz CURRENT 80 00 A POWER 75 00 The s
231. n page 213 for Generic Drive profile Fieldbus control 201 Direction determined by the sign of Direction determined by digital command COM REF e g digital input control panel par 10 03 Resultant Resultant DIRECTION REF1 2 REF1 2 FORWARD Max Ref Max Ref Fieldbus Fieldbus Ref 1 2 Ref 1 2 Max Ref Max Ref Par 10 03 Resultant Resultant DIRECTION REF1 2 REF1 2 REVERSE Max Ref Max Ref 163 Fieldbus Fieldbus Ref 1 2 1 2 Max Ref Max Ref par 10 03 Resultant Resultant DIRECTION REF1 2 REF1 2 Direction Command REQUEST FORWARD Max Ref 163 Fieldbus Fieldbus Ref 1 2 Ref 1 2 Max Ref Max Ref Direction Command REVERSE Direction is determined by the sign of COM REF when par 10 01 10 02 EXTx STRT STP DIR is set to COMM CW OR par 11 03 11 06 EXT REFx SELECT is set to FAST COMM Actual Values Actual Values ACT are 16 bit words containing information on selected operations of the drive The functions to be monitored are selected with the parameters in group 92 The scaling of the integers sent to the master as Actual Values depends on the selected function please refer to chapter Actual signals and parameters Fieldbus control 202 UONCWJOJU s Jesn Jejdepe snqpjeu euj ees py p0 66 uo spu d q
232. n the Application task parameter 99 02 the Start up Assistant decide which consequent tasks it suggests The default tasks are shown in the table below Application Default Tasks Selection FACTORY SEQ Language Select Motor Set up Application Option Modules Speed Control EXT1 Start Stop CTRL Control Protections Output Signals HAND AUTO Language Select Motor Set up Application Option Modules Speed Control EXT2 Start Stop Control Speed Control 1 Protections Output Signals T CTRL Language Select Motor Set up Application Option Modules Torque Control Start Stop Control Speed Control EXT1 Protections Output Signals PID CTRL Language Select Motor Set up Application Option Modules PID Control Start Stop Control Speed Control EXT1 Protections Output Signals Program features 42 List of tasks and the relevant drive parameters Language Select Selecting the language 99 01 99 05 99 06 99 09 99 07 99 08 Motor Set up Setting the motor data 99 04 Performing the motor identification If the speed limits are not in 99 10 20 8 20 07 the allowed range Setting the limits Application Selecting the application macro 99 02 parameters associated to the macro Option Modules Activating the option modules Group 98 35 52 Speed Control Selecting the source for the speed reference 11 03 is used Setting analogue input 11 limits scale 13 01 13 02 13 03 13 04 inversion 13
233. nal information 95 10 TEMP INV AMBIENT Ambient temperature Diagnostics Warning Fault Additional information INV OVERTEMP Excessive converter module temperature Short circuit There are separate protection circuits for supervising the motor cable and the inverter short circuits If a short circuit occurs the drive will not start and a fault indication 15 given Input phase loss Input phase loss protection circuits supervise the mains cable connection status by detecting intermediate circuit ripple If a phase is lost the ripple increases The drive is stopped and a fault indication is given if the ripple exceeds 13 Control board temperature The drive supervises the control board temperature A fault indication CTRL B TEMP is given if the temperature exceeds 88 C Overfrequency If the drive output frequency exceeds the preset level the drive is stopped and fault indication is given The preset level is 50 Hz over the operating range absolute maximum speed limit Direct Torque Control mode active or frequency limit Scalar Control active Internal fault If the drive detects an internal fault the drive is stopped and a fault indication is given Operation limits ACS800 has adjustable limits for speed current maximum torque maximum and DC voltage Settings Parameter group 20 LIMITS Program features 67 Power limit Power limitation is used to protect the input bridge and the DC intermediate circ
234. nd parameters 120 Index Name Selection 20 11 P MOTORING LIM 0 600 20 12 P GENERATING 600 0 20 13 MIN TORQ SEL MIN LIM1 Description Defines the allowed maximum power fed by the inverter to the motor Power limit in percent of the motor nominal power 0 60000 Defines the allowed maximum power fed by the motor to the inverter Power limit in percent of the motor nominal power 0 Selects the minimum torque limit for the drive The update interval is 100 ms Value of parameter 20 15 z Digital input DI1 0 Value of parameter 20 15 1 Value of parameter 20 16 DI2 See selection 011 3 See selection 011 See selection 011 J g g 5 See selection 011 See selection 011 017 See selection 011 See selection 011 See selection 011 DI10 DI11 0112 Al Analogue input Al1 See parameter 20 20 on how the signal is converted to a torque limit Al2 See selection Al3 See selection Ald See selection 16 See selection PARAM 20 18 Limit given by 20 18 NEG MAX TORQ Inverted maximum torque limit defined by parameter 20 14 20 14 MAX TORQ SEL MAX LIM1 See selection 011 NO See selection 011 See selection DI1 14 NO NO gt 5 N or Bi OINI Q2 o a Defines the maximum torque limit for the drive The update interval is 100 ms Value of parameter 20 04 z Di
235. ng by the stall protection function See parameter 30 10 STALL FLT MOT TEMP WRN Fault trip by the stall protection function See parameter 30 10 Warning trip of the motor temperature supervision function See parameter MOT TEMP FLT ACS TEMP WRN Fault trip of the motor temperature supervision function See parameter 30 04 Warning by the drive temperature supervision function The warning limit depends on the used inverter type ACS TEMP FLT FAULT WARN WARNING REVERSED Motor rotates in reverse direction Fault trip by the drive temperature supervision function Trip limit is 10096 Fault or warning active m Warning active Actual signals and parameters 65535 0 32767 0 1000 65535 10 12 gt ES N O gt WO NM gt oO 117 REF 1 LIM External reference REF1 at the supervision limit See parameters 32 11 and 24 32 12 REF 2 LIM External reference REF2 at the supervision limit See parameters 32 13 and 32 14 AT SPEED The actual value has reached the reference value In speed control the speed 30 error is less or equal to 10 of the nominal motor speed ACT 1 Process PID controller variable ACT1 at the supervision limit See parameters 31 32 15 and 32 16 ACT 2 LIM Process PID controller variable ACT2 at the supervision limit See parameters 32 32 17 and 32 18 COMM REF3 13 The relay is controlled by fieldbus re
236. ng interval is 24 ms OUTPUT VOLT Motor voltage 20 mA motor rated voltage The updating interval is 100 ms APPL OUTPUT The reference which is given as an output from the application For example if the PID Control macro is in use this is the output of the process PID controller The updating interval is 24 ms REFERENCE Active reference that the drive is currently following 20 mA 100 of the active reference The updating interval is 24 ms CONTROL DEV The difference between the reference and the actual value of the process PID controller 0 4 mA 100 10 12 mA 0 20 mA 100 The updating interval is 24 ms ACTUAL 1 Value of variable ACT1 used in the process PID control 20 mA value of parameter 40 10 The updating interval is 24 ms ACTUAL 2 Value of variable ACT2 used in the process PID control 20 mA value of parameter 40 12 The updating interval is 24 ms COMM REF4 The value is read from fieldbus reference REF4 See chapter Fie dbus control M1 TEMP MEAS Analogue output is a current source in a motor temperature measuring circuit Depending on the sensor type the output is 9 1 mA Pt 100 or 1 6 mA PTC For more information see parameter 35 01 and section Motor temperature measurement through the standard I O on page 77 Note The settings of parameters 15 02 to 15 05 are not effective PARAM 15 11 Source selected by 15 11 15 02 INVERT AO1 Inverts the analogue output AO1 signal The analogue signal is at the m
237. nimum level when the drive signal indicated is at its maximum and vice versa extension module See parameter 96 03 69 a adii 96 09 FILTER EXT AO2 Defines the filtering time constant for analogue output AO2 of the analogue I O extension module See parameter 15 04 0 00 10 00 s Filtering time constant 0 1000 96 10 SCALE EXT AO2 Defines the scaling factor for analogue output AO2 of the analogue extension module See parameter 15 05 10 100096 Scaling factor 100 10000 96 11 EXT AO1 PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 96 11 of parameter 96 01 1000 1 mA 255 255 31 Parameter index or a constant value See parameter 10 04 for information on 255 255 31 C the difference 32768 C 32767 96 12 EXT AO2 PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 96 12 of parameter 96 06 1000 1 255 255 31 Parameter index or a constant value See parameter 10 04 for information on 255 255 31 C the difference 32768 32767 98 OPTION MODULES Activation of the option modules The parameter settings will remain the same even though the application macro is changed parameter 99 02 98 01 ENCODER MODULE Activates the communication to the optional pulse encoder module See also parameter group 50 ENCODER MODULE NTAC Communication active Module type NTAC module Connection interface Fibre optic DDCS link Note Module node number must be set
238. notvisible _ not visible 40 21 SLEEP LEVEL not visible 0 0rpm not visible not visible B7i 40 22 SLEEP DELAY not visible 008 not visible 872 40 23 WAKE UP LEVEL noivisibe _ notvisible __ 0 notvisibie not visible 873 40 04 WAKE UP DELAY not visible not visible 0 08 notvisible not visible 874 4025ACIUALTPTR ___ 0 0 40 26 PID MINIMUM ________ 100 0 10009 100 0 100 ____1000 40 27 MAXIMUM 100 0 100 0 ____ 100 0 100 0 ____ 1000 4028TRIMREFPTR bo b bD 000207 42 BRAKECONIROL o ooo 4201BRAKECIRL oe e oe Oom 4202 BRAKE ACKNOWLEDGE OFF FF Jo oF 42 03 BRAKE OPEN DELAY 05 005 os Pos 4204 BRAKE CLOSE DELAY 05 Dos 42 05 ABS BRAKE CLS SPD Homm 4206 FAULT FUNC FAULT 4207 STARFTORQREFSEL NO ____ OM _ 0 0 4209EXTENDRUNT bos pos os 42 0LOWREF BRK HOLD 05 0056 006 45 ENERGYOPT 4502 ENERGY TARIFFI dE boae b b p 4506 E TARIFF UNIT EUR ER p 45 08 REF POWER 100 ______100 100 hoon 45 09 RESET DONE DONE ____ pone ___ p 50 ENCODERMODULE 1 BOOTPULSENR
239. ns the upload download and contrast functions 1 L gt 1242 0 rpm UPLOAD lt lt DOWNLOAD gt gt CONTRAST 4 Enter the upload function 1L gt 1242 0 rpm UPLOAD lt lt Switch to external control 1 gt 1242 0 rpm UPLOAD DOWNLOAD gt gt CONTRAST 4 No L on the first row of the display Select the upload function a flashing cursor indicates the 1L gt 1242 0 rpm selected function UPLOAD DOWNLOAD gt gt CONTRAST 4 ENTER Control panel 37 Disconnect the panel and reconnect it to the drive into which the data will be downloaded How to download data from the panel to a drive Consider the notes in section How to upload data from a drive to the panel on page 36 Connect the panel containing the uploaded data to the Ensure the drive is in local control L shown the first row 1L 1242 0 rpm I of the display If necessary press the LOC REM key to FREQ 45 00 Hz change to local control CURRENT 80 00 A POWER 75 00 2 Enter the Function Mode 1L 1242 0 rpm O Motor Setup Application Macro Speed Control 1 Enter the page that contains the upload download and 1L 1242 0 rpm O contrast functions UPLOAD ee DOWNLOAD S525 CONTRAST 4 Select the download function a flashing cursor indicates 1 L gt 1242 0 rpm the selected function UPLOAD lt lt DOWNLOAD gt gt CONTRAST 4 Start the download ENTER 1L 1242
240. ntrol mode INCHING2 With this command active the drive accelerates the motor to Constant Speed 13 defined by par 12 14 After the command is removed the drive decelerates the motor to zero speed Note The speed reference ramps are not effective The speed change rate is only limited by the current or torque limit of the drive Note Inching 1 takes priority over Inching 2 Note Not effective in Scalar control mode Fieldbus control Fieldbus reference scaling 213 With the Generic Drive communication profile active the speed reference value received from the fieldbus and the actual speed value received from the drive are scaled as shown in the table below Note Any correction of the reference see section References on page 199 is applied before scaling Application Macro used par 99 02 FACTORY HAND AUT or SEQ CTRL T CTRL or M F optional PID CTRL Reference type Speed or Frequency Speed or Freq not with FAST COMM Speed or Freq with FAST COMM Torque not with FAST COMM Torque with FAST COMM PID Reference not with FAST COMM PID Reference with FAST COMM Speed reference scaling 0 0 20000 par 99 08 DTC 99 07 scalar 20000 par 11 08 1 par 11 07 O par 11 07 20000 par 11 08 20000 par 11 08 0 0 20000 par 11 08 10000 par 11 08 1 par 11 07 O par 11 07 10000 par 11 08 1000
241. oad curve USER L CURVE Integrated motor current has exceeded load curve Program features 83 Application macros Chapter overview This chapter describes the intended use operation and the default control connections of the standard application macros It also describes how to save a user macro and how to recall it Overview of macros Application macros are preprogrammed parameter sets While starting up the drive the user typically selects one of the macros the one that is best suited to his needs by parameter 99 02 makes the essential changes and saves the result as a user macro There are five standard macros and two user macros The table below contains a summary of the macros and describes suitable applications Macro Suitable Applications Factory Ordinary speed control applications where no one two or three constant speeds are used Conveyors Speed controlled pumps and fans Test benches with predefined constant speeds Hand Auto Speed control applications Switching between two external control devices is possible PID Control Process control applications e g different closed loop control systems such as pressure control level control and flow control For example pressure boost pumps of municipal water supply systems level controlling pumps of water reservoirs pressure boost pumps of district heating systems material flow control on a conveyor line It is also possible to switch be
242. ock diagrams 266 Reference control chain sheet 1 PID CTRL macro continued the next page MIN VALUE EXT REF AIL2 3 11 06 FUNCTION SCALE LOC REFe q FILTER INVERT DIG IN EXT REFe PD C C ioni G8 eo ed INTEGRATION Be E INTEGRATION APPL BLOCK OUT E GooD em 40 02 PID INTEG TIME Hia n 40 03 PID DERIV TIME FILTER 40 04 PID DERIV FILTER DERIV FILTER eee 40 05 ERROR VALUE INV 4013 PID INTEGRATION ACTUAL VALUES FILTER em wax SPEED FRE CONTROL DEVIATION 70 06 ACTUAL VALUE 126 S IRL 1 INPUT PID MIN MIN SPEED FREQ MIN VALUE 40 07 MAX VALUE 40 08 SE UAL 2 INPUT SCALE 40 09 ACT 1 MINIMUM FILTER 40 10 ACT 1 MAXIMUM INVERT 40 11 ACT 2 MINIMUM GIAL FILTER AI3 40 12 ACT 2 MAXIMUM cgay 1 40 25 ACTUAL 1 PTR INPUTS 125 ACT 2 DIGIN 1 6 1 34 ACTUAL 98 04 104 CURRENT DIGIN 7 12 98 05 D SET REC ADDR AUX DS REF3 MOTOR SPEED E nil AUX DS REFS SLEEP LEVEL FB ADAPTER DATASET DATASET MAIN ACT DATASET SLEEP COMPARE SELECTION SLEEP SELECTION 4refActive INTERNAL PIDCtrlActive Modulating gt 2 2 AUX ACT DATASET CTRLPANEL DRIV_WNDW LOC RPM LOC REFe 7 LOC REM E Prepared Project name Control block diagrams 267 continued from the previous page MOTOR C
243. odbus Link Control panel DI1 Std IO Digital input DI1 on the standard terminal block DI1 DIO ext 1 Digital input 011 on the digital I O extension module 1 KEYPAD Block diagram reference source for EXT1 The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for the speed reference of external control location EXT 1 el Al2 AI3 013 AI2 Std IO Std IO 1 DI3 Std IO opi Reference DIA Std IO REF1 rpm 1 AIO ext Extensions AI2 AIO ext See parameter DIO ext 3 Soc e DI2 DIO ext 3 Fb selection See chapter Fieldbus control REF Fieldbus adapter slot 1 CHO RDCO board Standard Modbus Link Control panel KEYPAD Std 10 Analogue input Al1 on the standard terminal block 11 AIO ext Analogue input on the analogue I O extension module Program features 46 Reference types and processing The drive can accept a variety of references in addition to the conventional analogue input signal and control panel signals The drive reference can be given with two digital inputs One digital input increases the speed the other decreases it The drive accepts a bipolar analogue speed reference This feature allows both the speed and direction to be controlled with a single analogue input The minimum signal is full speed reversed and the maximum signal is full speed forward The drive can fo
244. of the panel display Note The jogging speed overrides the constant speeds Note The ramp shape time is set to zero during the jogging Settings Additional information 10 06 Input for the on off control of the jogging 12 15 Jogging speed 21 10 Switch off delay for the inverter IGBT control A delay keeps the inverter modulation live over a short standstill period enabling a smooth restart 22 04 22 05 Acceleration and deceleration times used during the jogging 22 06 Acceleration and deceleration ramp shape time Set to zero during the jogging Reduced Run function Reduced Run function is available for parallel connected inverters Reduced Run function makes it possible to continue the operation with limited current if an inverter module s is out of order If one of the modules is broken it must be removed Parameter change is needed to continue the run with reduced current 95 03 INT CONFIG USER For instructions on how to remove and reconnect an inverter module see the appropriate drive hardware manual Settings Additional information 95 03 INT CONFIG Number of existing parallel connected inverters USER Diagnostics Actual value Additional information 04 01 INT board fault INT CONFIG Number of inverter modules is not equal to original number of inverters Program features 81 User load curve Motor temperature rise can be limited by limiting the drive output current The user can define a load c
245. oltage level Long time supply voltage rise would damage the chopper COMMON DC Chopper operation is allowed always when the DC voltage exceeds the braking limit The selection is to be used in applications where several inverters are connected to the same intermediate circuit DC bus WARNING Excessive supply voltage will raise the intermediate circuit N voltage above the operation limit of the chopper If the voltage remains abnormally high for a long period the braking chopper will be overloaded and damaged Actual signals and parameters 65535 141 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS Programmable protection functions 30 01 lt FUNCTION Selects how the drive reacts when an analogue input signal falls below the set minimum limit Note The analogue input minimum setting must be set to 0 5 V 1 mA or above see parameter group 13 ANALOGUE INPUTS FAULT The drive trips on a fault and the motor coasts to stop 5 15 The drive generates a warning Al lt MIN FUNC 8110 and sets the speed to the value defined by parameter 12 16 1 2 3 WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case the N analogue input signal is lost LAST SPEED The drive generates a warning Al MIN FUNC 8110 and freezes the speed 4 to the level the drive was operating at The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation
246. on the N application program uses ramp stop in spite of the selection COAST see parameter group 42 BRAKE CONTROL RAMP Stop along a ramp See parameter group 22 ACCEL DECEL Actual signals and parameters 131 21 04 DC HOLD Activates deactivates the DC hold function DC Hold is not possible if parameter 99 04 SCALAR When both the reference and the speed drop below the value of parameter 21 05 the drive will stop generating sinusoidal current and start to inject DC into the motor The current is set by parameter 21 06 When the reference speed exceeds parameter 21 05 normal drive operation continues SPEEDnmotor A DC Hold lt lt DC HOLD SPEED Note DC Hold has no effect if the start signal is switched off Note Injecting DC current into the motor causes the motor to heat up In applications where long DC hold times are required externally ventilated motors should be used If the DC hold period is long the DC hold cannot prevent the motor shaft from rotating if a constant load is applied to the motor See section DC Hold on page 55 21 07 RUN ENABLE FUNC Selects the stop mode applied when the Run Enable signal is switched off The Run Enable signal is put into use by parameter 16 01 Note The setting overrides the normal stop mode setting parameter 21 03 when the Run Enable signal is switched off WARNING The drive will restart after the Run Enable signal restores
247. on example of a two wire 12 AO2 0 motor nom current lt 700 ohm is active DI3 0 24 VDC 4 20 mA sensor is shown x22 9 Total maximum current shared between this output and optional modules installed on the board 6 DI6___ Stop Start process control 24 VDC max 100 mA 8 9 DGND1 Digital ground X23 Auxiliary voltage output and input non 2 GND isolated 24 V DC 250 mA 9 X25 4 Relay output 1 2 RO12 2 RO13 26 Relay output 2 2 IRO22 i 2 a Running 27 US LIST Relay output 3 Faut 2 Inverted fault 3 R033 Application macros 91 Torque Control macro Torque Control macro is used in applications in which torque control of the motor is required Torque reference is given through analogue input Al2 as a current signal By default mA corresponds to 0 and 20 mA to 100 of the rated motor torque The Start Stop Direction commands are given through digital inputs DI1 and DI2 The Run Enable signal is connected to DI6 Through digital input DI3 it is possible to select speed control instead of torque control It is also possible to change the external control location to local i e to control panel by pressing the LOC REM key The panel controls the speed by default If torque control with panel is required the value of parameter 11 01 should be changed to REF2 96 Two analogue and
248. on selection 4 04 Constant speed select 5 DI5 Constantspeedselect 6 06 __ speed select 7 24 24 VDC max 100 mA 8 24 9 DGND1 Digital ground _____ X23 Auxiliary voltage output and input 2 GND _ isolated 24 V DC 250 mA X25 1 Relay output 1 2 12 2 9 RO13 26 1 21 Relay output 2 2 8022 i 2 ST Running X27 x NN Relay output 3 Faut 2 RO32 Inverted fault 3 033 95 User macros In addition to the standard application macros it is possible to create two user macros The user macro allows the user to save the parameter settings including Group 99 and the results of the motor identification into the permanent memory and recall the data at a later time The panel reference is also saved if the macro is saved and loaded in Local control mode Remote control location setting is saved into the user macro but Local control location setting is not To create User Macro 1 e Adjust the parameters Perform the motor identification if not performed yet Save the parameter settings and the results of the motor identification by changing parameter 99 02 to USER 1 SAVE press ENTER The storing takes 20 s to 1 min Note If user macro save function is executed several times drive memory fills up and file compression starts File compression can last up to 10 min
249. onditions have been valid longer than the time set by parameter 30 14 See section Underload Protection on page 63 Protection is inactive WAWNG The ave generatesawaming 30 15 UNDERLOAD Selects the load curve for the underload function See parameter 30 13 CURVE TWIN 70 100 Tm Motor torque Nominal motor torque fn Nominal motor frequency 80 60 40 Actual signals and parameters 146 30 16 MOTOR PHASE Activates the motor phase loss supervision function 30 17 EARTH FAULT Selects how the drive reacts when an earth fault is detected in the motor or the motor cable See section Earth Fault Protection on page 64 Note With parallel connected R8i inverter modules ACS800 multidrive and large ACS800 07 units only the selection FAULT is valid WARNING The drive generates a warning FAULT The drive trips on a fault 65535 30 18 COMM FLT FUNC Selects how the drive reacts in a fieldbus communication break i e when the drive fails to receive the Main Reference Data Set or the Auxiliary Reference Data Set The time delays are given by parameters 30 19 and 30 21 FAULT Protection is active The drive trips on a fault and stops the motor as defined by 1 parameter 21 03 CONST SP 15 Protection is active The drive generates a warning and sets the speed to the 3 value defined by parameter 12 16 WARNING Make sure that it is safe to c
250. ons see the RA O Module User s Manual 3AFE64484567 English 98 07 COMM PROFILE Defines the profile on which the communication with the fieldbus or another drive is based Visible only when fieldbus communication is activated by parameter 98 02 ABB DRIVES ABB Drives profile GENERIC Generic drive profile Typically used with the fieldbus modules that have the type designation of form Rxxx installed in the option slot of the drive CSA 2 8 3 0 Communication profile used by application program versions 2 8 and 3 0 98 09 DI O EXT1 DI FUNC Defines the naming of the inputs of digital extension module 1 in the drive application program See parameter 98 03 DI7 8 DI1 and DI2 of the module extend the number of input channels The module inputs are named 017 and 018 REPL 01 2 DI1 and 012 of the module replace the standard input channels DI1 and DI2 The inputs are named DI1 and DI2 DI7 8 9 DI1 DI2 and DI3 of the module extend the number of input channels The module inputs are named DI7 DI8 and DIY REPL DI1 2 3 011 012 and of the module replace the standard input channels 011 012 The inputs are named 011 012 and 98 10 DI O EXT2 DI FUNC Defines the naming of the inputs of digital extension module 2 in the drive application program See parameter 98 04 4 5 1 2 3 4 Actual signals parameters DI9 10 DI1 and 012 of the module extend the number of input
251. onstant for value PAR 14 18 of parameter 14 03 71 255 255 31 Parameter index a constant value See parameter 10 04 for information on 255 255 31 C the difference 32768 32767 14 19 ROPTR4 Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14 19 of parameter 14 10 255 255 31 Parameter index or a constant value See parameter 10 04 for information on 255 255 31 C the difference 32768 32767 14 20 ROPTR5 Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14 20 of parameter 14 11 255 255 31 Parameter index or a constant value See parameter 10 04 for information on 255 255 31 C the difference 32768 32767 14 21 RO PTR6 Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14 21 of parameter 14 12 1 255 255 31 Parameter index or a constant value See parameter 10 04 for information on 255 255 31 C the difference 32768 32767 14 22 ROPTR7 Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14 22 of parameter 14 13 1 255 255 31 Parameter index or a constant value See parameter 10 04 for information on 255 255 31 C the difference 32768 32767 14 23 RO PTR8 Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14 23 of parameter 14 14 255 255 31 Parameter index or a constant value See parameter 10 04 for information on 255 255 31 C the difference 32768 32767 14 24 ROPTRY Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14 24 of parameter 14 15
252. ontinue operation in case of a N communication break LAST SPEED Protection is active The drive generates a warning and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds communication break 30 19 REF DS T OUT Defines the time delay for the Main Reference data set supervision See parameter 30 18 0 1 60 05 Time delay 10 6000 30 20 COMM FLT RO AO Selects the operation of the fieldbus controlled relay output and analogue output in a communication break See groups 14 RELAY OUTPUTS and 15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS and chapter Fieldbus control The delay for the supervision function is given by parameter 30 21 ZERO Relay output is de energised Analogue output is set to zero LAST VALUE The relay output keeps the last state before the communication loss The analogue output gives the last value before the communication loss WARNING After the communication recovers the update of the relay N and the analogue outputs starts immediately without fault message resetting 30 21 AUX DS T OUT Defines the delay time for the Auxiliary Reference data set supervision See parameter 30 18 The drive automatically activates the supervision 60 seconds after power switch on if the value is other than zero WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a 65535 Note The delay also applies for the function defined by
253. op with deceleration ramp Speed 2 Speed 1 Accel1 Accel1 Accel2 Decel2 Start Stop 1 Speed 1 ss Speed 2 Accel2 Decel2 Speed 3 Application macros 94 Default control connections The figure below shows the external control connections for the Sequential Control macro The markings of the standard terminals on the RMIO board are shown 1 Off Ramp times according to par 22 02 and 22 03 On Ramp times according to par 22 04 and 22 05 2 See parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS Dig DIS DI6 Operation ______ o o SerspesdTrough AT Speed 1 Speed 3 Speed 5 Sees 3 See parameter 21 09 4 Total maximum current shared between this output and optional modules installed on the board Application macros X20 VREF Reference voltage 10 VDC 1 kohm lt R lt 10 kohm X21 2 GND 1 kohm lt R lt 10 kohm rnm wi RM 200 kohm a By default not in use 0 4 20 mA Rin 6 A 100 ohm By default not in use 0 4 20 mA Rin 100 ohm E e or Motor speed 0 4 20 mA 8 0 motor nom 40 AO1 speed lt 700 ohm 41 AO2 current 0 4 20 mA 0 motor 07 1 12 AO2 current lt 700 ohm X2 171 04 J 4 2 DI2 jFomward Reverse __ ____ 3 Acceleration amp decelerati
254. or and motor cable Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable Contact ABB representative Two option modules have same connection Check connection interface selections in group interface selection 98 OPTION MODULES Check start inhibit circuit AGPS board Check mains fuses Check for mains supply imbalance 243 TEMP DIF xx y Excessive temperature difference between Check cooling fan 4380 several parallel connected inverter modules xx Replace fan 1 12 refers to inverter module number and y 3 17 FW 5 bit 8 and refers to phase U V W 4 01 Check air filters Alarm is indicated when temperature difference is 15 C Fault is indicated when temperature difference is 20 Excessive temperature can be caused e g by unequal current sharing between parallel connected inverters THERMAL MODE Motor thermal protection mode is set to DTC See parameter 30 05 FF50 for high power motor THERMISTOR Motor temperature is excessive Motor thermal Check motor ratings and load 4311 protection mode selection is THERMISTOR Check start up data 3 05 FW 1 bit 5 Check thermistor connections to digital input programmable DI6 Fault Function 30 04 30 05 UNDERLOAD Motor load is too low due to e g release Check for problem in driven equipment FF6A mechanism in driven equipment Check Fault Function parameters 3 05 FW 1 bit 8 programmable Fault Fun
255. or by ID Run ID N CHANGED Drive ID number has been changed from 1 Change ID number back to 1 See chapter FF68 Control panel ID RUN Motor identification Run is on Wait until drive indicates that motor FF35 identification Run is completed ID RUN SEL Motor Identification Run is selected and drive Press Start key to start Identification Run FF33 is ready to start ID Run This warning belongs to ID Run procedure CHOKE TEMP Excessive input choke temperature Stop drive Let it cool down FF81 Check ambient temperature 3 18 AW 5 bit 4 Check that fan rotates in correct direction and air flows freely INV CUR LIM Internal inverter current or power limit has Reduce load or increase ramp time 2212 been exceeded Limit inverter actual power or decrease line 3 18 AW 5 bit 8 side converter reactive power generation programmable reference value parameter 95 06 LCU Q PW Fault Function REF 30 23 Check Fault Function parameters INV DISABLED Optional DC switch has opened while unit was Close DC switch 3200 stopped Check AFSC 0x Fuse Switch Controller unit 3 18 AW 5 bit 6 Fault tracing 231 WARNING CAUSE WHAT TO DO INV OVERTEMP Converter module temperature is excessive Check ambient temperature If it exceeds 4290 40 C ensure that load current does not exceed derated load capacity of drive See 3 31 AW 6 bit 0 appropriate hardware manual Check that ambient temperature setting is correct p
256. otor temperature measurement is out of acceptable range Motor load is too low due to e g release mechanism in driven equipment Integrated motor current has exceeded load curve defined by parameters in group 72 USER LOAD CURVE Check motor ratings and load Check start up data Check thermistor connections to digital input DI6 Check connections of motor temperature measurement circuit See chapter Program features for circuit diagram Check for problem in driven equipment Check Fault Function parameters Check parameter group 72 USER LOAD CURVE settings Reduce load 235 Warning messages generated by the control panel CAUSE WHAT TO DO WARNING DOWNLOADING FAILED DRIVE IS RUNNING DOWNLOADING NOT POSSIBLE NO COMMUNICATION X NO FREE ID NUMBERS ID NUMBER SETTING NOT POSSIBLE NOT UPLOADED DOWNLOADING NOT POSSIBLE UPLOADING FAILED WRITE ACCESS DENIED PARAMETER SETTING NOT POSSIBLE Download function of panel has failed No data has been copied from panel to drive Downloading is not possible while motor is running Cabling problem or hardware malfunction on Panel Link 4 Panel type not compatible with drive application program version Panel Link already includes 31 stations No upload function has been performed Upload function of panel has failed No data has been copied from drive to panel Certain parameters do not allow changes while motor is running If
257. parameter 30 20 0 0 60 0s Time delay 0 0 s The function is inactive 0 6000 Actual signals and parameters 147 Selects how the drive reacts in case an optional input or output channel has been selected as a signal interface but the communication to the appropriate analogue or digital extension module has not been set up accordingly in 30 22 IO CONFIG FUNC O WARNING 30 23 LIMIT WARNING 0 255 31 AUTOMATIC RESET 31 01 NUMBER OF TRIALS Defines the number of automatic fault resets the drive performs within the time defined by parameter 31 02 Number of the automatic resets Defines the time for the automatic fault reset function See parameter 31 01 Allowed resetting time 100 18000 31 02 TRIAL TIME 1 0 180 05 31 03 DELAY TIME 0 0 3 05 31 04 OVERCURRENT lt 819 31 05 OVERVOLTAGE O lt TI 6 31 06 UNDERVOLTAGE lt m 2 O 31 07 Al SIGNAL MIN Active The drive generates a warning 2 Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault before attempting an automatic reset See parameter 31 01 Activates deactivates the automatic reset for the overcurrent fault Activates deactivates the automatic reset for the intermediate link overvoltage fault Activates deactivates the automatic reset for the intermediate link undervoltage fault Activates deactivates the automatic reset for the fault Al SIGNAL MIN analo
258. pends on the equipment it is connected to With RDCO Communication Option Module the Interface is selected as follows Optional ModuleBus Port DDCS Communication Option Module Interface RDCO 01 RDCO 02 RDCO 03 If branching unit NDBU 85 95 is used with 810 TB810 Optical ModuleBus Port Interface must be used Fieldbus control 194 The following table lists the parameters which need to be defined when setting up communication between the drive and Advant controller Alternative settings Setting for control through Function Information CHO COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION 98 02 NO ADVANT Initialises communication between drive FIELDBUS fibre optic channel CHO and Advant ADVANT controller The transmission speed is STD MODBUS 4 Mbit s CUSTOMISED 98 07 ABB DRIVES ABB DRIVES Selects the communication profile used by GENERIC the drive See section Communication CSA 2 8 3 0 profiles on page 206 Defines the node address for DDCS channel CHO 70 01 AC 800M ModuleBus 2 1 125 AC 80 ModuleBus 17 125 CI810A S 17 125 70 04 RING Selects the topology of the channel CHO STAR link After the communication initialisation parameters have been set the drive control parameters section Drive control parameters on page 195 must be checked adjusted where necessary In an Optical ModuleBus connection channel 0 address parameter 70 01 is calculated from the value of the POSITION terminal in the
259. plication Guide 3AFE64590430 English Additional data actual signals and parameters 254 Parameters Index Name Selection FACTORY PID SEQ CTRL PB W 40 START STOP DIR 10 01 STRT STP DIR EX QR 2 101 W 214207 10 02 2 NOTSEL pies H2 02 W TO 03 REF DIRECTION FORWARD REQUEST FORWARD REQUEST REQUEST 103 W p HOOSEXTZSTRTIPIR 0 wOo7NETCONIROL f 10 08 b po m REFERENCE SELECT S 11 01 KEYPAD REF SEL_ REF1 rpm REFi pm REFI 1 126 11 04 1 rpm Orm rpm ____ Opm poj 11 05 REF 1 MAXIMUM 1500rpm 1500 ___ 1500 rpm 1500rpm 8500rpm ___130 _____ 11 07 2MINIMUM 0 70 09742707 11 06 REF 2 MAXIMUM 100 1009 100 00 10007 132 WOSEXTI2SELPTR Do maoExriREFPIR D 0 fjs5 00000 18 42 CONSTANT SPEEDS a SS Se HZ02 CONSTSPEED i Bo0rpm S00rm 300 rpm S00rm Borm 52 H203 CONSTSPEED2 600 rpm ____ 600rpm S00rm ____ 55 HZ04 CONSTSPEED3 900rpm 900 _ 900rpm B 0rpm i54 H205 CONSTSPEED4 _____ S00rpm 300 300
260. put RO1 control by fieldbus reference REF3 bit 13 14 02 COM REF3 Enables relay output RO2 control by fieldbus reference REF3 bit 14 14 14 03 COM REF3 Enables relay output RO3 control by fieldbus reference REF3 bit 15 01 COMM REF4 Directs the contents of fieldbus reference REF4 to analogue output 1 Scaling 20000 20 mA 15 06 COMM REF5 Directs the contents of fieldbus reference REF5 to analogue output 2 Scaling 20000 20 mA SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS 16 01 COMM CW Enables the control of the Run Enable signal through fieldbus 03 01 Main Control Word bit 3 Note Must be set to YES when the Generic Drive communication profile is selected see par 98 07 16 04 COMM CW Enables fault reset through fieldbus 03 01 Main Control Word bit 7 Note Reset through fieldbus Control Word 03 01 bit 7 is enabled automatically and it is independent of parameter 16 04 setting if parameter 10 01 or 10 02 is set to COMM CW 16 07 DONE SAVE Saves parameter value changes including those made through fieldbus control to permanent memory COMMUNICATION FAULT FUNCTIONS FAULT Determines drive action in case fieldbus communication is lost NO CONST SP15 Note The communication loss detection is based on monitoring of LAST SPEED received Main and Auxiliary data sets whose sources are selected with parameters 90 04 and 90 05 respectively 30 19 60 05 Defines the time between Main Reference data set loss detection and the action select
261. r e g AC 800M AC 80 Service messages acyclic Either an Rxxx or Nxxx and an RMBA 01 adapter can be connected to the drive simultaneously Fieldbus control 188 Redundant fieldbus control Fieldbus control It is possible to connect two fieldbuses to the drive with the following adapter configuration e Type Rxxx fieldbus adapter module not RMBA 01 is installed in drive slot 1 01 Modbus Adapter module 15 installed in drive slot 2 E g PROFIBUS Modbus ACS800 RMIO board 01 adapter PROFIBUS DP link 01 adapter std Modbus link The control i e the Main Reference data set see section The fieldbus control interface on page 198 is activated by setting parameter 98 02 to FIELDBUS or STD MODBUS In case there is a communication problem with one fieldbus the control can be switched to the other fieldbus Switching between the buses can be controlled e g with adaptive programming Parameters and signals can be read by both fieldbuses but simultaneous cyclical writing to the same parameter is forbidden 189 Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter module Fieldbus adapters for several communication protocols are available e g PROFIBUS and Modbus Rxxx type fieldbus adapter modules are mounted in expansion slot 1 of the drive Nxxx type fieldbus adapter modules are connected to channel CHO of the RDCO module Note For instructions on setting
262. r parameter 33 4 cece 8 2h dra re Ratio Fen adde eg dete d 34 How to enter an assistant browse and exit 35 How to upload data from a drive to the panel 36 Table of contents How to download data from the panel to a drive 37 How to set the contrast of the display 38 Drive Selecon Mode iu uas d t 39 How to select a drive and change its panel link ID number 39 Reading and entering packed boolean values on the display 40 Program features 354 Aa weird TURAE o ars wee PA Cau o od Cd eut 41 Star UD ASSISA aUe ded eat a OU de Ra orta od p 41 HEMET CHG ION 41 The default order of the taSkS 41 List of tasks and the relevant drive parameters 42 Contents of the assistant displays 43 Localcontrol vs external 4 d wae pe aw tbat eee 43 Bees Mere 44 MIG 223
263. r 84 06 255 255 31 See parameter 84 06 255 255 31 C 32768 C 32767 84 09 OUTPUT Stores and displays the output of Block Parameter Set 1 84 79 OUTPUT Stores the output of Block Parameter Set 15 85 USER CONSTANTS Storage of the Adaptive Program constants and messages For more information see the Adaptive Program Application Guide 3AFE64527274 English 85 01 CONSTANT1 Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program EN 8388608 to 8388607 Integer value Actual signals and parameters 171 85 12 5 2 Stores message to be used the Adaptive Program EVENT block 85 13 STRING3 Stores a message to be used in the Adaptive Program EVENT block MESSAGE3 Message Messe 8574 STRINGS ______ Stores a message to be used in tne Adaptive Program EVENT Bock 0 0 MESSA Mese 8515 STRINGS Stores a message to be used inthe Adaptive Program EVENT Beck _ MESSAGES 90 D SET REC ADDR Addresses into which the received fieldbus data sets are written Numbers of the main and auxiliary data sets 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 The parameters are visible only when a fieldbus communication is activated by parameter 98 02 For more information see chapter Fie dbus control 8001 AUXDSREFS Selects the adress which the value of reference REF3 is witen SSS 8002 AUKDSREFA Selects the address which the valu
264. r is switched off T 11 Panel reference type external control location selection and external reference SELECT sources and limits 11 01 KEYPAD REF SEL Selects the type of the reference given from panel REF 1 rpm Speed reference in rom Frequency reference Hz if parameter 99 04 is 1 SCALAR REF2 reference The use of REF2 vary depending on the application macro For example if the Torque Control macro is selected REF2 is the torque reference the two external control locations EXT1 2 Og JU See selection 011 See selection 011 EXT1 EXT1 active The control signal sources are defined by parameter 10 01 and 11 03 EXT2 EXT2 active The control signal sources are defined by parameter 10 02 and 11 06 COMM CW Fieldbus Control Word bit 11 Actual signals and parameters 106 Analogue input 11 Note If the signal is bipolar 10 VDC use the selection Al1 BIPOLAR The selection Al1 ignores the negative signal range 1 2 Analogue input 12 3 Analogue input AI3 4 AI1 JOYST Unipolar analogue input as joystick The minimum input signal runs the motor at the maximum reference in the reverse direction the maximum input at the maximum reference in the forward direction Note Parameter 10 03 must have the value REQUEST WARNING Minimum reference for joystick must be higher
265. r to zero speed according to the active deceleration ramp parameter 22 03 or 22 05 START The drive accelerates to the set reference value according to the active acceleration ramp par 22 02 or 22 04 The direction of rotation is determined by the sign of the reference value and the setting of par 10 03 COAST STOP The drive coasts to stop i e the drive stops modulating However this command can be overridden by the Brake Control function which forces the drive to decelerate to zero speed by the active deceleration ramp When the Brake Control function is active Coast stop and Emergency coast stop OFF2 commands given after the Emergency ramp stop OFF3 coast the drive to a stop QUICK STOP The drive decelerates the motor to zero speed within the emergency stop deceleration time defined by par 22 07 CURRENT LIMIT The drive decelerates the motor to zero speed according to the set current limit par 20 03 or STOP CLS torque limit 20 04 whichever is first reached The same procedure is valid in case of a Voltage Limit Stop VLS INCHING1 With this command active the drive accelerates the motor to Constant Speed 12 defined by par 12 13 After the command is removed the drive decelerates the motor to zero speed Note The speed reference ramps are not effective The speed change rate is only limited by the current or torque limit of the drive Note Inching 1 takes priority over Inching 2 Note Not effective in Scalar co
266. rameter 10 03 DIRECTION must be REQUEST WARNING After a fault reset the drive will start if the start signal is On Pulse start through digital input 011 0 gt 1 Start Pulse stop through digital 4 input 012 1 0 Stop Direction of rotation is fixed according to parameter 10 03 DIRECTION Pulse start through digital input DI1 0 gt 1 Start Pulse stop through digital 5 input 012 1 0 Stop Direction through digital input 0 forward 1 reverse To control direction parameter 10 03 DIRECTION must be REQUEST Pulse start forward through digital input DI1 0 gt 1 Start forward Pulse start reverse through digital input 012 0 gt 1 Start reverse Pulse stop through digital input 013 1 gt 707 stop To control the direction parameter 10 03 DIRECTION must be REQUEST See selection 011 7 DI6 5 See selection 011 2 016 Start stop 015 direction KEYPAD Control panel To control the direction parameter 10 03 DIRECTION must be REQUEST COMM CW Fieldbus Control Word DI7 8 See selection 011 2 017 start stop 018 direction DI7P 8P DI7P 8P 9 DI7P 8P 9P See selection DI1P 2P See selection DI1P 2P 3 See selection DI1P 2P 3P PARAM 10 04 Source selected by 10 04 17 DI1 F 012 R Start stop and direction commands through digital inputs 011 and 012 DT D Operation SS 0 0 o p EA Note Parameter 10 03 DIRECTION must be REQUE
267. rameter 60 03 The parameter is visible only when parameter 99 02 is T CTRL 0 1500 rom Positive window width 0 20000 Actual signals and parameters 165 60 05 WINDOW WIDTH Defines the supervision window width below the speed reference See NEG parameter 60 03 The parameter is visible only when parameter 99 02 is T CTRL 0 1500 rpm Negative window width 0 20000 60 06 DROOP RATE Defines the droop rate The parameter value needs to be changed only if both the Master and the Follower are speed controlled External control location 1 EXT1 is selected see parameter 11 02 or External control location 2 EXT2 is selected see parameter 11 02 and parameter 60 02 is set to SPEED The droop rate needs to be set both for the Master and the Follower The correct droop rate for a process must be found out case by case in practice The drooping prevents a conflict between the Master and the Follower by allowing a slight speed difference between them The drooping slightly decreases the drive speed as the drive load increases The actual speed decrease at a certain operating point depends on the droop rate setting and the drive load torque reference speed controller output At 100 speed controller output drooping is at its nominal level i e equal to the value of the DROOP RATE The drooping effect decreases linearly to zero along with the decreasing load Speed Decrease Motor Speed Controller Output
268. rammed 64 control board temperature 66 DC undervoltage 65 drive temperature 65 Enhanced drive temperature monitoring 65 input phase loss 66 internal fault 66 overfrequency 66 short circuit 66 Features of the program 41 82 Fieldbus adapter communication parameters 189 190 module 188 Fieldbus addresses 249 Fieldbus control 187 226 connecting two fieldbuses to a drive 188 control word status word 199 interface 198 205 References 199 Fieldbus reference scaling ABB drives communication profile 210 CSA 2 8 3 0 communication profile 214 generic drive 213 Fieldbus equivalent defined 97 Flux braking 55 56 Flux optimisation 56 G Generic drive communication profile 21 1 H Hand auto macro 83 87 Hexagonal motor flux 61 ID run procedure 22 23 Input bridge protection 67 Input phase loss fault 66 INT INIT FAULT 222 INT SC INFO 226 Integer scaling 65 Internal fault 66 K Keys on the control panel 35 L LIMIT WORD 1 216 LIMIT WORD INV 223 Limits adjustable 66 Local control 44 Macros factory 83 85 hand auto 83 87 overview 83 PID control 83 89 reference control chain diagram 266 sequential control 93 defined 83 torque control 83 91 user 95 defined 83 Modbus adapter module 188 addressing 192 link communication parameters 191 192 Motor identification 53 phase loss 63 stall protection 63 temperature measurement using standard 70 71 temperature thermal model 62 thermal protection 62 underload prot
269. ration file upload has failed more than five times OFF LINE Adapter is off line ON LINE Adapter is on line RESET Adapter performing a hardware reset 51 32 FBA CPI FW Displays the CPI program revision of the module REV inserted in slot 1 x major revision number y minor revision number z correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 51 33 FBA APPL Displays the application program revision of the module inserted in slot 1 x major revision number y minor revision number z correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 Parameters 51 27 to 51 33 are only visible when type Rxxx fieldbus adapter is installed After the module configuration parameters in group 51 have been set the drive control parameters section Drive control parameters on page 195 must be checked and adjusted where necessary The new settings will take effect when the drive is next powered up or when parameter 51 27 is activated Fieldbus control 191 Setting up communication through the Standard Modbus Link An RMBA 01 Modbus Adapter installed in slot 1 or 2 of the drive forms an interface called the Standard Modbus Link The Standard Modbus Link can be used for external control of the drive by a Modbus controller RTU protocol only Before configuring the drive for Modbus control the adapter module must be mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions given in the hardware manual of the drive and the
270. re available Drive output frequency current voltage and power e Motor speed and torque Mains voltage and intermediate circuit DC voltage e Active control location Local EXT1 EXT2 Reference values Drive temperature e Operating time counter h kWh counter e Digital and Analogue I O status PID controller actual values if the PID Control macro is selected Three signals can be shown simultaneously on the control panel display It is also possible to read the values through the serial communication link or through the analogue outputs Settings Additional information Group 15 ANALOGUE Selection of an actual signal to an analogue output OUTPUTS Group 92 D SET TR Selection of an actual signal to a data set serial communication ADDR Diagnostics Actual value Additional information Group 01 ACTUAL Lists of actual signals SIGNALS 09 ACTUAL SIGNALS Motor identification The performance of Direct Torque Control is based on an accurate motor model determined during the motor start up A motor Identification Magnetisation is automatically done the first time the start command is given During this first start up the motor is magnetised at zero speed for several seconds to allow the motor model to be created This identification method is suitable for most applications In demanding applications a separate Identification Run can be performed Settings Parameter 99 10 Program fea
271. required For directions see the RA O Module User s Manual 3AFE64484567 English RAIO SLOT2 Communication active Module type RAIO Connection interface Option slot 2 of the drive Note Make the module hardware settings as described above The node number is not required For directions see the RA O Module User s Manual 3AFE64484567 English RAIO DDCS Communication active Module type RAIO Connection interface Optional I O module adapter AIMA that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link Note Set the module node number to 9 For directions see the RA O Module User s Manual 3AFE64484567 English 98 13 EXT AI1 FUNC Defines the signal type for input 1 of the analogue I O extension module Al5 in the drive application program The setting must match the signal connected to the module Note The communication must be activated by parameter 98 06 98 14 EXT AI2 FUNC Defines the signal type for input 2 of the analogue I O extension module 6 in the drive application program The setting must match the signal connected to the module Note The communication must be activated by parameter 98 06 98 16 SIN FILT SUPERV Activates the communication to the digital extension module and reserves the module for the use of the sine filter temperature measurement Parameter is visible if parameter 95 04 is set to SIN or EX amp SIN Parameter value is automatically set to NO
272. res 72 Settings Parameter Additional information 15 01 Analogue output motor 1 temperature measurement Set to M1 TEMP MEAS 395 01 35 03 Settings of motor 1 temperature measurement Parameters 13 01 to 13 05 processing and 15 02 to 15 05 1 processing are not effective At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor If this is not possible the shield is to be left unconnected Diagnostics Program features Actual values Additional information 01 35 Temperature value MOTOR 1 TEMP 4312 Measured motor temperature has exceeded the set alarm limit T MEAS ALM FF91 Motor temperature measurement is out of acceptable range MOTOR 1 TEMP 4312 Measured motor temperature has exceeded the set fault limit 73 Motor temperature measurement through an analogue I O extension This section describes the motor temperature measurement of one motor when an optional analogue extension module RAIO is used as the connection interface RAIO module 10nF AO1 lt gt SHLD The minimum voltage Three sensors RAIO module of the capacitor must 4 630 One sensor T EUMD ED SHLD 10 nF to the RAIO module requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the sensor Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creepage distance of 8 mm 400 500 VAC equipment
273. rive stopped 1 Start allowed 0 No start allowed Restart after OFF2 STOP Input is back to 1 and the drive receives rising edge of the Start signal Drive running 1 Normal operation 0 Stop by ramp The ramp time is defined by parameter 22 07 EM STOP RAMP Drive stopped 1 Normal start 0 No start allowed Restart after OFF3 STOP Start Interlock input 1 and the drive receives rising edge of the Start signal Defines the delay for the zero speed delay function The function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick restarting is essential During the delay the drive knows accurately the rotor position No Zero Speed Delay With Zero Speed Delay Speed Speed Speed controller switched off Motor coasts to stop Speed controller remains live Motor is decelerated to true 0 speed Zero Speed Time Delay Time No Zero Speed Delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp When the motor actual speed falls below an internal limit called Zero Speed the speed controller is switched off The inverter modulation is stopped and the motor coasts to standstill With Zero Speed Delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp When the actual motor speed falls below an internal limit called Zero Speed the zero speed delay function activates During the delay the functions keeps the speed controller live the inverter modulates motor is magnetised and the driv
274. rm a reference out of two analogue input signals by using mathematical functions Addition subtraction multiplication minimum selection and maximum selection The drive can form a reference out of an analogue input signal and a signal received through a serial communication interface by using mathematical functions addition and multiplication It is possible to scale the external reference so that the signal minimum and maximum values correspond to a speed other than the minimum and maximum speed limits Settings Additional information Group 11 REFERENCE External reference source type and scaling SELECT Group 20 LIMITS Operating limits Group 22 ACCEL DECEL Speed reference acceleration and deceleration ramps Group 24 TORQUE CTRL Torque reference ramp times Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 01 11 01 12 Values of external references Group 02 ACTUAL SIGNALS The reference values in different stages of the reference processing chain Parameter Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Active reference reference loss through a relay output Group 15 ANALOGUE Reference value OUTPUTS Program features 47 Reference trimming In reference trimming the external reference External reference REF2 is corrected depending on the measured value of a secondary application variable The block diagram below illustrates the function max freq max speed max torque Select 99 04 DTC
275. rol Program set parameter 16 09 CTRL BOARD SUPPLY to EXTERNAL 24V if the RMIO board is powered from an external supply Application macros 85 Factory macro All drive commands and reference settings can be given from the control panel or from an external control location The active control location is selected with the LOC REM key of the panel The drive is speed controlled In external control the control location is EXT1 The reference signal is connected to analogue input Al1 and Start Stop and Direction signals are connected to digital inputs 011 and 012 By default the direction is fixed to FORWARD parameter 10 03 DI2 does not control the direction of rotation unless parameter 10 03 is changed to REQUEST Three constant speeds are selected by digital inputs 015 and 016 Two acceleration deceleration ramps are preset The acceleration and deceleration ramps are used according to the state of digital input 014 Two analogue signals speed and current and three relay output signals ready running and inverted fault are available The default signals on the display of the control panel are FREQUENCY CURRENT and POWER Application macros 86 Default control connections The figure below shows the external control connections for the Factory macro The markings of the standard I O terminals on the RMIO board are shown 1 Effective only if parameter 10 03 is x20 switched to REQUEST by the user 1 kohm lt R lt
276. rrow keys and ENTER depend on the operation mode of the panel The drive control keys are Activate reference setting 4 Forward direction of rotation Reverse direction of rotation ra Fault reset 7 Change between Local Remote external control 25 Control panel 26 Panel operation mode keys and displays The figure below shows the mode selection keys of the panel and the basic operations and displays in each mode Actual Signal Display Mode Act signal Fault history i de 1945 PME e selection FREQ 45 Actual signal names p and values Act signal Fault message CURRENT 80 scrolling POWER ieee Enter selection mode Accept new signal 100 o Parameter Mode gt Group selection 1L 1242 0 rpm Status row Li 10 START STOP DIR Parameter group 01 EXT1 STRT STP DIR Parameter DIT Parameter value Ww Parameter selection Slow value change Enter change mode ENTER Accept new value Function Mode 1 1 gt 1242 0 rpm Status row Motor Setup Application Macro List of functions Speed Control 1 Row selection Page selection 120 Function start Drive Selection Mode Drive selection ACS800 Device type ID number change Enter change mode ASXR7260 SW loading package ENTER Accept new value ID NUMBER 1 name and ID number Status row The figure below describes the status row digits Drive ID num
277. rt cmd State of the drive start command The function operates on a 100 ms time level Speed 10 11 1213 14 15 16 Time Jog Start Description cmd cmd LZ 1 5 Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the jogging function 23 1 Drive runs jogging speed 34 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function 5 3 Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the jogging function ee Drive runs at the jogging speed 7 8 Normal operation overrides the jogging Drive accelerates to the speed reference along the active acceleration ramp Lx Tow Normal operation overrides the jogging Drive follows the speed reference Drive decelerates to zero speed along the active deceleration ramp 10 11 67 se Drive is stopped 11 12 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging Drive accelerates to the speed reference along the active acceleration ramp 1184 4 19 prve decelerates to jogging speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function 1 9 ii o o Dre decelerates to zero speed along tne deceleration ramp ofthe jogging funcion __ State can be either 1 or 0 Program features 80 Note The jogging is not operational when the drive start command is on or the drive is in local control visible on the first row
278. s IGBT s and it can be activated by short circuit at output of long motor cables No Run enable signal received Short circuit in inverter unit of several parallel connected inverter modules xx 1 12 refers to inverter module number and y refers to phase U V W Short circuit in motor cable s or motor Output bridge of converter unit is faulty Optional start inhibit hardware logic is activated Intermediate circuit DC voltage is oscillating due to missing mains phase blown fuse or rectifier bridge internal fault Trip occurs when DC voltage ripple is 1396 of DC voltage Check that INT board power cable is connected Check that POW board is working correctly Replace INT board Check fibre optic cables or galvanic link With frame sizes R2 R6 link is galvanic If RMIO is powered from external supply ensure that supply is on See parameter 16 09 CTRL BOARD SUPPLY Check signal 03 19 Contact ABB representative if any of faults in signal 3 19 are active Check connection from inverter module Main Circuit Interface Board INT to PPCC Branching Unit PBU Inverter module 1 is connected to PBU INT1 etc Check signal 03 19 Contact ABB representative if any of faults in signal 3 19 are active Check motor cables Check setting of parameter 16 01 Switch on signal or check wiring of selected source Check motor and motor cable Check power semiconductors IGBTs of inverter module Check mot
279. s easy Settings Parameter 21 01 Program features 55 DC Magnetising When DC Magnetising is activated the drive automatically magnetises the motor before starting This feature guarantees the highest possible breakaway torque up to 200 of motor nominal torque By adjusting the premagnetising time it is possible to synchronise the motor start and e g a mechanical brake release The Automatic Start feature and DC Magnetising cannot be activated at the same time Settings Parameters 21 01 and 21 02 DC Hold By activating the motor DC Hold feature it is possible to lock the rotor at zero speed When both the reference and the motor speed fall below the preset DC hold speed the drive stops the motor and starts to inject DC into the motor When the reference speed again exceeds the DC hold speed the normal drive operation resumes DC Hold Settings Parameters 21 04 21 05 and 21 06 Flux Braking The drive can provide greater deceleration by raising the level of magnetisation in the motor By increasing the motor flux the energy generated by the motor during braking can be converted to motor thermal energy This feature is useful in motor power ranges below 15 kW Motor Ter Speed TN Tp Braking Torque No Flux Braking 60 Ty 100 Nm au Flux Braking 20 Flux Brakin No Flux Braking f Hz 50 HZ 60 Hz Program features 56 Braking Torque 120 lt ee e
280. sorbers in motor cable Check that there is no earth fault in motor or motor cables measure insulation resistances of motor and motor cable If no earth fault can be detected contact your local ABB representative Check pulse encoder and its wiring Check pulse encoder interface module and its wiring Interchange connection of pulse encoder phases A and B Check pulse encoder and its wiring pulse encoder interface module and its wiring parameter group 50 ENCODER MODULE settings Stop drive Let it cool down Check ambient temperature Check fan rotates in correct direction and air flows freely Wait until alarm POWEROFF activates and switch control board power off to validate inverter type change Fault tracing 230 WARNING CAUSE WHAT TO DO ID DONE Drive has performed motor identification Continue drive operation FF32 magnetisation and is ready for operation This warning belongs to normal start up procedure ID MAGN Motor identification magnetisation is on This Wait until drive indicates that motor FF31 warning belongs to normal start up procedure identification is completed ID MAGN REQ Motor identification is required This warning Start Identification Magnetisation by pressing FF30 belongs to normal start up procedure Drive Start key or select ID Run and start see expects user to select how motor identification parameter 99 10 should be performed By Identification Magnetisation
281. t 7 or by the RESET key of the control panel Note Reset through fieldbus Control Word bit 7 is enabled automatically and it is independent of parameter 16 04 setting if parameter 10 01 or 10 02 is set to COMM CW RESET key of the control panel N 11 12 DI11 See selection DI1 14 0112 See selection DI1 PARAM 16 11 Source selected by parameter 16 11 16 05 USER MACRO IO CHG Enables the change of the User Macro through a digital input See parameter 99 02 The change is only allowed when the drive is stopped During the change the drive will not start Note Always save the User Macro by parameter 99 02 after changing any parameter settings or reperforming the motor identification The last settings saved by the user are loaded into use whenever the power is switched off and on again or the macro is changed Any unsaved changes will be lost Note The value of this parameter is not included in the User Macro A setting once made remains despite the User Macro change Note Selection of User Macro 2 can be supervised via relay output RO3 See parameter 14 03 for more information NOT SEL User macro change is not possible through a digital input Falling edge of digital input DI1 User Macro 1 is loaded into use Rising edge of digital input DI1 User Macro 2 is loaded into use Actual signals and parameters 2 a 126 3 5
282. t DI1 Activation Digital input DI1 1 Deactivation 011 0 The internal sleep criteria set by parameters 40 21 and 40 23 are not effective The sleep start and stop delays are effective parameter 40 22 and 40 24 FF 0 or Actual signals and parameters 159 Defines the start limit for the sleep function If the motor speed is below a set level 40 21 longer than the sleep delay 40 22 the drive shifts to the sleeping mode the motor is stopped and the control panel shows the warning message 4021 SLEEP LEVEL SLEEP MODE Visible only when parameter 99 02 PID CTRL 0 0 7200 0 rpm Sleep start level 0 7200 40 22 SLEEP DELAY Defines the delay for the sleep start function See parameter 40 21 When the motor speed falls below the sleep level the counter starts When the motor speed exceeds the sleep level the counter resets Visible only when parameter 99 02 PID CTRL 0 0 3600 0 5 Sleep start delay 0 36000 40 23 WAKE UP LEVEL Defines the wake up limit for the sleep function The drive wakes up if the process actual value is below a set level 40 23 longer than the wake up delay 40 24 Visible only when parameter 99 02 PID CTRL 0 0 100 0 The wake up level in percent of the actual process value 0 10000 40 24 WAKE UP DELAY Defines the wake up delay
283. t signed integers A negative reference indicating reversed direction of rotation is formed by calculating the two s complement from the corresponding positive reference value Fieldbus reference selection and correction Fieldbus reference called COM REF in signal selection contexts is selected by setting a Reference selection parameter 11 03 or 11 06 to COMM REFx FAST COMM COM REFx Al1 COM REFx AI5 COM REFx Al1 or COM REFx AlI5 With Generic Drive communication profile fieldbus reference is also selected when par 10 08 is set to 1 The latter four selections enable correction of the fieldbus reference using analogue inputs as shown below An optional RAIO 01 Analogue I O Extension Module is required for use of Analogue input 15 COMM REF 1 11 03 or COMM REF2 in 11 06 The fieldbus reference is forwarded as such without correction FAST COMM The fieldbus reference is forwarded as such without correction The reference is read every 2 milliseconds if either of the following conditions is met Control location is EXT1 par 99 04 MOTOR CTRL MODE 15 DTC and par 40 14 TRIM MODE is OFF e Control location is EXT2 par 99 04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is DTC par 40 14 TRIM MODE is OFF and a torque reference is used In any other event the fieldbus reference is read every 6 milliseconds Note The FAST COMM selection disables the critical soeed function Fieldbus control 200 COM REF1 AI1 COM REF1 AI5 CO
284. t the text continues The drive can receive start stop and direction commands and reference values from the control panel or through digital and analogue inputs An optional fieldbus adapter enables control over an open fieldbus link A PC equipped with DriveWindow can also control the drive Local control ACS800 A 7 V f o j Control panel Fieldbus adapter module RDCO module DriveWindow CH3 DDCS Standard I O i dd 57 5 SJ KI lt External control Slot 1 J IRTAC RDIO RAIO 51911 or Slot 2 CHO Fieldbus adapter DDCS or Advant controller e g AC 80 AC 800M AIMA 01 I O RTAC RDIO RAIO DDCS adapter module module Program features 44 Local control The control commands are given from the control panel keypad when the drive is in local control L indicates local control on the panel display 1 gt 1242 rpm The control panel always overrides the external control signal sources when used local mode External control When the drive is in external control the commands are given through the standard I O terminals digital and analogue inputs optional I O extension modules and or the fieldbus interface In addition it is also possible to set the control panel as the source for
285. ta set DS1 Main Actual Signal data set DS2 Index Auxiliary Reference data set DS3 Index Aux Actual Signal data set DS4 index number is required when data word allocation to process data is defined via the fieldbus parameters at group 51 This function is dependent on the type of the fieldbus adapter With the Generic Drive communication profile active Actual 1 is fixed to actual signal 01 02 SPEED in DTC motor control mode or 01 03 FREQUENCY in Scalar mode The update time for the Main Reference and Main Actual Signal data sets is 6 milliseconds for the Auxiliary Reference and Auxiliary Actual Signal data sets it is 100 milliseconds Fieldbus control 199 The Control Word and the Status Word The Control Word CW is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus system It is effective when the active control location EXT1 or EXT2 see parameters 10 01 and 10 02 is set to COMM CW or if par 10 07 is set to 1 with Generic Drive communication profile only The Control Word is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive The drive switches between its states according to the bit coded instructions of the Control Word The Status Word SW is a word containing status information sent by the drive to the fieldbus controller See section Communication profiles on page 206 for information on the composition of the Control Word and the Status Word References References REF are 16 bi
286. table for the application USER 2 SAVE Save User 2 macro Stores the current parameter settings and the motor model Note There are parameters that are not included in the macros See parameter 99 03 Restores the original settings of the active application macro 99 02 99 03 APPLIC RESTORE f a standard macro Factory Sequential Control is active the parameter values are restored to the default settings factory settings Exceptions parameter settings in parameter group 99 remain unchanged The motor model remains unchanged If User Macro 1 or 2 is active the parameter values are restored to the last saved values In addition the last saved motor model are restored Exceptions Settings of parameters 16 05 and 99 02 remain unchanged Note The parameter settings and the motor model are restored according to the same principles when a macro is changed to another SCALAR Scalar control is suitable in special cases where the DTC cannot be applied 65535 The scalar control mode is recommended for multimotor drives with variable number of motors when the nominal current of the motor is less than 1 6 of the nominal output current of the drive inverter the drive is used for test purposes with no motor connected Note The outstanding motor control accuracy of the DTC cannot be achieved in scalar control The differences between the scalar and DTC control modes are pointed out in this manual in relevant
287. ter 14 20 7 14 12 DIO MOD2 RO1 Selects the drive status indicated through relay output RO1 of digital I O extension module 2 optional see parameter 98 04 14 13 DIO MOD2 RO2 Selects the drive status indicated through relay output 2 of digital I O extension module 2 optional see parameter 98 04 14 14 DIO RO1 Selects the drive status indicated through relay output RO1 of digital I O extension module 3 optional see parameter 98 05 READY i RUNNING NI Actual signals and parameters 121 AT SPEED See parameter 14 01 14 PARAM14 23 Source selected by parameter 14 23 selected Source selected by parameter 1423 parameter 14 23 Selects the drive status indicated through relay output RO2 of digital I O E extension module no 3 optional see parameter 98 05 RERDY ATSPEED _ 1416 ____ Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14 16 of parameter 1407 255 255 31 Parameter index or a constant value See parameter 10 04 for information on 255 255 31 C the difference 32768 32767 14 17 RO PTR2 Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14 17 of parameter 14 02 255 255 31 Parameter index a constant value See parameter 10 04 for information on 255 255 31 C the difference 32768 32767 1418 ROPTR3 Defines the source or c
288. than 0 5 V Set parameter 13 01 to 2 V or to a value higher than 0 5 V and analogue signal loss detection parameter 30 01 to FAULT The drive will stop in case the control signal is lost Speed Reference N e 6 10 Par 13 01 2 V Par 13 02 10V Note If the signal is bipolar 10 VDC use the selection Al1 BIPOLAR The selection Al1 JOYST ignores the negative signal range ho R 17 DI3U 4D Digital input 3 Reference increase Digital input 014 Reference decrease Stop command or power switch off resets the reference to zero Parameter 22 04 defines the rate of the reference change Actual signals and parameters Index Name Selection DI3U 4D DISU 6D COMM REF COM REF1 AlI1 FAST COMM COM REF1 AI5 COM REF1 AI5 5 Al6 AIS JOYST AI6 JOYST AI5 AI6 gt See selection DI3U 4D Fieldbus reference REF Summation of fieldbus reference REF1 and analogue input 107 Digital input 3 Reference increase Digital input 014 Reference decrease The 18 program stores the active speed reference not reset by a stop command or power switch off Parameter 22 04 defines the rate of the reference change 20 21 Multiplication of fieldbus reference REF1 and analogue input Al 22 As with the selec
289. the external control External control is indicated by a blank on the panel display or with an R in those special cases when the panel is defined as a source for external control E gt 1242 rpm I 1 gt 1242 rpm I External Control through the Input External Control by control panel Output terminals or through the fieldbus interfaces The user can connect the control signals to two external control locations EXT1 or EXT2 Depending on the user selection either one is active at a time This function operates on a 12 ms time level Settings Parmeter 11 03 Reference source for EXT1 10 02 Start stop direction source for EXT2 11 06 Reference source for EXT2 Group 98 OPTION Activation of the optional I O and serial communication MODULES Diagnostics Actual signals Additional information 01 11 01 12 EXT1 reference EXT2 reference 03 02 EXT1 EXT2 selection bit in a packed boolean word Program features 45 Block diagram start stop direction source for EXT1 The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for start stop and direction for external control location EXT 1 Bh Std lO lt DI6 Std lO DI6 EXT1 017 to 019 Start stop DI1 DIOext1 10 01 direction DI2 DIlOext1 I O Extensions See group 98 DI1 DIlOext2 OPTION 012 010 ext2 MODULES Fb selection Fieldbus adapter slot 1 See chapter COMM board Fieldbus control CW Standard M
290. the set delay has passed the normal operation resumes 45 02 ENERGY TARIFF Price of energy per kWh Used for reference when savings are calculated See parameters 01 46 SAVED KWH 01 48 SAVED AMOUNT and 01 50 SAVED 2 Price of energy kWh 2 45 08 PUMP REF POWER Pump power when connected directly to supply Used for reference when 0 001 1 1 energy savings are calculated See parameters 01 46 SAVED KWH 01 48 SAVED AMOUNT and 01 50 SAVED 2 Actual signals and parameters 162 0 950 Pump power in percent of nominal motor power Note The maximum value 1000 depends on the motor and is calculated in power up or when the motor power 100 changes 45 00 ENERGY RESET Resets the energy counters 01 46 SAVED KWH 01 47 SAVED GWH 01 48 SAVED AMOUNT 01 49 SAVED AMOUNT M 01 50 SAVED 2 and 01 51 SAVED CO2 KTON DONE Reset not requested normal operation RESET Reset energy counters The value reverts automatically to DONE 50 ENCODER MODULE Encoder connection Visible only when a pulse encoder module optional is installed and activated by parameter 98 01 The settings will remain the same even though the application macro is changed 50 01 PULSE NR States the number of encoder pulses per one revolution 0 29999 ppr Pulse number in pulses per round ppr 29999 50 02 SPEED MEAS MODE Defines how the encoder pulses are calculated Channel A positive ed
291. the speed controller The controller output is the reference for the torque controller Derivative acceleration compensation Proportional integral Speed reference Derivative Calculated actual speed Settings Parameter group 23 SPEED CTRL and 20 LIMITS Diagnostics Actual signal 01 02 Program features 59 Speed control performance figures The table below shows typical performance figures for speed control when Direct Torque Control is used T 96 n Speed Control No Pulse With Pulse 100 Encoder Encoder Static speed error 0 1 to 0 596 Of 1096 of nominal slip Dynamic speed 0 4 sec 0 1 0 1 0 4 sec SHOE ref Dynamic speed error depends on speed controller tuning Ty rated motor torque Ny rated motor speed Nact actual speed ler Speed reference t 5 Torque control performance figures The drive can perform precise torque control without any speed feedback from the motor shaft The table below shows typical performance figures for torque control when Direct Torque Control is used Torque Control No Pulse With Pulse Encoder Encoder Repeatability 396 1 error When operated around zero frequency the error may be greater lt 5 s TN rated motor torque Tref torque reference Tact actual torque Program features 60 Scalar control It is possible to select Scalar Control as the motor control me
292. the value PAR 40 16 selected Not visible when parameter 99 02 PID CTRL 100 0 100 0 Trim reference 10000 10000 Actual signals and parameters 158 40 17 TRIM RANGE Defines the multiplier for the PID controller output used as the trimming factor ADJUST Not visible when parameter 99 02 PID CTRL 100 0 100 0 Multiplying factor 40 18 TRIM SELECTION Selects whether the trimming is used for correcting the speed or torque reference Not visible when parameter 99 02 PID CTRL DIRECT SPD T Speed reference trimming Trim reference is added to the speed reference after ramp calculations Trimming is not effective during ramp stop emergency stop or at speed defined by parameter 30 18 in a fieldbus communication break 40 19 ACTUAL FILT TIME Defines the time constant for the filter through which the actual signals are connected to the process PID controller 0 04 10 00 5 Filter time constant d E Signal 1 1 filter input step S O filter output Filtered Signal t time T filter time constant 40 20 SLEEP SELECTION Activates the sleep function and selects the source for the activation input Visible only when parameter 99 02 PID CTRL See section S eep function for the process PID control on page 69 mam INTERNAL Activated and deactivated automatically as defined by parameters 40 21 and 2 40 23 The function is activated deactivated through digital inpu
293. thod instead of Direct Torque Control DTC In the Scalar Control mode the drive is controlled with a frequency reference The outstanding performance of the default motor control method Direct Torque Control is not achieved in Scalar Control It is recommended to activate the Scalar Control mode in the following special applications In multimotor drives 1 if the load is not equally shared between the motors 2 if the motors are of different sizes or 3 if the motors are going to be changed after the motor identification Ifthe nominal current of the motor is less than 1 6 of the nominal output current of the drive e If the drive is used without a motor connected e g for test purposes e The drive runs a medium voltage motor via a step up transformer In the Scalar Control mode some standard features are not available Settings Parameter 99 04 IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive IR Compensation is active only when the motor Motor Voltage control mode is Scalar see section Scalar control on page 60 When IR Compensation is activated the drive gives an extra voltage boost to the motor at low speeds IR Compensation is useful in applications that require high breakaway torque In Direct Torque Control no IR Compensation is possible needed IR Compensation 7 No compensation Settings Parameter 26 03 Program features 61 Hexagonal motor flux Typically the drive controls th
294. three relay output signals are available on terminal blocks The default signals on the display of the control panel are SPEED TORQUE and CTRL LOC Application macros 92 Default control connections The figure below shows the external control connections for the Torque Control macro The markings of the standard terminals on the RMIO board are shown 1 Selection between external control locations EXT1 and EXT2 2 In use only when the speed control is active DI3 0 3 Off Ramp times according to par 22 02 and 22 03 On Ramp times according to par 22 04 and 22 05 4 Off Run Enable off Drive will not start or stops On Run Enable on Normal operation 5 See parameter 21 09 6 Total maximum current shared between this output and optional modules installed on the board Application macros X20 VREF Reference voltage 10 VDC 1 kohm lt R lt 10 kohm X21 VREF Reference voltage 10 VDC 2 GND kohmsR lt 10 cn E Al1 Speed reference 0 2 10 V Ri gt Lem m GN Torque reference 0 4 20 mA Rin 100 6 ohm 7 Al3 By default not in use 0 4 20 mA Rin B 100 ohm eon Motor speed 0 4 20 mA 0 motor nom 110 AOT speed lt 700 on POA f oz Output current 0 4 20 mA 2 0 motor 12 AO2 current lt a ohm X22 1 __ __ Stop Start 2 D2 __
295. ting actuator 6 of switch 3 18 AW 5 bit 15 incorrect APBU switch 53 setting S3 to ON too low battery voltage Replace backup battery BC OVERHEAT Brake chopper overload Stop drive Let chopper cool down 7114 Check parameter settings of resistor overload 3 18 AW 5 bit 3 protection function see parameter group 27 BRAKE CHOPPER Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits Check that drive supply AC voltage is not excessive BRAKE ACKN Unexpected state of brake acknowledge signal See parameter group 42 BRAKE CONTROL FF 74 Check connection of brake acknowledgement 3 16 AW 4 bit 3 signal BR OVERHEAT Brake resistor overload Stop drive Let resistor cool down 7112 Check parameter settings of resistor overload 3 18 AW 5 bit 2 protection function see parameter group 27 BRAKE CHOPPER Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits CALIBRA DONE Calibration of output current transformers is Continue normal operation FF37 completed CALIBRA REQ Calibration of output current transformers is Calibration starts automatically Wait for a FF36 required Displayed at start if drive is in scalar while control parameter 99 04 and scalar fly start feature is on parameter 21 08 Fault tracing WARNING COMM MODULE 7510 3 08 AW 1 bit 12 programmable Fault Function 30 18 30 19 DC BUS LIM 3211 3 18 AW5 bit 9 programmable Fault Function 30 23 EARTH FAULT 2330 3 08 AW
296. tion COMM REF except the following differences shorter communication cycle time when transferring the reference to the core motor control program 6 ms gt 2 ms the direction cannot be controlled through interfaces defined by parameters 10 01 or 10 02 nor with the control panel parameter group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS is not effective Note If any of the following selections is true the selection is not effective Instead the operation is according to COMM REF parameter 99 02 is PID parameter 99 04 is SCALAR parameter 40 14 has value PROPORTIONAL or DIRECT 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Actual signals and parameters 108 Al1 BIPOLAR Bipolar analogue input 10 10 V The figure below illustrates the use of 38 the input as the speed reference Operation Range SEE dE MEME MM RG TE lx maxREF1 10 03 DIRECTION FORWARD or REQUEST minREF1 minREF1 555525 Speed Reference 10 03 DIRECTION REVERSE or REQUEST scaled maxREF 1 maxAl1 minAI 1 minAl1 Analogue Input Signal eee DE EE ECT minAl1 13 01 MINIMUM maxAl1 13 02 MAXIMUM 1 scaled maxREF1 13 03 SCALE x 11 05 EXT REF 1 MAXIMUM minREF 1 11 04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM 18000 rpm Setting range in rpm Hz if parameter 99 04 is SCALAR Example Analogue input Al1 is selected as the reference source valu
297. tomise the operation any further The Adaptive Program makes freer customising possible without the need of a special programming tool or language e The program is built of standard function blocks included in the drive application program e The control panel is the programming tool The user can document the program by drawing it on block diagram template sheets The maximum size of the Adaptive Program is 15 function blocks The program may consist of several separate functions For more information see the Application Guide for Adaptive Program 3AFE64527274 English DriveAP DriveAP is a Windows based tool for Adaptive Programming With DriveAP it is possible to upload the Adaptive Program from the drive and edit it with PC For more information see the DriveAP User s Manual 3 64540998 5 Program features 5 Control of a mechanical brake The mechanical brake is used for holding the motor and driven machinery at zero speed when the drive is stopped or not powered Example The figure below shows a brake control application example function is integrated fulfils the personnel safety regulations Note that the frequency converter a Complete Drive Module or a Basic Drive Module as defined in IEC 61800 2 is not considered as a safety device mentioned in the European Machinery Directive and related harmonised standards Thus the personnel safety of the complete machinery must not be based on
298. tor Thermal Protection on page 62 The drive generates a warning when the temperature exceeds the warning level 95 of the allowed maximum value The drive trips on a fault when the temperature exceeds the fault level 100 of the allowed maximum value NO The drive generates a warning when the temperature exceeds the warning level 95 of the allowed maximum value The protection is based on the calculated motor thermal model The following assumptions are used in the calculation The motor is at the estimated temperature value of 01 37 MOTOR TEMP EST saved at power switch off when the power is switched on With the first power switch on the motor is at the ambient temperature 30 C The motor temperature increases if it operates in the region above the load curve The motor temperature decreases if it operates in the region below the curve This applies only if the motor is overheated The motor thermal time constant is an approximate value for a standard self ventilated squirrel cage motor It is possible to finetune the model by parameter 30 07 Note The model cannot be used with high power motors parameter 99 06 is higher than 800 A WARNING The model does not protect the motor if it does not cool N properly due to dust and dirt The protection is based on the user defined motor thermal model and the following basic assumptions The motor is at the estimated temperature value of 01 37 MOTOR TE
299. tried no change is accepted and warning is displayed Parameter lock is on Make sure panel is in local mode Retry there might be interference on link Contact ABB representative Stop motor Perform downloading Check Panel Link connections Press RESET key Panel reset may take up to half a minute please wait Check panel type and drive application program version Panel type is printed on panel cover Application program version is stored in parameter 33 02 Disconnect another station from link to free ID number Perform upload function before downloading See chapter Control panel Retry there might be interference on link Contact ABB representative Stop motor then change parameter value Open parameter lock see parameter 16 02 Fault tracing 236 Fault messages generated the drive FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO ACS800 TEMP Drive IGBT temperature is excessive Fault trip Check ambient conditions 4210 limit is 100 Check air flow and fan operation 3 05 FW 1 bit 3 Check heatsink fins for dust pick up Check motor power against unit power ACS TEMP xx y Excessive internal temperature in inverter unit Check ambient conditions 4210 of several parallel connected inverter modules Check air flow and fan operation 3 05 FW 4 bit 3 and Xx 1 12 refers to inverter module number 4 01 and y refers to phase U V W Check heatsink fins for dust pick up Check motor power against un
300. ts NDIO Communication active Module type NDIO module Connection interface Fibre optic DDCS link Note Module node number must be set to 2 For directions see the NTAC Ox NDIO OX NAIO Ox Module Installation and Start up Guide 3AFY58919730 English Actual signals and parameters 4 7 1 2 5 179 gt RDIO SLOT1 Communication active Module type RDIO Connection interface Option slot 1 of the drive RDIO SLOT2 Communication active Module type RDIO Connection interface Option slot 2 of the drive RDIO DDCS Communication active Module type RDIO Connection interface Optional I O module adapter AIMA that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link Note Module node number must be set to 2 For directions see the RD O Module User s Manual 3AFE64485733 English 98 04 EXT MODULE 2 Activates the communication to the digital extension module 2 optional and defines the type and connection interface of the module Module inputs See parameter 98 10 for the use of the inputs in the drive application program Module outputs See parameters 14 12 and 14 13 for selecting the drive states that are indicated through the relay outputs NDIO Communication active Module type NDIO module Connection interface Fibre optic DDCS link Note Module node number must be set to For directions see the NTAC 0x NDIO OX NAIO Ox Module Installation and Start up Guide 3A
301. tures 54 Power loss ride through If the incoming supply voltage is cut off the drive will continue to operate by utilising the kinetic energy of the rotating motor The drive will be fully operational as long as the motor rotates and generates energy to the drive The drive can continue the operation after the break if the main contactor remained closed HH TM Upc Nm Hz V d c 160 80 520 120 60 390 80 40 260 40 20 130 1 6 4 8 8 11 2 14 4 Upc Intermediate circuit voltage of the drive fout output frequency of the drive Motor torque Loss of supply voltage at nominal load 40 Hz The intermediate circuit DC voltage drops to the minimum limit The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the mains is switched off The drive runs the motor in generator mode The motor speed falls but the drive is operational as long as the motor has enough kinetic energy Note Cabinet assembled units equipped with main contactor option have a hold circuit that keeps the contactor control circuit closed during a short supply break The allowed duration of the break is adjustable The factory setting is five seconds Automatic Start Since the drive can detect the state of the motor within a few milliseconds the starting is immediate under all conditions There is no restart delay E g the starting of turbining pumps or windmilling fans i
302. tween process and speed control Torque Torque control applications Switching between torque and speed control is Control possible Sequential Speed control applications in which speed reference seven constant speeds and Control two acceleration and deceleration ramps can be used User The user can save the customised standard macro i e the parameter settings including group 99 and the results of the motor identification into the permanent memory and recall the data at a later time Two user macros are essential when switching between two different motors is required Application macros 84 Note on external power supply A External 24 V power supply for the RMIO board is recommended if the application requires a fast start after connecting the input power supply e fieldbus communication is required when the input power supply is disconnected The RMIO board can be supplied from an external power source via terminal X23 or X34 or via both X23 and X34 The internal power supply to terminal X34 can be left connected when using terminal X23 WARNING If the RMIO board is supplied from an external power source via terminal X34 the loose end of the cable removed from the RMIO board terminal must be secured mechanically to a location where it cannot come into contact with electrical parts If the screw terminal plug of the cable is removed the wire ends must be individually insulated Parameter settings In Standard Cont
303. uit If the maximum allowed power is exceeded the drive torque is automatically limited Maximum overload and continuous power limits depend on the drive hardware For specific values refer to the appropriate hardware manual Automatic resets The drive can automatically reset itself after overcurrent overvoltage undervoltage and analogue input below a minimum faults The Automatic Resets must be activated by the user Settings Parameter group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET Supervisions The drive monitors whether certain user selectable variables are within the user defined limits The user may set limits for speed current etc The supervision functions operate on a 100 ms time level Settings Parameter group 32 SUPERVISION Diagnostics Actual Signals Additional information 03 02 Supervision limit indicating bits in a packed boolean word 03 04 Supervision limit indicating bits in a packed boolean word 03 14 Supervision limit indicating bits in a packed boolean word Group 14 RELAY Supervision limit indication through a relay output OUTPUTS Parameter lock The user can prevent parameter adjustment by activating the parameter lock Settings Parameters 16 02 and 16 03 Program features 68 Process PID control There is a built in PID controller in the drive The controller can be used to control process variables such as pressure flow or fluid level When the process PID control is activated a process reference
304. ull out torque limit and minimum and maximum torque limits defined by parameters 20 13 and 20 14 Control panel selected as active control location for drive has ceased communicating Source selection pointer parameter points to non existing parameter index Inverter type e g 570025 3 has been changed Inverter type is usually changed at factory or during drive implementation Check start up data Check Fault Function parameters Check value of alarm limit Check that actual number of sensors corresponds to value set by parameter Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc Check value of alarm limit Check that actual number of sensors corresponds to value set by parameter Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc Informative alarm Check parameter 20 11 P MOTORING LIM and 20 12 P GENERATING LIM settings Check Fault Function parameters Informative alarm Check parameter 20 13 MIN TORQ SEL and 20 14 MAX TORQ SEL settings Check Fault Function parameters If LIMIT WORD 1 0 TORQ MOTOR LIM is 1 check motor parameter settings parameter group 99 START UP DATA ensure that ID run has been completed successfully Check panel connection see appropriate hardware manual Check control panel connector Replace control panel in mounting platform Check Fault Function par
305. unction 30 10 30 12 Motor temperature is too high or appears to be Check motor ratings and load 4310 too high due to excessive load insufficient Check start up data 3 05 FW 1 bit 6 motor power inadequate cooling or incorrect start up data Check Fault Function parameters programmable Fault Function 30 04 30 09 MOTOR 1 TEMP Measured motor temperature has exceeded Check value of fault limit 4312 fault limit set by parameter 35 03 Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor 3 15 FW 4 bit 1 cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc MOTOR 2 TEMP Measured motor temperature has exceeded Check value of fault limit 4313 fault limit set by parameter 35 06 Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor 3 15 FW 4 bit 2 cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc NO MOT DATA Motor data is not given or motor data does Check motor data parameters FF52 match with inverter data 99 04 99 09 3 06 FW 2 bit 1 Fault tracing 241 FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO OVERCURR xx 2310 3 05 FW 1 bit 1 and 4 01 OVERCURRENT 2310 3 05 FW 1 bit 1 OVERFREQ 7123 3 05 FW 1 bit 9 OVER SWFREQ FF55 3 06 FW 2 bit 9 PANEL LOSS 5300 3 06 FW 2 bit 13 programmable Fault Function 30 02 PARAM CRC 6320 POWERFAIL 3381 3 17 FW 5 bit 9 Overcurrent fault in inverter unit of several parallel connected inverter modules xx 1 12 refers to
306. unning time counter actual signal 01 43 EE NO Nee Reset The counter restarts from zero 65535 35 MOT TEMP MEAS Motor temperature measurement For the function description see sections Motor temperature measurement through the standard I O on page 71 and Motor temperature measurement through an analogue I O extension on page ne 35 01 MOT 1 TEMP Al1 SEL Activates the motor 1 temperature measurement function and selects the sensor type Note If an optional analogue I O extension module RAIO is used for the temperature measurement and 35 01 1 TEMP SEL and or 35 04 MOT 2 TEMP AI2 SEL are set to 1xPT100 analogue extension module input signal range must be set to 0 2 V instead of 0 10 V with DIP switches NOT IN USE The function is inactive 1xPT100 The function is active The temperature is measured with one Pt 100 sensor Analogue output AO1 feeds constant current through the sensor The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises as does the voltage over the sensor The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analogue input 1 and converts it to degrees centigrade 2XPT100 The function is active Temperature is measured using two Pt 100 sensors See selection 1xPT100 3XPT100 The function is active Temperature is measured using three Pt 100 sensors See selection 1xPT100 Actual signals and parameters 153 1 3 The function is active The temperature
307. urve output current as a function of frequency The load curve is defined by eight points by parameters 72 02 72 17 If the load curve is exceeded a fault warning current limitation is activated A T T Normal motor load capacity User load curve Frequency 0 50 Hz 100 Hz Overload Overload supervision can be applied to the user load curve by setting parameters 72 18 LOAD CURRENT LIMIT 72 20 COOLING TIME according to the overload values defined by the motor manufacturer The supervision is based on an integrator l dt Whenever the drive output current exceeds the user load curve the integrator is started When the integrator has reached the overload limit defined by parameters 72 18 and 72 19 the drive reacts as defined by parameter 72 01 OVERLOAD FUNC The output of the integrator is set to zero if the current stays continuously below the user load curve for the cooling time defined by parameter 72 20 COOLING TIME If the overload time 72 19 LOAD THERMAL TIME is set to zero the drive output current Is limited to the user load curve Current 72 20 2 COOLING TIME loutput Frequency Time Program features 82 Settings Additional information Group 72 USER LOAD User load curve CURVE Diagnostics Actual value Additional information 02 20 Measured motor current in percent of the user load curve current Additional information USER L CURVE Integrated motor current has exceeded l
308. utes Macro saving will be completed after the file compression Operation is indicated on the last row of the control panel display by blinking dots To recall the user macro e Change parameter 99 02 to USER 1 LOAD Press ENTER to load The user macro can also be switched via digital inputs see parameter 16 05 Note User macro load restores also the motor settings in group 99 START UP DATA and the results of the motor identification Check that the settings correspond to the motor used Example The user can switch the drive between two motors without having to adjust the motor parameters and to repeat the motor identification every time the motor is changed The user needs only to adjust the settings and perform the motor identification once for both motors and then to save the data as two user macros When the motor is changed only the corresponding User macro needs to be loaded and the drive is ready to operate Application macros 96 Application macros 97 Actual signals and parameters Chapter overview The chapter describes the actual signals and parameters and gives the fieldbus equivalent values for each signal parameter More data is given in chapter Additional data actual signals and parameters Terms and abbreviations Absolute Maximum Value of 20 08 or 20 07 if the absolute value of the minimum limit is Frequency greater than the maximum limit Absolute Maximum Value of parameter 20 02 or 20 01 if th
309. uto The Start Stop Direction commands of EXT1 Hand are connected to digital inputs 011 and 012 and the reference signal is connected to analogue input Al1 The Start Stop Direction commands of EXT2 Auto are connected to digital inputs 015 and DI6 and the reference signal is connected to analogue input Al2 The selection between EXT and 2 is dependent on the status of digital 013 The drive is speed controlled Speed reference and Start Stop and Direction commands can be given from the control panel keypad also One constant speed can be selected through digital input Speed reference in Auto Control 2 is given as a percentage of the maximum speed of the drive Two analogue and three relay output signals are available on terminal blocks The default signals on the display of the control panel FREQUENCY CURRENT and CTRL LOC Application macros 88 Default control connections The figure below shows the external control connections for the Hand Auto macro The markings of the standard I O terminals on the RMIO board are shown 1 Selection between two external X20 control locations EXT1 and EXT2 1 VREF Reference voltage 10 VDC 1 kohm lt R lt 10 kohm 2 See parameter 21 09 X21 VREF Reference voltage 10 VDC kohm lt lt 2 GND 10kohm 3 me snare E Speed reference Hand control 0 2 10 V between this output and optional
310. value Does not include the direction information Setting range 0 18000 Defines speed 4 An absolute value Does not include the direction information Setting range 0 18000 Defines speed 5 An absolute value Does not include the direction information Setting range 0 18000 Defines speed 6 An absolute value Does not include the direction information Setting range 0 18000 Defines speed 7 An absolute value Does not include the direction information Setting range 0 18000 Defines speed 8 An absolute value Does not include the direction information Setting range 0 18000 Defines speed 9 An absolute value Does not include the direction information Setting range 0 18000 Defines speed 10 An absolute value Does not include the direction information 0 18000 rpm 12 12 CONST SPEED 11 Setting range 0 18000 Defines speed 11 An absolute value Does not include the direction information 0 18000 rpm Setting range 0 18000 12 13 CONST SPEED 12 Defines speed 12 An absolute value Does not include the direction information Note If inching is in use the parameter defines the inching 1 speed The sign is taken into account See chapter Fie dbus control 18000 18000 rpm Setting range 18000 18000 Actual signals and parameters 113 CONST SPEED 13 12 14 Defines speed 13 An absolute value Does not include the direction information Note If inching is in use the p
311. value when parameter 40 15 has been set to value PAR 40 28 Parameter index or a constant value 100 1 Parameter pointer Inversion group index and bit fields The bit number is effective only for blocks handling boolean inputs Constant value Inversion and constant fields Inversion field must have value C to enable the constant setting Control of a mechanical brake The function operates on a 100 ms time level For the function description see section Control of a mechanical brake on page 75 Actual signals and parameters 160 4202 BRAKE Activates the external brake on off supervision and selects the source for the ACKNOWLEDGE signal The use of the external on off supervision signal is optional 015 Active Digital input 015 is the signal source 015 1 The brake is open 2 015 0 the brake is closed DI11 See selection 015 DI12 See selection DI5 42 03 BRAKE OPEN DELAY Defines the brake open delay the delay between the internal open brake command and the release of the motor speed control The delay counter starts when the drive has magnetised the motor and risen the motor torque to the level required at the brake release parameters 42 07 and 42 08 Simultaneously with the counter start the brake function energises the relay output controlling the brake and the brake starts opening 0 0 5 05 Delay time Set the delay the same as the mechanical opening delay of the 0 500 brake spe
312. when parameter 95 04 value is changed Note This parameter is used only in special applications NDIO Module type NDIO module Connection interface Fibre optic DDCS link Note Module node number must be set to 8 For directions see the NTAC 0x NDIO OX NAIO Ox Module Installation and Start up Guide 3AFY58919730 English NO RDIO SLOT 1 Module type RDIO Connection interface Option slot 1 of the drive RDIO SLOT2 Module type RDIO Connection interface Option slot 2 of the drive Actual signals and parameters 4 5 1 2 1 2 2 3 4 Index Name Selection RDIO DDCS 99 START UP DATA 99 01 LANGUAGE ENGLISH ENGLISH AM DEUTSCH ITALIANO ESPANOL PORTUGUES NEDERLANDS FRANCAIS DANSK SUOMI SVENSKA CESKY POLSKI LOC1 PO RUS LOC2 99 02 APPLICATION MACRO FACTORY HAND AUTO PID CTRL T CTRL SEQ CTRL USER 1 LOAD Rsm ooo Factory for basic applications Torque Control macro 183 Module type RDIO Connection interface Optional I O module adapter AIMA that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link Note Module node number must be set to 8 For directions see the RDIO Module User s Manual 3AFE64485733 English Selects the application macro See chapter Application macros for more information Note When you change the default parameter values of a macro the new settings become valid immediately and stay vali
313. where a smooth transition is required when changing from one speed to another The S curve consists of symmetrical curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear part in between A rule of thumb Speed Linear ramp Par 22 06 06 S curve A suitable relation between the ee ee _ ramp shape time and the acceleration ramp time is 1 5 Par 22 06 gt 06 22 02 22 06 Defines the time inside which the drive is stopped if the drive receives an emergency stop command or the Run Enable signal is switched off and the Run Enable function has value OFF3 see parameter 21 07 The emergency stop command can be given through a fieldbus or an Emergency Stop module optional Consult the local ABB representative for more information on the optional module and the related settings of the Standard Control Program 0 00 2000 00 s Deceleration time 0 200000 22 08 Defines the source constant for value PAR 22 08 amp 09 of parameter 22 01 255 255 31 255 255 31 C 32768 32767 Parameter index or a constant value See parameter 10 04 for information 100 165 the difference 2209 Defines the source or constant for value PAR 22 08 amp 09 of parameter 22 01 255 255 31 255 255 31 C 32768 C 32767 Parameter index or a constant value See parameter 10 04 for information 100 165 the difference Actual signals an
314. xplained in section Reference handling on REQUEST page 200 10 07 0 1 Setting the value to 1 overrides the setting of par 10 01 so that the fieldbus Control Word except 03 01 Main Control Word bit 11 is enabled when EXT is selected as the active control location Note 1 Only visible with the Generic Drive communication profile selected see par 98 07 Note 2 Setting not saved into permanent memory 10 08 0 or 1 Setting the value to 1 overrides the setting of par 11 03 so that Fieldbus reference REF1 is used when EXT is selected as the active control location Note 1 Only visible with the Generic Drive communication profile selected see par 98 07 Note 2 Setting not saved into permanent memory 11 02 COMM CW Enables EXT1 EXT2 selection by fieldbus Control Word bit 11 EXT CTRL LOC COMM REF1 Fieldbus reference REF1 is used when EXT is selected as the active FAST COMM control location See section References on page 199 for information on COM REF1 AI1 the alternative settings COM REF1 AlI5 COM REF1 AI1 or COM REF1 AI5 COMM REF2 Fieldbus reference REF2 is used when EXT2 is selected as the active FAST COMM control location See section References on page 199 for information on COM REF2 AI1 the alternative settings COM REF2 AI5 COM REF2 AI1 or COM REF2 AI5 Fieldbus control 196 Parameter Setting for Function Information fieldbus control OUTPUT SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION 14 01 COM REF3 Enables relay out
315. y Select the motor identification method 19 1 gt 0 0 rpm O ACS800 WARNING ID MAGN REQ 1 gt 0 0 rpm I Information Press green button to start ID MAGN The default value ID MAGN ID Magnetisation is suitable for most applications It is applied in this basic start up procedure If your selection is ID Magnetisation move to next step without pressing any key The ID Run STANDARD or REDUCED should be selected if he operation point is near zero speed and or Operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque within a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback is required If your selection is ID Run continue by following the separate instructions given a few pages ahead in section How to perform the ID Run on page 22 Press the LOC REM key to change to local control L shown on the first row Press to start the Identification Magnetisation The motor is magnetised at zero speed for 20 to 60 s Three warnings are displayed The first warning is displayed when the magnetisation starts The second warning is displayed while the magnetisation is on The third warning is displayed after the magnetisation is completed 1 L gt 1242 0 rpm I WARNING MOTOR STARTS 1 L gt 0 0 rpm I WARNING ID MAGN 1 L gt 0 0 rpm O WARNING ID DONE Start up and control through the I O 20 Check the direction of rotation of the motor Press ACT
316. y after fault reset If the cause of the fault has not been removed the drive will trip again To display an active fault 1L gt 1242 0 rpm ACS800 FAULT ACS800 TEMP To reset the fault 1 L gt 1242 0 rpm FREQ 45 00 Hz CURRENT 80 00 A POWER 75 00 About the fault history The fault history restores information on the latest events faults warnings and resets of the drive The table below shows how the events are stored in the fault history Drive detects a fault and Sequential number of the event and A Fault History View generates a fault message LAST FAULT text Sign Name and Name of the fault and a sign in front code of the name Power Total power on time ontime User resets the fault message Sequential number of the event and LAST FAULT text 1 L gt 1242 0 rpm I RESET FAULT text 2 LAST FAULT DC OVERVOLT 3210 1121 H 1 MIN 23 5 Drive generates a warning Sequential number of the event and message LAST WARNING text Name of the warning and a sign in front of the name Sequential number 1 is the most recent event Total power on time Total power on time Drive deactivates the warning Sequential number of the event and message LAST WARNING text Name of the warning and front of the name sign in Total power on time Control panel 32 Parameter mode In the Parameter Mode the user can view the parameter values c
317. z 15 08MINIMUMAO2 ______ ____ ____ ____ 5OSFILTERAO2 ______ gt 006 2006 2006 00s 00s 15 10 _ 009 ______ 100 ______ 100 1009 ______ 100 _ p bD A pe 451240276 bD b 16 01 Mes wes YES paw 16 02 PARAMETERLOCK OPEN OPEN __ __ OPEN OPEN 52 76 03 55 b p b OY 16 06 LOCAL LOCK oF jr orF gs6 0 PARAMETER SAVE _ CENE CN 257 16 08 RUN ENA PTR 258 16 09 CTRL BOARD SUPPLY OTERA OTERA OTERA OTERA OTERA ee 258 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V Additional data actual signals and parameters 256 Index Name Selection ______ __ HAND AUTO PID CTRL SEQCTRL PB W _____ 16 1 bo bp b ba 16 12 NO NO ANO 2 LIMITS SS PRINS NEN 20 01 MINIMUM SPEED calculated calculated calculated calculated calculated 351 20 02 MAXIMUM SPEED calculated calculated calculated calculated calculated 352 20 03 MAXIMUM CURRENT type specific specific type specific specific specific 353 20 04 7 3000 _____ 800 foo _____ 800 30 9840 20 05 OVERVOLTAGE CTRL ON N N JN 20 06JUNDERVOLTAGE CTRL ON

ACS800 Programming Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents